Skip to main content

Full text of "bmw 2010 z4"

See other formats


Owner's Manual 


o 

for Vehicle 


The Ultimate 

Driving Machine 


Contents 

A-Z 







Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 



Z4 sDrive30i 
Z4 sDrive35i 


Owner's Manual for Vehicle 

Congratulations, and thank you for choosing a BMW. 

Thorough familiarity with your vehicle will provide you with 
enhanced control and security when you drive it. We therefore 
have this request: 

Please take the time to read this Owner's Manual and familiarize 
yourself with the information that we have compiled for you 
before starting off in your new vehicle. It contains important data 
and instructions intended to assist you in gaining maximum use 
and satisfaction from your BMW's unique range of technical fea¬ 
tures. The manual also contains information on maintenance 
designed to enhance operating safety and contribute to main¬ 
taining the value of your BMW throughout an extended 
service life. 

This manual is supplemented by a Service and Warranty Informa¬ 
tion Booklet for US models or a Warranty and Service Guide 
Booklet for Canadian models. 

We wish you an enjoyable driving experience. 

BMW AG 


BMW recommends CdStrol / 


Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 




© 2009 Bayerische Motoren Werke 

Aktiengesellschaft 

Munich, Germany 

Reprinting, including excerpts, only with the 
written consent of BMW AG, Munich. 

US English VIII/09, 09 09 500 

Printed on environmentally friendly paper, 

bleached without chlorine, suitable for recycling. 


Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 



Contents 


The fastest way to find information on a partic¬ 
ular topic or item is by using the index, refer 
to page 236. 

Using this Owner's Manual 

4 Notes 

6 Reporting safety defects 

At a glance 

10 Cockpit 
16 Drive 

22 Letters and numbers 

23 Voice activation system 

Controls 

28 Opening and closing 
41 Adjustments 
48 Transporting children safely 
50 Driving 
64 Controls overview 
77 Technology for driving comfort and 
safety 
88 Lamps 
93 Climate 

100 Practical interior accessories 

Driving tips 

112 Things to remember when driving 

Navigation 

120 Navigation system 

121 Destination entry 
130 Destination guidance 
137 What to do if... 

Entertainment 

140 On/off and tone 

143 Radio 

146 Satellite radio 

151 CD/DVD player and CD/DVD changer 
158 Music collection 
163 External devices 


Communications 

170 Telephone 
182 Contacts 
184 BMW Assist 

Mobility 

192 Refueling 
194 Wheels and tires 
201 Linder the hood 
206 Maintenance 
208 Care 

212 Replacing components 

218 Giving and receiving assistance 

Reference 

226 Technical data 

229 Short commands for the voice activation 
system 

236 Everything from A to Z 


Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 


Notes 


Notes 


Using this Owner's Manual 

We have tried to make all the information in this 
Owner's Manual easy to find. The fastest way to 
find specific topics is to refer to the detailed 
index at the back of the manual. If you wish to 
gain an initial overview of your vehicle, you will 
find this in the first chapter. 

Should you sell your BMW some day, please 
remember to hand over the Owner's Manual as 
well; it is an important component of your 
vehicle. 

Additional sources of information 

Should you have any other questions, your 
BMW center will be glad to advise you at 
anytime. 

Information on BMW, e.g., on technical aspects, 
can also be found on the Internet at 
www.bmwusa.com. 


Symbols used 


□ Indicates precautions that must be fol¬ 
lowed precisely in order to avoid the pos¬ 
sibility of personal injury and serious damage to 
the vehicle.◄ 


> 


Indicates information that will assist you 
in gaining the optimum benefit from your 
vehicle and enable you to care more effectively 
for your vehicle.◄ 

Refers to measures that can be taken to 
help protect the environment. ◄ 


◄ Marks the end of a specific item of infor¬ 
mation. 

* Indicates special equipment, country-spe¬ 
cific equipment and optional accessories, as 
well as equipment and functions not yet avail¬ 
able at the time of printing. 

"..." Identifies Control Display texts used to 
select individual functions. 


>...< Verbal instructions to use with the voice 
activation system. 

>>...< < Identifies the answers generated by the 
voice activation system. 


Symbols on vehicle components 

pm Indicates that you should consult the rel- 
1 1 evant section of this Owner's Manual for 

information on a particular part or assembly. 


4 


Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 




The individual vehicle 

When you ordered your BMW, you chose vari¬ 
ous items of equipment. This Owner's Manual 
describes the entire array of options and equip¬ 
ment available with a specific BMW model. 

Please bear in mind that the manual may con¬ 
tain information on accessories and equipment 
that you have not specified for your own vehicle. 
Sections describing options and special equip¬ 
ment are marked by asterisks * to assist you in 
identifying possible differences between the 
descriptions in this manual and your own vehi¬ 
cle's equipment. 

If equipment in your BMW is not described in 
this Owner's Manual, please refer to the accom¬ 
panying Supplementary Owner's Manuals. 

Editorial notice 

BMW pursues a policy of continuous, ongoing 
development that is conceived to ensure that 
our vehicles continue to embody the highest 
quality and safety standards combined with 
advanced, state-of-the-art technology. For this 
reason, it is possible in exceptional cases that 
features described in this Owner's Manual 
could differ from those on your vehicle. 


For your own safety 

Maintenance and repair 

Advanced technology, e.g., the use of 
modern materials and powerful electron¬ 
ics, requires specially adapted maintenance 
and repair methods. You should therefore have 
the corresponding work on your vehicle per¬ 
formed only by your BMW center or at a work¬ 
shop that works according to BMW repair pro¬ 
cedures with correspondingly trained 
personnel. If this work is not carried out prop¬ 
erly, there is a danger of subsequent damage 
and related safety hazards.◄ 

Parts and accessories 

For your own safety, use genuine parts 
and accessories approved by BMW. 

When you purchase accessories tested and 
approved by BMW and Original BMW Parts, you 
simultaneously acquire the assurance that they 
have been thoroughly tested by BMW to ensure 
optimum performance when installed on your 
vehicle. 

BMW warrants these parts to be free from 
defects in material and workmanship. 

BMW will not accept any liability for damage 
resulting from installation of parts and accesso¬ 
ries not approved by BMW. 

BMW cannot test every product made by other 
manufacturers to verify if it can be used on a 
BMW safely and without risk to either the vehi¬ 
cle, its operation, or its occupants. 

Original BMW Parts, BMW Accessories and 
other products approved by BMW, together 
with professional advice on using these items, 
are available from all BMW centers. 




5 

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 


Notes 


Installation and operation of accessories not 
approved by BMW, such as alarms, radios, 
amplifiers, radar detectors, wheels, suspension 
components, brake dust shields, telephones, 
including operation of any mobile phone from 
within the vehicle without using an externally 
mounted antenna, or transceiver equipment, for 
instance, CBs, walkie-talkies, ham radio or sim¬ 
ilar accessories, may cause extensive damage 
to the vehicle, compromise its safety, interfere 
with the vehicle's electrical system or affect the 
validity of the BMW Limited Warranty. See your 
BMW center for additional information.◄ 


> 


Maintenance, replacement, or repair of 
the emission control devices and sys¬ 


tems may be performed by any automotive 
repair establishment or individual using any cer¬ 
tified automotive part.^ 


California Proposition 65 warning 

California law requires us to issue the following 
warning: 

□ Engine exhaust and a wide variety of 
automobile components and parts, 
including components found in the interior fur¬ 
nishings in a vehicle, contain or emit chemicals 
known to the State of California to cause cancer 
and birth defects and reproductive harm. In 
addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and 
certain products of component wear contain or 
emit chemicals known to the State of California 
to cause cancer and birth defects or other 
reproductive harm. 

Battery posts, terminals and related accesso¬ 
ries contain lead and lead compounds. Wash 
your hands after handling. 

Used engine oil contains chemicals that have 
caused cancer in laboratory animals. Always 
protect your skin by washing thoroughly with 
soap and water. ◄ 


Service and warranty 

We recommend that you read this publication 
thoroughly. 

Your BMW is covered by the following war¬ 
ranties: 

> New Vehicle Limited Warranty 

> Rust Perforation Limited Warranty 

> Federal Emissions System Defect Warranty 

> Federal Emissions Performance Warranty 

> California Emission Control System Limited 
Warranty 

Detailed information about these warranties is 
listed in the Service and Warranty Information 
Booklet for US models or in the Warranty and 
Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models. 

Your vehicle has been specifically adapted and 
designed to meet the particular operating con¬ 
ditions and homologation requirements in your 
country and continental region in order to 
deliver the full BMW driving pleasure while the 
vehicle is operated under those conditions. If 
you wish to operate your vehicle in another 
country or region, you may be required to adapt 
your vehicle to meet different prevailing operat¬ 
ing conditions and homologation requirements. 
You should also be aware of any applicable war¬ 
ranty limitations or exclusions for such country 
or region. In such case, please contact Cus¬ 
tomer Relations for further information. 


Reporting safety defects 

For US customers 

The following only applies to vehicles owned 
and operated in the US. 

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect 
which could cause a crash or could cause injury 
or death, you should immediately inform the 
NationalHig h way T raff i c Safety Ad ministration, 
NHTSA, in addition to notifying BMW of North 
America, LLC, P.O. Box 1227, Westwood, 

New Jersey 07675-1227, Telephone 1 -800- 
831-1117. 


6 

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 




If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may 
open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety 
defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order 
a recall and remedy campaign. However, 
NHTSA cannot become involved in individual 
problems between you, your center, or BMW of 
North America, LLC. 

To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle 
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to 
http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Adminis¬ 
trator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., 
Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain 
other information about motor vehicle safety 
from http://www.safercar.gov 

For Canadian customers 

Canadian customers who wish to report a 
safety-related defect to Transport Canada, 
Defect Investigations and Recalls, may call 
1 -800-333-0510 toll-free from anywhere in 
Canada or 1 -613-993-9851 from the Ottawa 
region and from other countries, or contact 
Transport Canada by mail at: Transport Can¬ 
ada, ASFAD, Place de Ville, Tower C, 

330 Sparks Street, Ottawa, ON, K1A 0N5. 

You can also obtain other information about 
motor vehicle safety from http://www.tc.gc.ca 


7 

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 



Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 






At a glance 

This overview of buttons, switches and displays 
is intended to familiarize you with your vehicle's 
operating environment. The section will also 
assist you in becoming acquainted with the 
control concepts and options available for 
operating the various systems. 


Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 


Cockpit 


Cockpit 

Around the steering wheel: controls and displays 



—j Opening and closing windows 
== jointly 37 

6 _ , 
-DOr 

Parking lamps 88 

Opening and closing rear 

I J windows 37 

ID 

Low beams 88 

Opening and closing front 

1 J windows 37 

ID 

Automatic 

headlamp control* 88 
Adaptive light control* 89 

Folding exterior mirrors in and out* 45 


High-beam assistant* 90 

Adjusting exterior mirrors, automatic curb 
monitor* 45 




10 


Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 















































<X> Turn signals 59 
= Q) High beams, headlamp flasher 90 
= £A High-Beam Assistant* 90 

Roadside parking lamps* 90 

BC Computer 65 

A Settings and information about the 

^ vehicle 68 


8 Instrument cluster 12 

9 Buttons* on the steering wheel 


O 

O 


Changing radio station 
Selecting music track 
Scrolling through phone book and 
lists with stored phone numbers 


17 Buttons* on the steering wheel 



Telephone*: 

> Press: accepting and ending a 
call, starting to dial* selected 
phone number. Redialing if no 
phone number is selected 


> Press longer: redialing 


+ 

(l.{’ 


Volume 


Activating/deactivating voice acti¬ 
vation system* 23 


18 Releasing the hood 201 


19 


6^3 


Opening the luggage compart¬ 
ment lid 32 


Next entertainment source 
Recirculated-air mode 98 


10 




Windshield wipers 60 


Rain sensor* 60 

11 start Switching the ignition on/off and 
starting/stopping the engine 50 


12 Ignition lock 50 

^ Steering wheel heating* 47 


14 Horn, the entire surface 

15 Adjusting the steering wheel 46 

^ ftv) Cruise control* 61 


11 

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 


At a glance 



Cockpit 


Instrument cluster 



1 Speedometer 

2 Indicator lamps for turn signals 

3 Indicator and warning lamps 13 

4 Tachometer 64 

5 Engine oil temperature 65 

6 Display for 

> Clock 64 

> Outside temperature 64 

> Indicator and warning lamps 13 


7 Display for 

> Position of automatic transmission* 54 

> Gear display for 7-gear sport automatic 
transmission with dual clutch* 56 

> Computer 65 

> Date of next scheduled service, and 
remaining distance to be driven 69 

> Odometer and trip odometer 64 

> Programs for Dynamic Driving 
Control 79 

> High-Beam Assistant* 90 

> Checking the engine oil level 202 

> Settings and information 68 

> A There is a Check Control 
message 73 

8 Fuel gauge 65 

9 Resetting the trip odometer 64 


12 


Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 

























Indicator and warning lamps 

The concept 



Indicator and warning lamps can light up in a 
variety of combinations and colors. 

Some lamps are checked for proper functioning 
and thus come on briefly when the engine is 
started or the ignition is switched on. 

Explanatory text messages 



Indicator lamps without text messages 

The following indicator lamps notify you that 
certain functions are active: 

High beams/headlamp flasher 90 


Lamp flashes: 

DSC or DTC is regulating the propul¬ 
sive forces in order to maintain driving 
stability 78 

Parking brake set 52 


Canada: Parking brake set 52 


Engine malfunction with adverse 
effect on exhaust emissions 207 

Canada: Engine malfunction with 
adverse effect on exhaust 
emissions 207 


BRAKE 


(®) 


SERMCE 

ENGINE 

SOON 


O 



Text messages at the upper edge of the Control 
Display explain the meaning of the displayed 
indicator and warning lamps. 



You can call up more information, e.g., on the 
cause of a malfunction and on how to respond, 
via Check Control, refer to page 73. 

In urgent cases, this information will be shown 
as soon as the corresponding lamp comes on. 


13 

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 


At a glance 




















Cockpit 



Around the center console: controls and displays 


14 


Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 

























































































1 SOS: initiating an Emergency 
Request call* 218 

2 Reading lamp 92 

3 Interior lamps 92 

4 Reading lamp 92 

5 Passenger airbag status lamp* 86 

6 Control Display 16 

7 Hazard warning flashers 

8 Central locking system 32 

9 Automatic climate control 

Air distribution 96 

Automatic air distribution and 
flow rate 97 

Cooling function 97 

Recirculated-air mode, automatic 
recirculated-air control 98 

Maximum cooling 97 

Airflow, residual heat 
utilization 97 

Defrosting windows 98 
Rear window defroster 98 


^ $$ Heated seats* 43 

Park Distance Control PDC* 77 
Close the retractable hardtop 38 
A * Open the retractable hardtop 38 

14 Parking brake 52 

15 Buttons on the controller 16 
For selecting the menus directly 

16 Controller 16 

Can be turned, pressed, or moved horizon' 
tally in four directions 

17 Buttons for the Dynamic Driving 
Control 79 

18 Switching audio sources on/off and adjust¬ 
ing volume 140 

19 Ejecting of 

> Audio CD 140 

> Navigation DVD* 120 


AUTO 

MAX 

Op 

C7J> 

w 


10 Hard drive for 

> Audio CD 140 

> Navigation DVD* 120 

11 Programmable memory keys 21 

12 Changing 

> Radio station 143 

> Track 151 


15 

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 


At a glance 



i Drive 


i Drive 


Drive integrates the functions of a large num¬ 
ber of switches. This allows these functions to 
be operated from a single central position. The 
following section provides an introduction to 


basic menu navigation. The control of the indi¬ 
vidual functions is described in connection with 
the relevant equipment. 


Controls 



□ Operate the controller only when traffic 
and road conditions allow this, to avoid 
endangering the car's occupants and other 
road users by being distracted.◄ 

> Move in four directions, arrows 3 
> Turn, arrow 4 
> Push, arrow 5 


1 Control Display 

2 Controller with button 

You can use the buttons to open the menus 
directly. The controller can be used to 
select the menu items and create settings. 


16 


Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 







Buttons on the controller 


Button 

Function 

MENU 

Open the main menu 

RADIO 

Open the Radio menu 

CD 

Open the CD/Entertainment Server menu 

NAV 

Open the Navigation menu 

TEL 

Open the Telephone menu 

BACK 

Display the previous menu 

OPTION 

Open the Options menu 


Operating principle 

With the ignition at radio readiness or beyond, 
refer to page 50, the following message is dis¬ 
played on the Control Display: 


AttontctHil 

Use this system only when traffic 
conditions permit, Do not rely solely 
on Driver Assistance syslemi. 

Safe wefttrt* operation i\i ha 

driver's responsibility. 

For lurthar into see Owner's Manual 


To hide the message: 

Press the controller. 

The main menu is displayed. 

The message is automatically hidden after 
approx. 10 seconds. 

Opening the main menu 

MENU Press the button. 

The main menu is displayed. 



All iDrive functions can be called up via five 
menu items. 

Selecting menu items 

The menu items shown in white can be 
selected. 

1. Turn the controller until the desired menu 
item is highlighted. 



2. Press the controller. 


A new menu is displayed or the function is 
executed. 


17 

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 


At a glance 














i Drive 


Menu items in the Owner's Manual 

In the Owner's Manual, menu items that can be 
selected are set in quotation marks, e.g., 
"Settings". 

Changing between panels 

After selecting a menu item, e.g., "Radio", a 
new menu is displayed on a panel. The panels 
can overlap. 

Move the controller to the left or right to change 
between the panels. 


i\ m 

1| 

^ Maoual 

~\ \ 

-=- i 1 tfi 

_ C VAR 1 

\ \ 

j ^r ENERGY 

1 1 

' •. GONG96J 


Iff] I KUSSIK 

I 

mo MH? 

\ \ 

7 / 101.3 MHZ 

1 / 


White arrows pointing to the left or right indi¬ 
cate that additional panels can be opened. 


18 


Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 



Open the Options menu 

OPTION Press the button. 

The "Options" menu is displayed. 



Additional options: move the controller to the 
right repeatedly until the "Options" menu 
appears. 

The "Options" menu contains the following: 


Example: setting the clock 

1. MENU Press the button. 

The main menu is displayed. 

2. Turn the controller until "Settings" is high¬ 
lighted, and then press the controller. 


Mjmmenu 


fcr= 

CD/MiilTrmerifft 

|| 



TultfgliPMff 

jf5|r i 

Navigation 


Contacts 

rel 

BMW ASSiSt 


Vehicle Info 

if 

Setting* 


3. Turn the controller until "Time/Date" is 
highlighted, and then press the controller. 


> Screen settings, refer to page 20. 

> Control options for the selected menu. 

Adjusting settings 

1. Select a field. 

2. Turn the controller until the desired setting 
is displayed. 



Volume setting* 



l\\ 

Speed volume 

— nr 

Jr® 


1 ■ 

’l w 

Volume setting: 

\ PDC 

_ > 


lir 

Gong — _ 

__+ 


r 


l 



3. Press the controller to confirm the setting. 

The scroll bar on the right side indicates 
whether additional menu items or set¬ 
tings can be selected that are currently not 
visible.◄ 


a i Selling 

T 


11 - -—-— 

—V—1 


HI ,v '/Time/Date 

\ 1 


jli 1 Language/Unit* 



* r 1 1 Speed 



■ Gimals* 

7 


H | lighting 

/ i 


‘ l Door locks J 

/ 



4. Turn the controller until "Time:" is high¬ 
lighted, and then press the controller. 



5. Turn the controller to set the hours and 
press the controller. 


6. Turn the controller to set the minutes and 
press the controller. 


19 

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 


At a glance 













i Drive 


Status information 


Switching the control display 
on/off 


1 2 3 4 



1 Time 

2 Display for: 

> ,|||| Reception strength of the wireless 
network, depends on the mobile phone 

> Incoming, outgoing or missed call 

> SMS* received 

3 Display for: 

> Entertainment: 

Radio, CD/DVD, external devices, TV* 
t> Telephone*: 

Name of the mobile phone paired with 
the vehicle 

4 p^Sound output is switched off or 
display for traffic bulletins*: 

> "Tl": 

Traffic bulletins are switched on. 

> No display: 

Traffic bulletins are switched off. 

Other displays: 

Status information is temporarily hidden during 
Check Control message displays or entries via 
the voice activation system*. 


1. OPTION Press the button. 

2. "Close Control display" 



Options 

l\ \ i 

P Splitscreen i 

In 1 

■ Ovm! Couiti ul dk^luy 

m LL 

-; J 

VI 

/ 


Press the controller to switch on. 


Split screen 

Additional information can be displayed on the 
right side of the split screen, e.g., information 
from the computer. 

In the divided screen view, the so-called split 
screen, this information remains visible even 
when you change to another menu. 

The setting is stored for the remote control cur¬ 
rently in use. 

Switching the split screen on and off 

1. OPTION Press the button. 

2. "Splitscreen" 

uy The split screen is activated. 

Selecting the display for the split 
screen content 

When the split screen is switched on, you can 
select the content displayed on the screen. 


20 


Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 










1 Move the controller to the right repeatedly 
until the split screen content is selected. 

2. Select the display. 




SpiiE iuvty'i content 




C7 Split screen 
Map facfng north 
Map direct? or* of travel 
Map view with perspective 
pgsJiton 

i/ Unbnard info 
Trip computei 


Programmable memory keys 


Certain iDrive functions can be stored on the 
programmable memory keys and called up 
directly, e.g., radio stations, navigation destina¬ 
tions, phone numbers and entry points into 
the menu. 


Storing functions 

1 Select the function via the iDrive. 

2. m ... BS Press the desired button 
for longer than 2 seconds. 


Example for programmable 
memory keys 

Switch the voice instructions for the navigation 
on/off. 


1. 

2 . 

3. 

4. 


"Navigation" 

"Map" 

Select the pf symbol using the controller. 

U ... tBtt Press the desired button 
for longer than 2 seconds. 


Executing a function 

I Press the button. 


The function is executed immediately. This 
means, for example, that the number is dialed 
when a phone number is selected. 


Displaying memory key assignments 

Touch the button with a finger. Do not wear 
gloves or use objects. 


Displaying brief information 

I Touch the button. 


The key assignment is displayed at the top 
edge of the screen. 


CQ/Multlmedrii 

Radio 


THnphftrtr 

Navigation 

BMW 

Vehicle Info 
Settings 


Displaying detailed information 

I Touch the button and hold. 


21 


Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 




j | || | j At a glance 
















Letters and numbers 


Letters and numbers 


Entering letters and numbers 

1. Turn the controller: select the letters or 
numbers. 

2. Select additional letters or numbers if 
needed. 

3. "OK": confirm the entry. 


Symbol Function 

i<- 

Press the controller: delete one letter 
or number 

K- 

Press the controller for an extended 
period: delete all letters or numbers 

1 _ 1 

Enter a blank space 


Switching between letters and 
numbers 

Depending on the menu, you can switch 
between entering letters and numbers: 


Symbol Function 

A B C Entering letters 

^2 2 Entering numbers 

Wordmatch concept during navigation 

Entry of names and addresses: the selection is 
narrowed down every time a letter is entered 
and letters may be added automatically. 

Destination search: the entries are continuously 
compared to the data stored in the vehicle. 

> The only letters offered for entering 
addresses are those for which data are 
available. 

> Town/city names can be entered with the 
spelling used in any of the languages avail¬ 
able on the Control Display. 


22 


Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 


Voice activation system 


The concept 


Saying commands 


The voice activation system allows you to con¬ 
trol operation of various vehicle systems with¬ 
out removing your hands from the steering 
wheel. 

Individual menu items on the Control Display 
can be spoken as commands. It is not neces¬ 
sary to use the controller. 

The voice activation system transforms your 
oral commands into control signals for the 
selected systems and provides support in the 
form of instructions or questions. 

The voice activation system uses a special 
microphone located in the area of the steering 
column. 

Precondition 

Via iDrive, select the language in which the 
voice activation system is operating, so that the 
spoken commands can be identified. Selecting 
the language for iDrive, refer to page 75. 

Symbols in the Owner's Manual 

^ >...< Say the specified commands word 
for word. 

>>...< < Indicates responses of the voice acti¬ 
vation system. 


Activating voice activation system 


1. Press the button on the steering wheel. 



fot This symbol on the Control Display and 
an acoustic signal indicate that the voice 
activation system is ready to receive spo¬ 
ken commands. 



IIH mifflU 


Cp/NMhmi*dm 

1 

Rddio \ 


Tuluphuim 

Navigation i 


Contacts ! 

BMW Assist | 


VehJdc Info 

ml _ 

Settings J 


2. Say the command. 

The command appears on the Control 
Display. 

cot This symbol appears on the Control Display 
when you can enter additional commands. 

If no further commands are possible, continue 
by operating the item of equipment via iDrive. 


23 

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 


At a glance 


















Voice activation system 


3. "Speech mode:' 


Terminating or canceling voice 
activation system 

Press the button on the steering wheel 
or 

>Cancel< 

In dialogs that call for a text of your choice, the 
procedure can only be canceled using the but¬ 
ton on the steering wheel. 

Possible commands 

The commands available in each case depend 
on the menu item selected on the Control 
Display. 

Having the possible commands read aloud 
>Voice commands< 

For example, if "CD/DVD" is selected, the com¬ 
mands for operating CD/Multimedia are read 
aloud. 

Calling up functions immediately via 
short commands 

Short commands enable you to perform certain 
functions immediately, irrespective of which 
menu item is selected, refer to page 229. 

Example: selecting the track of a CD 

1. If necessary, switch on entertainment audio 
output. 

2. Press the button on the steering wheel. 
^ 3. Select the music track, e.g.: 

>CD track 4< 

System says: 

>>Track4<< 

Setting the voice dialog 

You can set whether the system should use the 
standard dialog or a shorter variant. In the 
shorter variant of the voice dialog, the prompts 
and responses from the system are abbre¬ 
viated. 

1. "Settings" 

2. "Language/Units" 



4. Select a setting: 

> "Default" 

> "Short" 

Notes 

For information on voice commands for 
the telephone, refer also to the separate 

Owner's Manual.◄ 

For voice commands, bear in mind the 

following: 

> Do not use the voice activation system to 
initiate an Emergency Request. In stressful 
situations, the voice and vocal pitch can 
change. This can unnecessarily delay the 
establishment of a telephone connection. 
Use the emergency button near the interior 
rearview mirror. 

> Pronounce the commands and digits 
smoothly and at normal volume, avoiding 
excessive emphases and pauses. This also 
applies when spelling out destinations dur¬ 
ing destination entry. 

> When selecting a radio station, use the 
standard pronunciation of the station name. 

> For entries in the voice-activated phone 
book, only use names in the language of the 
voice activation system and no abbrevia¬ 
tions. 

> Keep the doors, windows and retractable 
hardtop closed to prevent interference from 
outside noise. 


> Avoid ambient noise in the vehicle while 
speaking. 


24 

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 





25 

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 


At a glance 




Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 



Controls 


This chapter is intended to provide you with 
information for complete control of your vehicle. 
All features and accessories that are useful for 
driving and your safety, comfort and 
convenience, are described here. 


Opening and closing 


Opening and closing 


Remote control 



Each remote control contains a rechargeable 
battery that is automatically recharged when it 
is in the ignition lock while the car is being 
driven. Use each remote control at least twice a 
year for longer road trips in order to maintain the 
batteries' charge status. In cars with Comfort 
Access*, the remote control contains a 
replaceable battery, refer to page 36. 

The settings called up and implemented when 
the car is unlocked depend on which remote 
control is used to unlock the car, refer to Per¬ 
sonal Profile, next column. 

In addition, information about service require¬ 
ments is stored in the remote control, refer to 
Service data in the remote control, page 206. 


New remote controls 

Your BMW center can supply new remote con¬ 
trols with integrated keys as additional units or 
as replacements in the event of loss. 

Personal Profile 

The concept 

You can set many of your BMW's functions to 
suit your personal needs and preferences. 
Without any action on your part, Personal Pro¬ 
file ensures that most of these settings are 
stored for the remote control currently in use. 
When you unlock the car, the remote control 
used for the purpose is recognized and the set¬ 
tings stored for it are called up and imple¬ 
mented. 

This means that your personal settings will be 
activated for you, even if in the meantime your 
car was used by someone else with another 
remote control and the corresponding settings. 
The individual settings are stored for a maxi¬ 
mum of four remote controls. They are stored 
for two remote controls if Comfort Access* is 
in use. 


Integrated key 


mrj> 


Press button 1 to release the key. 

The integrated key fits the following locks: 

> Glove compartment, refer to page 103 

> Driver's door, refer to page 31 



Personal Profile settings 

For more information on specific settings, refer 

to the specified pages. 

> Assignment of programmable memory 
keys, refer to page 21 

> Response of the central locking system 
when the car is unlocked, refer to page 29 

> Automatic locking of the vehicle, refer 
to page 32 

> Automatic call-up* of the driver's seat posi¬ 
tion, refer to page 43 

> Triple turn signal activation, refer 
to page 60 


28 

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 










> Settings for the display on the Control Dis¬ 
play and in the instrument cluster: 

> 12h/24h format of the clock, refer 
to page 71 

> Date format, refer to page 72 

> Brightness of Control Display, refer 
to page 76 

> Language on the Control Display, refer 
to page 75 

> Split screen, refer to page 20 

> Units of measure for fuel consumption, 
distance covered/remaining distances, 
and temperature, refer to page 68 

> Show visual warning for Park Distance Con¬ 
trol PDC*, refer to page 77 

t> Light settings: 

> Welcome lamps, refer to page 88 

> Pathway lighting, refer to page 89 

> Daytime running lights, refer to page 89 

> High-beam assistant*, refer to page 90 

> Automatic climate control: activating/deac¬ 
tivating AUTO program, cooling function 
and automatic recirculated-air control, set¬ 
ting temperature, air flow rate and distribu¬ 
tion, refer to page 96 ff 

> Entertainment: 

> Tone control, refer to page 140 

> Volume, refer to page 142 

Central locking system 


Operating from outside 

> Via the remote control 

> Using the door lock 

> In cars with Comfort Access*, via the han¬ 
dles on the driver's and passenger doors 

In addition, if the remote control is used, the 
welcome lamps, interior lamps and the door's 
courtesy lamps* are switched on or off. The 
alarm system* is also armed or disarmed. 

For further details of the alarm system, refer 
to page 33. 

Operating from inside 

By means of the button for central locking, refer 
to page 32. 

In the event of a sufficiently severe accident, the 
central locking system unlocks automatically. In 
addition, the hazard warning flashers and inte¬ 
rior lamps come on. 


Opening and closing: 

Using the remote control 

Persons or animals in a parked vehicle 
could lock the doors from the inside. You 
should therefore take the remote control with 
you when you leave the vehicle so that the latter 
can be opened from outside.^ 

To operate the retractable hardtop with 
the remote control, the doors and lug¬ 
gage compartment lid must be closed and the 
cargo area partition must be folded down and 
engaged on both sides. Refer also to page 38.4 



The concept 

The central locking system functions when the 
driver's door is closed. 

The system simultaneously engages and 
releases the locks on the following: 

> Doors 

> Luggage compartment lid 

> Fuel filler flap 

> Center armrest* 


Unlocking 

Press the m button. 

The interior lamps, the courtesy lamps* and the 
welcome lamps come on. 

Setting unlocking characteristics 

You can set whether only the driver's door or 
the entire vehicle is to be unlocked when the 
button is pressed for the first time. 



29 

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 


Controls 





Opening and closing 


1. "Settings" 

2. "Door locks" 

3. "Unlock button" 


k\ \§Uw k*k> 

\ 

_ 1 1 

M\ IK Unlock button; All doors 

\ \ 

O Uit seal position auto. 


□ Lock rf no door I* opened 


■ * □ Lock after start, to drive 

H't 

j fr □ flash when lotkAjhlutk 

If 


Hold the LOCK button down. 

The retractable hardtop and the windows are 
closed. 

Watch during the closing process to 
ensure that no one is injured. Releasing 
the button interrupts the closing process.◄ 

Switching on interior lamps 

While the car is locked: 

Press the O lock button. 

You can also use this function to locate your 
vehicle in parking garages etc. 



4. Select a menu item: 

> "All doors" Press the J§1 

button once to unlock the entire vehicle. 

> "Driver's door only" 

Press the !§) button once to unlock the 
driver's door and fuel filler flap. 

Press the button twice to unlock the 
entire vehicle. 

5. Press the controller. 

Convenient opening*: 

Windows and hardtop 

When you are close to the vehicle, the remote 
control for Comfort Access can be used to open 
the retractable hardtop. 

Hold the |St button down. 

The windows and the retractable hardtop are 
opened if the doors are closed. 

When you are close to the vehicle, the windows 
move up if you continue to press the ist button 
after opening the hardtop. 

□ Watch during the opening process to 
ensure that no one is injured. Releasing 
the button interrupts the opening process.◄ 

Locking 

Press the Q LOCK button. 

Convenient closing* 

When you are close to the vehicle, the remote 
control for Comfort Access can be used to 
close the retractable hardtop and the windows. 


Unlocking the luggage 
compartment lid 

Press the tgj button for approx. 1 second. 


> 


The luggage compartment lid swings 
back and up when opened. Ensure that 
there is sufficient clearance. To avoid locking 
yourself out by accident, do not place the 
remote control in the cargo area. A previously 
locked luggage compartment lid is locked again 
after closing. 

Before and after each trip, check that the lug¬ 
gage compartment lid has not been inadvert¬ 
ently unlocked.◄ 


Convenient loading* 

When you are close to the vehicle, the remote 
control for Comfort Access can be used to par¬ 
tially raise the open hardtop for more conve¬ 
nient loading of the cargo area. 

1. Briefly press the & button and, within one 
second, press again until the retractable 
hardtop stops in an intermediate position. 
The luggage compartment lid opens 
slightly. 

2. Open the luggage compartment lid, press 
the cargo area partition upward and stow 
the cargo in the cargo area. 

3. Press down the cargo area partition until it 
engages on both sides and close the lug¬ 
gage compartment lid. 

4. Press the button for a longer period to 
fold the retractable hardtop back in. 


30 

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 





Confirmation signals 

You can activate or deactivate the confirmation 
signals. 

1. "Settings" 

2. "Door locks" 

3. "Flash when lock/unlock" 



4. Press the controller. 

R/* Flashing when locking/unlocking the vehi¬ 
cle is switched on. 

Malfunctions 

The remote control may malfunction due to 
local radio waves. If this occurs, unlock and lock 
the car at the door lock with the integrated key. 

If the car can no longer be locked with a remote 
control, the battery in the remote control is dis¬ 
charged. Use the remote control on an 
extended trip to recharge the battery, refer to 
page 28. The remote control for Comfort 
Access* contains a battery that may have to be 
changed, refer to page 36. 

For US owners only 

The transmitter and receiver units comply with 
part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communications 
Commission regulations. Operation is gov¬ 
erned by the following: 

FCC ID: 

LX8766S 

LX8766E 

LX8CAS 

Compliance statement: 

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC 
Rules. Operation is subject to the following two 
conditions: 


t> This device must not cause harmful inter¬ 
ference, and 

t> This device must accept any interference 
received, including interference that may 
cause undesired operation. 

Any unauthorized modifications or 
changes to these devices could void the 
user's authority to operate this equipment.^ 


Opening and closing: 
Using the door lock 





1 

r\ 


You can set the way in which the car is 
unlocked, refer to page 29. 


Convenient operation* 

You can operate the windows and the retract¬ 
able hardtop via the door lock. 

Hold the key in the position for unlocking or 
locking. 

During each closing procedure, and when 
opening the retractable hardtop, watch 
the process and ensure that no one becomes 
trapped. Releasing the key stops the 
operation.◄ 

Manual operation 

In the event of an electrical malfunction, you can 
lock and unlock the driver's door by turning the 
integrated key to the corresponding limit posi¬ 
tions in the door lock. 



31 

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 


Controls 












Opening and closing 


Opening and closing: 
From the inside* 



This button* serves to unlock or lock doors and 
the luggage compartment lid, but does not acti¬ 
vate the anti-theft system. The fuel filler flap 
remains unlocked. 


Unlocking and opening doors 

> Either unlock the doors together using the 
button for the central locking system and 
then pull the door handle above the arm¬ 
rest or 

> pull on the door handle of each door twice: 
the first time unlocks the door, the second 
time opens it. 

Locking 

> Use the central locking button to lock all of 
the doors simultaneously, or 

> press down the safety lock button of a door. 
To prevent you from being locked out, the 
open driver's door cannot be locked using 
the lock button. 


Automatic locking 

You can also set the situations in which the car 
locks: 

1. "Settings" 

2. "Door locks" 

3. Select the desired function: 

> "Lock if no door is opened" 

The central locking system locks the 
vehicle after a short time, unless a door 
has been opened. 

> "Lock after start, to drive" 

The central locking system locks the 
vehicle when you drive away. 


Unlock button: All doors 
□ Last seat aosUton aut 


^ iijM. i rjLjj i* p ■ 1 " 


U Lock after start, to drive 
□ FJrfshwtten kxk/ui 




1 

I 


The setting is stored for the remote control cur¬ 
rently in use. 


□ Persons or animals in a parked vehicle 
could lock the doors from the inside. You 
should therefore take the remote control with 
you when you leave the vehicle so that the latter 
can be opened from outside.◄ 


Luggage compartment lid 


In order to avoid damage, make sure there 
is sufficient clearance before opening the 
luggage compartment lid.4 


0 


Opening from inside 



Press the button: the luggage compartment lid 
opens unless it has been locked. 


32 


Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 






















Opening from outside 



Press on the top half of the BMW emblem or, for 
approx. 1 second, on the (gj button of the 
remote control: 

The luggage compartment can be opened. 

Emergency release* 




Pull the lever in the cargo area. The luggage 
compartment lid is unlocked. 

Closing 



□ Make sure that the closing path of the 
luggage compartment lid is clear; other¬ 
wise, injuries may result.^ 


To close the luggage compartment lid, 
press it down lightly. The lid is closed 
automatically.^ 

Alarm system* 

The concept 

The vehicle alarm system responds: 


> When a door, the hood or the luggage com¬ 
partment lid is opened 

> To movements inside the vehicle: Interior 
motion sensor, refer to page 34 

> When the car's inclination changes, for 
instance if an attempt is made to jack it up 
and steal the wheels or to raise it prior to 
towing away 

> When there is an interruption in the power 
supply from the battery 

The alarm system signals unauthorized entry 

attempts for a short time by means of: 

> An acoustic alarm 

> Switching on the hazard warning flashers 

> Flashing the high beams 


Arming and disarming 

When you lock or unlock the vehicle, either with 
the remote control or at the door lock, the alarm 
system is armed or disarmed at the same time. 

You can open the luggage compartment lid 
using the m button of the remote control even 
if the alarm system is armed, refer to page 30. 
The lid is locked and monitored again as soon 
as it is closed. 


The handle recesses on the interior trim of the 
luggage compartment lid make it easier to 
pull down. 


Panic mode* 

You can trigger the alarm system if you find 
yourself in a dangerous situation: 

Press the fcgj button for at least three seconds. 
To switch off the alarm: press any button. 


33 

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 


Controls 











Opening and closing 


Switching off an alarm 

> Unlock the car with the remote control, refer 
to page 29. 

> Insert the remote control all the way into the 
ignition lock. 


> The indicator lamp under the inside rear¬ 
view mirror flashes continuously: the sys¬ 
tem is armed. 

> The indicator lamp flashes after locking: 
doors, hood or luggage compartment lid are 
not properly closed. Even if you do not close 
the alerted area, the system begins to mon¬ 
itor the remaining areas, and the indicator 
lamp flashes continuously after approx. 

10 seconds. The interior motion sensor and 
the tilt alarm sensor are not activated. 

> The indicator lamp goes out after unlocking: 
your vehicle has not been disturbed while 
you were away. 

> If the indicator lamp flashes after unlocking 
until the remote control is inserted in the 
ignition, but for no longer than approx. 

5 minutes: your vehicle has been disturbed 
while you were away. 

Tilt alarm sensor 

The tilt of the vehicle is monitored. The alarm 
system reacts, e.g., to attempts to steal a wheel 
or tow the vehicle. 

Interior motion sensor 

The interior of the car is monitored up to the 
height of the seat cushions. Thus the alarm sys¬ 
tem is activated together with the interior 
motion sensor even if the hardtop is open. An 


alarm can be triggered unintentionally by falling 
objects such as leaves, refer to Avoiding unin¬ 
tentional alarms. 

Avoiding unintentional alarms 

The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor 
may be switched off at the same time. This pre¬ 
vents unintentional alarms, e.g., in the following 
situations: 

> In duplex garages 

> During transport on car-carrying trains, 
boats/ships or on a trailer 

> When animals are to remain in the vehicle 

Switching off tilt alarm sensor and 
interior motion sensor 

Press the UOCK button on the remote control 
again as soon as the vehicle is locked. 

The indicator lamp lights up briefly and then 
flashes continuously. The tilt alarm sensor and 
the interior motion sensor are switched off until 
the next time the vehicle is unlocked and subse¬ 
quently locked again. 

Comfort Access* 

Comfort Access enables you to enter your vehi¬ 
cle without needing to hold the remote control 
in your hand. All you need to do is wear the 
remote control close to your body, e.g., in your 
jacket pocket. The vehicle detects the corre¬ 
sponding remote control within the immediate 
vicinity or in the passenger compartment. 

Comfort Access supports the following func¬ 
tions: 

> Unlocking/locking the vehicle 

> Unlocking the luggage compartment lid 
separately 

> Starting the engine 

> Convenient opening 

> Convenient closing 


Indicator lamp displays 



34 

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 






Functional requirement 

> The vehicle or the luggage compartment lid 
can only be locked when the vehicle detects 
that the remote control currently in use is 
outside of the vehicle. 

> The vehicle cannot be locked or unlocked 
again until after approx. 2 seconds. 

> The engine can only be started when the 
vehicle detects that the remote control cur¬ 
rently in use is inside the vehicle. 


Comparison to the standard remote 
control 

In general, there is no difference between using 
Comfort Access or pressing the buttons on the 
remote control to carry out the functions men¬ 
tioned above. You should therefore first famil¬ 
iarize yourself with the instructions on opening 
and closing starting on page 28. 

Special features regarding the use of Comfort 
Access are described below. 


D> 


If you notice a brief delay while opening or 
closing the windows or retractable hard¬ 
top, the system is checking whether a remote 
control is inside the vehicle. Please repeat the 
opening or closing procedure, if necessary. ◄ 


Releasing 


Pull the handle up, arrow 1. This corresponds to 
pressing the button. 



Locking 

Press on the surface, arrow 2. This corre¬ 
sponds to pressing the LOCK button. 

... To preserve the battery, please make 
sure that the ignition and all electrical 
consumers are switched off before locking the 
vehicle.^ 

Window and convertible top operation 

With the ignition at radio readiness or beyond, 
you can open and close the windows and the 
convertible top when a remote control is 
located inside the vehicle. 

Unlocking the luggage compartment 
lid separately 

Press on the top half of the BMW emblem. This 
corresponds to pressing the bd button. 

If the vehicle detects that a remote con¬ 
trol has been accidentally left inside the 
d vehicle's cargo area after the luggage 
compartment lid is closed, the lid will reopen. 
The hazard warning flashers flash and an 
acoustic signal* sounds.◄ 

Switching on radio readiness 

Radio readiness is switched on by pressing the 
start/stop button, refer to page 50. 

Do not depress the brake or the clutch; 
otherwise, the engine will start.4 

Starting the engine 

You can start the engine or switch on the igni¬ 
tion when a remote control is inside the vehicle. 
It is not necessary to insert a remote control into 
the ignition switch, refer to page 50. 

Switching off the engine in cars with 
automatic transmission 

The engine can only be switched off when the 
selector lever is in position P, refer to page 52. 
T o switch the engine off when the selector lever 
is in position N, the remote control must be in 
the ignition switch. 


D> 


lock< 



35 

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 


Controls 
























Opening and closing 


Before driving a vehicle with automatic 
transmission into a car wash 

1. Insert the remote control into the ignition 
switch. 

2. Depress the brake. 

3. Move the selector lever to position N. 

4. Switch off the engine. 

The vehicle can roll. 

Malfunction 

Comfort Access may malfunction due to local 
radio waves. If this happens, open or close the 
vehicle via the buttons on the remote control or 
using the integrated key. To start the engine 
afterward, insert the remote control into the 
ignition switch. 

Warning lamps 

The warning lamp in the instrument 
cluster lights up when you attempt to 
start the engine: the engine cannot 
be started. The remote control is not inside the 
vehicle or is malfunctioning. Take the remote 
control with you inside the vehicle or have it 
checked. If necessary, insert another remote 
control into the ignition switch. 

The warning lamp in the instrument 
cluster lights up while the engine is 
running: the remote control is no 
longer inside the vehicle. After the engine is 
switched off, the engine can only be restarted 
within approx. 10 seconds. 

The indicator lamp in the instrument 
cluster comes on and a message 
appears on the Control Display: 
replace the battery in the remote control. 


Replacing the battery 

The remote control for Comfort Access con¬ 
tains a battery that will need to be replaced from 
time to time. 

1. Take the integrated key out of the remote 
control, refer to page 28. 



2. Remove the cover. 

3. Insert the new battery with the plus side fac¬ 
ing up. 

4. Press the cover on to close. 

Take the old battery to a battery collec¬ 
tion point or to your BMW center. ◄ 

Windows 

To prevent injuries, watch the windows 
while closing them. 

Take the remote control with you when you 
leave the car; otherwise, children could operate 
the electric windows and possibly injure them¬ 
selves. ◄ 







36 


Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 







Opening, closing 

Individually 



> Press the switch to the resistance point: 
The window opens as long as you press the 
switch. 

> You can close all windows in the same man¬ 
ner by pulling the switch. 

Press the switch beyond the resistance 
point: 

The window opens automatically. Press 
the switch again to stop the opening 
movement. 

You can close the windows in the same manner 
by pulling the switch. 

Jointly 


> Press the switch to the resistance point: 

All windows open as long as you press the 
switch. 

t> You can close all windows in the same man¬ 
ner by pulling the switch. 

Press the switch beyond the resistance 
point: 

All windows open automatically. Press 
the switch again to stop the opening 
movement. 


After switching off the ignition 

When the remote control is removed or the igni¬ 
tion is switched off, you can still operate the 
windows for approx. 1 minute as long as no 
door is opened. 

Convenient operation 

For information on convenient operation via the 
remote control or the door lock, refer to page 29 
or 31 . For information on Convenient closing 
with Comfort Access, refer to Locking 
on page 30. 

Pinch protection system 

If the closing force exceeds a specific value as 
one of the front side windows closes, the win¬ 
dow stops closing and reopens slightly. 

Despite the pinch protection system 
check and clear the window's travel path 
prior to closing it; otherwise, the safety system 
might fail to detect certain kinds of obstruc¬ 
tions, such as thin objects, and the window 
would continue closing. 

Do not install any accessories that might inter¬ 
fere with window movement. Otherwise, the 
pinch protection system could be impaired.◄ 

Closing without pinch protection 

If there is an external danger, or if ice on the win¬ 
dows, etc., prevents you from closing the win¬ 
dows normally, proceed as follows: 

1. Pull the switch past the resistance point and 
hold it there. Pinch protection is limited and 
the window reopens slightly if the closing 
force exceeds a certain value. 

2. Pull the switch again past the resistance 
point within approx. 4 seconds and hold it 
there. The window closes without pinch 
protection. 




37 

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 


Controls 
















Opening and closing 


Retractable hardtop 

The retractable hardtop combines reliable 
weather protection with simple and convenient 
operation. 

Please note: 

> It is advisable that you close the retractable 
hardtop when you park the vehicle. Not only 
does the closed hardtop protect the vehicle 
interior against unanticipated weather dam¬ 
age, it also offers theft protection. However, 
even when the hardtop is closed, valuables 
should only be stored in the locked 

cargo area. 

> Do not attach roof rack systems to the 
retractable hardtop, and in particular do not 
attach magnetic racks. 

> Do not attach rack systems to the luggage 
compartment lid, and in particular do not 
attach magnetic racks. 

> When the retractable hardtop is operated, 
the luggage compartment lid swings back 
and up. Before operating the retractable 
hardtop, ensure that there is enough clear¬ 
ance, e.g., in tight parking spaces. 

> If you open the hardtop while it is wet, e.g., 
after driving in the rain, water may drip into 
the cargo area. If necessary, remove items 
from the cargo area beforehand to avoid 
water stains or soiling. 

Do not place any objects on the retract¬ 
able hardtop or on the luggage compart¬ 
ment lid; otherwise, they could fall during move¬ 
ments of the retractable hardtop and cause 
damage or injury. 

Driving when the hardtop is not fully opened or 
not fully closed may result in damage or injury. 
Do not reach into the mechanism while the 
hardtop is opening or closing. Keep children 
away from the swiveling area of the retractable 
hardtop.◄ 

The retractable hardtop cannot be moved 
at temperatures below +14 °F /-10 °C. A 
message appears on the Control Display. ◄ 


The retractable hardtop can only be 
opened and closed when the vehicle is 
stationary. To avoid causing damage, do not 
drive off until the hardtop has stopped 
moving.◄ 

Before opening and closing 

Do not let the hardtop stop in an interme¬ 
diate position when opening or closing. 
Otherwise, there is the danger of personal injury 
since the hardtop will be lowered automatically 
after a few minutes. ◄ 

> Comply with the safety precautions 
described above. 

> Ensure that the luggage compartment lid is 
closed. 

> The vehicle should be parked on fairly level 
ground. Excessive angle is indicated by 

a lamp. 

> Fold down the cargo area partition and 
make sure it engages, refer to the instruc¬ 
tions below. 

> Do not place any objects next to or on the 
cargo area partition and close the storage 
compartment on the left side of the 
cargo area. 

> Do not exceed the maximum loading height 
under the cargo area partition; refer to the 
label in the cargo area showing a line indi¬ 
cating the maximum height. 


Folding down the cargo area partition 



Before opening the hardtop, close the cargo 
area partition, arrow, and make sure it engages 
on both sides. 





38 

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 








Opening and closing 

When the vehicle is stationary and at radio 
readiness or beyond, refer to page 50: 


D> 


If possible, conserve the battery by only 
operating the retractable hardtop when 
the engine is running. 

Before closing the retractable hardtop, remove 
all foreign objects from the windshield frame as 
these could prevent the hardtop from closing 
properly.^ 




1 Press and hold button 1: 

The retractable hardtop closes. 

2 Press and hold button 2: 

The retractable hardtop opens. 

3 LEDs 

The side windows move down when the 
hardtop is opened or closed. Convenient 
closing* If you continue pressing the buttons 
after the LED 3 goes out, the windows move 
back up.^ 

If the windows pause briefly as they move, this 
is for technical reasons and is not a malfunction, 



t> If the red LED lights up when the switch is 
pressed, the cargo area partition is folded 
up, the luggage compartment lid is not 
closed, the vehicle is standing on a strong 
incline or there is a malfunction. The 
retractable hardtop cannot be moved. 

Interruption 

The automatic sequence of movements is 
interrupted if the switch for hardtop operation is 
released. The sequence can be continued in 
the desired direction by pushing or pulling the 
switch. 

□ Open or close the hardtop fully; other¬ 
wise, there is a risk of injury or damage 
when driving. 

Do not interrupt and resume the closing proce¬ 
dure several times in close succession as this 
could damage the mechanism.◄ 

If the hardtop is not fully opened or 
closed, the luggage compartment lid can- 
3 opened and the windows cannot be 
moved. ◄ 

Convenient operation with remote 
control or via door lock 

Refer to pages 30 and 31 . 

Wind deflector* 

The wind deflector keeps air movements in the 
passenger compartment to a minimum when 
the hardtop is open and provides an even more 
comfortable ride, particularly at high speeds. 


[> 

not 


LEDs 


In the following situations, a message appears 
on the Control Display or an acoustic signal 
sounds in addition to the LED lighting up: 

> While the hardtop is being operated, the 
green LED lights up. It goes out as soon as 
the top is fully opened or closed. 

> If the red LED flashes when you release the 
switch, the opening or closing action has 
not yet finished. 


39 

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 




| | j I Controls 
































Opening and closing 


Installation 

1. Insert the wind deflector 1 into the holders 2 
on the rollover bars; the arrow should point 
in the direction of travel. 



2. Push the wind deflector down, arrow 1, and 
then push down and forward simulta¬ 
neously, arrow 2, until it engages. 



The wind deflector must engage firmly; 
otherwise, it could become detached at 
higher vehicle speeds.◄ 



Removing the wind deflector 

1. Push the wind deflector down and back 
simultaneously, arrow 1, to disengage it 
from the catch mechanism. 


Coat hooks 


1 



Coat hooks 1 are located on the wind deflector 
panels in the rollover bars. 

Do not hang heavy objects on the hooks. 
If you do, they could endanger the pas¬ 
sengers, for example during braking or evasive 
maneuvers.◄ 


Storage 

1. Fold the wind deflector 1 and slide it into the 
storage pouch 2. 



2. You can store the wind deflector on the lat¬ 
eral storage shelf behind the seats. 




2. Pull the wind deflector upward out of the 
holders, arrow 2. 


40 

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 

























Adjustments 


Sitting safely 

The ideal sitting position can make a vital con¬ 
tribution to relaxed, fatigue-free driving. In con¬ 
junction with the safety belts, the head 
restraints and the airbags, the seated position 
has a major influence on your safety in the event 
of an accident. To ensure that the safety sys¬ 
tems operate with optimal efficiency, we 
strongly urge you to observe the instructions 
contained in the following section. 

For additional information on transporting chil¬ 
dren safely, refer to page 48. 

Airbags 

Always maintain an adequate distance 
between yourself and the airbags. Always 
grip the steering wheel on the rim, with your 
hands in the 3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions, 
to minimize the risk of injury to the hands or 
arms in the event of the airbag being triggered 
off. No one and nothing should come between 
the airbags and the seat occupant. 

Do not use the cover of the front airbag on the 
passenger side as a storage area. Make sure 
that the passenger is sitting correctly, e.g., 
keeping his or her feet or legs in the footwell 
and not on the dashboard; otherwise, leg inju¬ 
ries can occur if the front airbag deploys. 

Make sure that passengers do not lean their 
heads against the side airbag; otherwise, seri¬ 
ous injuries could result if the airbag suddenly 
deployed.◄ 

Even if you follow all the instructions, injuries 
resulting from contact with airbags cannot be 
fully excluded, depending on the circum¬ 
stances. The ignition and inflation noise may 
provoke a mild hearing loss in extremely sensi¬ 
tive individuals. This effect is usually only tem¬ 
porary. 

For airbag locations and additional information 
on airbags, refer to page 85. 


Safety belt 

Before every drive, make sure that all occupants 
wear their safety belts. Airbags complement the 
safety belt as an additional safety device, but 
they do not represent a substitute. 

Your vehicle has two seats, each of which is 
equipped with a safety belt. 

Never allow more than one person to 
wear a single safety belt. Never allow 
infants or small children to ride in a passenger's 
lap. Make sure that the belt in the lap area sits 
low across the hips and does not press against 
the abdomen. 

The safety belt must not rest against the throat, 
run across sharp edges, pass over hard or frag¬ 
ile objects or be pinched. Fasten the safety belt 
so that it sits as snugly as possible against the 
lap and shoulder without being twisted. Other¬ 
wise, the belt could slide over your hips and 
injure your abdomen in the event of a frontal 
collision. 

Avoid wearing bulky clothing and regularly pull 
the belt in the upper-body area taut; otherwise, 
its restraining effect could be impaired.◄ 

Safety belts, refer to page 44. 

Seats 

Note before adjusting 

Never attempt to adjust your seat while 
the vehicle is moving. The seat could 
respond with unexpected movement, and the 
ensuing loss of vehicle control could lead to an 
accident. 

On the passenger seat as well, do not incline 
the backrest too far to the rear while the vehicle 
is being driven; otherwise, there is a danger in 
the event of an accident of sliding under the 
safety belt, eliminating the protection normally 
provided by the belt.^ 

Note the information on safety belt damage 
on page 45. 





41 

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 


Controls 



Adjustments 


Manual adjustment 

Observe the adjustment instructions on 
page 41 to ensure the best possible per¬ 
sonal protection.◄ 



Longitudinal direction 

Pull lever 1 and slide the seat to the desired 
position. 

After releasing the lever, move the seat gently 
forward or back to make sure it engages 
properly. 

Height 

Pull lever 2 and apply your weight to the seat or 
lift it off, as necessary. 


Backrest 



Pull lever 3 and apply your weight to the back¬ 
rest or lift it off, as necessary. 

Distance: 

Adjust the backrest so that the head restraint is 
as close as possible to the back of the head. 


Tilt* 



Pull the lever and apply your weight to the seat 
or lift it off, as necessary. 


Thigh support* 



Pull the lever and move the thigh support for¬ 
ward or back. 


Electrical adjustment 

Observe the adjustment instructions on 
page 41 to ensure the best possible per¬ 
sonal protection.◄ 



\ 


ta? 

1 Longitudinal direction 

2 Height 

3 Angle 




42 


Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 



























4 Backrest 


Lumbar support* 



You can also adjust the contour of the backrest 
to obtain additional support in the lumbar 
region. 

The upper hips and spinal column receive sup¬ 
plementary support to help you maintain a 
relaxed, upright sitting position. 

> Increase or decrease curvature: press the 
switch at the front or rear, respectively. 

> Shift curvature up or down: press the switch 
at the top or bottom, respectively. 


Backrest width* 



You can change the width of the backrest to suit 
your individual preferences by adjusting the lat¬ 
eral-support pads. 


Press the front or rear end of the switch. 
Backrest width decreases or increases accord¬ 
ingly. 

Heated seats* 



Press once for each temperature level. 

Three LEDs indicate the highest temperature. 

To switch off: 

Press button longer. 

If you continue driving within approx, the next 
15 minutes, the seat heating is automatically 
activated at the previously set temperature. 

The temperature is lowered or the heating is 
switched off entirely to save on battery power. 
The LEDs stay lit. 

Seat and mirror memory* 

You can store and call up two different combi¬ 
nations of driver's-seat and exterior-mirror 
positions. 

Settings for the backrest width and lumbar sup¬ 
port are not stored in memory. 


43 

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 


Controls 























Adjustments 


Storing 


Memory 



1. Switch on radio readiness or the ignition, 
refer to page 50. 

2. Adjust the seat and exterior mirrors to the 
desired positions. 

3. Press the MM button. 

The LED in the button lights up. 

4. Press the desired memory button 1 or 2: the 
LED goes out. 

The driver's seat and exterior mirror posi¬ 
tions are stored for the remote control cur¬ 
rently in use. 

Call-up 

□ Do not call up memory while you are driv¬ 
ing; otherwise, unexpected seat move¬ 
ment could result in an accident.^ 


Call-up with the remote control 

The driver's seat position last stored is stored 
for the remote control currently in use. 

You can select whether the seat should be reset 
to that position. 

□ When this Personal Profile function is 
used, first make sure that the footwell 
behind the driver's seat is free of obstacles. 
Failure to do so could result in damage to the 
objects if the seat were to move rearward.◄ 

The adjusting procedure is halted immediately 
when you touch a seat adjustment switch or 
one of the memory buttons. 

1. "Settings" 

2. "Door locks" 

3. "Last seat position automatic" 



fc? Dorji lotki 


Unlock button; All doors 

□ Last seal position auto. 

□ Lock i* no door k opened 

□ Lock after start, to drive 

□ Fldih when UxUiiiiku.k 



Convenience mode 

1. Unlock and open the driver's door or switch 
on radio readiness, refer to page 50. 

2. Briefly press the desired memory 
button 1 or 2 . 

The adjusting procedure is halted immediately 

when you touch a seat adjustment switch or 

one of the memory buttons. 

Safety feature 

1. Close the driver's door and switch the igni¬ 
tion on or off, refer to page 50. 

2. Press the desired memory button 1 or 2 
and keep it pressed until the adjustment 
process has been completed. 

If the MU button was pressed accidentally: 

Press the button again; the LED goes out. 


Safety belts 

□ Observe the adjustment instructions on 
page 41 to ensure the best possible per¬ 
sonal protection.◄ 

Before every drive, make sure that all occupants 
wear their safety belts. Airbags complement the 
safety belt as an additional safety device, but 
they do not represent a substitute. 



44 

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 









Closing Mirrors 

Make sure you hear the latch plate engage in 

the belt buckle. Exterior mirrors 


The upper belt anchor is suitable for adults of 
any stature as long as the seat is adjusted prop¬ 
erly, refer to page 41. 

Opening 

1. Grasp the belt firmly. 

2. Press the red button in the buckle. 

3. Guide the belt into its reel. 

'Fasten safety belts' reminder for driver 
and passenger* 

The indicator lamp comes on and an 
acoustic signal sounds. In addition, a 
message appears on the Control Dis¬ 
play. Check whether the safety belt 
has been fastened correctly. 

The 'Fasten safety belts' reminder is issued as 
long as the driver's safety belt has not been fas¬ 
tened. In some country-specific versions, the 
'Fasten safety belts' reminder is also activated 
at road speeds above approx. 5 mph or 8 km/h if 
the passenger safety belt is not fastened, if 
objects are placed on the passenger seat, or if 
driver or passenger unfasten their safety belts. 

Damage to safety belts 

If the safety belts are damaged or 
stressed in an accident: have the belt sys¬ 
tem, including any belt tensioners or child 
restraint systems, replaced and the belt 
anchors checked. Have this work done only by 
your BMW center or at a workshop that works 
according to BMW repair procedures with cor¬ 
respondingly trained personnel. Otherwise, it is 
not guaranteed that the safety devices will func¬ 
tion properly. ◄ 



ir 


□ The passenger's mirror is more convex 
than the driver's mirror. The objects seen 
in the mirror are closer than they appear. Do not 
gauge your distance from traffic behind you on 
the basis of what you see in the mirror; other¬ 
wise, there is an increased risk of an accident.4 



1 Adjustments 

2 Folding mirrors in and out* 

3 Switching to the other mirror or automatic 
curb monitor* 

The setting for the exterior mirrors is stored for 
the remote control currently in use*. The stored 
position is called up automatically when the 
vehicle is unlocked. 


Manual adjustment 

The mirrors can also be adjusted manually: 
press the edge of the glass. 


Folding mirrors in and out* 

At driving speeds up to approx. 12 mph/ 

20 km/h, you can fold the mirrors in and out by 
pressing button 2. This can be beneficial in nar¬ 
row streets, for example, or for moving mirrors 
that were folded in by hand back out into their 
correct positions. Mirrors that were folded in are 
folded out automatically at a speed of approx. 
25 mph/40 km/h. 

□ Before entering an automatic carwash, 
fold in the exterior mirrors by hand or with 
button 2 to prevent them from being damaged 
due to the width of the vehicle.◄ 


45 

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 


Controls 






Adjustments 


Automatic heating 

Depending on the outside temperature, both 
exterior mirrors are heated automatically when 
the engine is running or the ignition is 
switched on. 

Passenger-side mirror tilt function - 
automatic curb monitor* 

Activating 

1. Push the switch to the position for the 
driver's side mirror, arrow 1. 



2. Engage reverse gear or move the selector 
lever to position R. 

The glass of the mirror on the passenger 
side tilts slightly down. This allows the 
driver to see the area immediately adjacent 
to the vehicle, e.g., a curb, when backing 
into a parking space. 

Deactivating 

Push the switch to the position for the passen¬ 
ger-side mirror, arrow 2. 


Interior rearview mirror 



Turn the knob to reduce glare from the head¬ 
lamps of cars behind you when driving at night. 


Interior and exterior mirrors, automatic 
dimming feature* 



The automatic dimming feature of the interior 
and exterior mirrors* is controlled by two photo 
cells in the interior rearview mirror. One photo 
cell is in the mirror frame, see arrow; the other is 
on the back of the mirror. 

In order to ensure that the system functions 
correctly, keep the photo cells clean, do not 
cover the area between the interior rearview 
mirror and windshield, and do not affix adhesive 
labels or stickers of any kind to the windshield 
directly in front of the mirror. 


Steering wheel 


Adjustments 

□ Do not adjust the steering wheel position 
while the car is in motion; otherwise, there 
is a risk of accident due to an unexpected 
movement.^ 



1. Fold the lever down. 

2. Move the steering wheel to the preferred 
height and angle to suit your seated 
position. 


46 

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 
















3. Swing the lever back up. 


□ Do not use force to swing the lever 
back up; otherwise, the mechanism 
will be damaged.◄ 


Steering wheel heating* 



To switch on or off, press the button. 

The LED lights up: the steering wheel heating is 
switched on. 


47 

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 


Controls 





Transporting children safely 


Transporting children safely 


The right place for children 

□ Do not leave children unattended in the 
vehicle; otherwise, they could endanger 
themselves and/or other persons by opening 
the doors, for example.◄ 

Children on the passenger seat 

Always transport children under the age 
of 13 or smaller than 5 ft/150 cm in a child 
restraint system suitable for their age, weight 
and size, and with the passenger airbag deacti¬ 
vated. Otherwise, there is an increased risk of 
injury in the event of an accident or if the airbags 
deploy.^ 

Children 13 years of age or older must be buck¬ 
led in with a safety belt as soon as there no 
longer is any child restraint system that is 
appropriate for their age, size and weight. 

For more information on automatic deactivation 
of the passenger airbags refer to page 86. 


Installing child restraint 
systems 

After installing a child restraint system on 
the passenger seat, make sure that the 
front and side airbags for the passenger are 
deactivated; otherwise, there is an increased 
risk of injury if the airbags deploy. 

Observe the child restraint system manufac¬ 
turer's instructions when selecting, installing 
and using child restraint systems. Otherwise, 
the protective effect may be diminished.◄ 

Standard child restraint systems are designed 
to be secured with a lap belt or with the lap-belt 
section of a lap-and-shoulder belt. Incorrectly 
or improperly installed child restraint systems 
can increase the risk of injury to children. 
Always follow the installation instructions for 
the system with the greatest care. 


On the passenger seat 

After installing a child restraint system on 
the passenger seat, make sure that the 
front and side airbags for the passenger are 
deactivated; otherwise, there is an increased 
risk of injury if the airbags deploy. ◄ 

Seat position 

Before installing a child restraint system, move 
the passenger seat as far back and up* as pos¬ 
sible to obtain the best possible position for 
the belt. 

Backrest width* 

The backrest width of the passenger seat 
must be at its widest possible setting. Do 
not change the setting after installing the child 
seat. Otherwise, the child seat's stability on the 
passenger seat is limited.◄ 

1. Adjust the backrest width to its widest set¬ 
ting, refer to page 43. 

2. Install the child seat. 


Child seat security 



The safety belt for the passenger can be locked 
to prevent it from being pulled out when it is 
used to secure child restraint systems. 






48 


Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 





To lock the safety belt 

1. Secure the child restraint system with 
the belt. 

2. Pull the belt strap all the way out. 

3. Allow the belt strap to retract and pull it taut 
against the child restraint system. 

The safety belt is locked. 

To unlock the safety belt 

1. Open the belt buckle. 

2. Remove the child restraint system. 

3. Allow the safety belt strap to retract all 
the way. 

Upper LATCH retaining strap 

For Canadian Customers only 

The following statement is required by Trans¬ 
port Canada 

This vehicle is not equipped with user-ready 
tether anchorages. As such neither a child 
restraint system, nor a booster cushion, requir¬ 
ing the use of a tether strap can be properly 
secured in the vehicle. 


49 

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 


Controls 



Driving 


Driving 


Ignition lock 


Start/stop button 


Insert the remote control into the 
ignition lock 




Insert the remote control all the way into the 
ignition lock. 

> Radio readiness is switched on. 

Individual electrical consumers can operate. 


Pressing the start/stop button switches radio 
readiness or the ignition on or off. 

The engine is started when you press the 
start/stop button and depress the clutch if 
the car has manual transmission, or the brake if 
the car has automatic transmission.◄ 


Comfort Access* 

If the car is equipped with Comfort Access, only 
insert the remote control into the ignition lock 
under special circumstances, refer to page 34. 

Removing the remote control from the 
ignition lock 

□ Do not forcibly pull the remote control out 
of the ignition lock as this may cause 
damage.◄ 

Before removing the remote control, push it all 
the way in to release the locking mechanism. 

> The ignition is switched off if it was on. 

Automatic transmission 

You can only take out the remote control if 
transmission position P is engaged: Interlock 


Radio readiness 

Individual electrical consumers can operate. 
The time and the outside temperature are dis¬ 
played in the instrument cluster. 

Radio readiness is switched off automatically: 

> When the remote control is removed from 
the ignition lock 

> In cars with Comfort Access*, by touching 
the surface above the door lock, refer to 
Locking on page 35 


Ignition on 

All electrical consumers can operate. The 
odometer and trip odometer are displayed in 
the instrument cluster. 


D> 


When the engine is off, please switch off 
the ignition and any unnecessary 
electrical consumers in order to preserve the 
battery. ◄ 


Radio readiness and ignition off 

All indicator and warning lamps as well as dis¬ 
plays in the instrument cluster go out. 


50 

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 














Starting the engine 

Do not run the engine in enclosed areas; 
otherwise, the inhalation of toxic exhaust 
gases can cause loss of consciousness and 
death. The exhaust gases contain carbon mon¬ 
oxide, an odorless and colorless, but highly 
toxic gas. Never leave an unattended vehicle 
with the engine running; otherwise, such a vehi¬ 
cle represents a potential safety hazard. 

Before leaving the car with the engine running, 
place the transmission in neutral or move the 
selector lever to position P and set the parking 
brake to prevent the car from moving.◄ 

□ Avoid frequent starting in quick succes¬ 
sion as well as repeated start attempts in 
which the engine does not start. Otherwise, the 
fuel is not burned or incompletely burned and 
there is a danger of overheating and damaging 
the catalytic converter. ◄ 

Do not wait for the engine to warm up while the 
vehicle remains stationary. Start driving right 
away, but at moderate engine speeds. 


Automatic transmission 

Remote control in the ignition lock or, with 
Comfort Access, inside the vehicle, refer 
to page 34. 

1 Depress the brake. 

2. Move the selector lever to position P. 

3. Press the start/stop button. 

The starter operates automatically for a certain 
time, and stops automatically as soon as the 
engine has started. 

7-gear sport automatic transmission 
with dual clutch 

Remote control in the ignition lock or, with 
Comfort Access, inside the vehicle, refer 
to page 34. 

1. Depress the brake. 

2. Press the start/stop button. 

The engine starts, regardless of the current 
selector lever position. 



Manual transmission 

Remote control in the ignition lock or, with 
Comfort Access, inside the vehicle, refer 
to page 34. 

1 Depress the brake. 

2. Depress the clutch and shift to neutral 
position. 

3. Press the start/stop button. 

The starter operates automatically for a certain 
time, and stops automatically as soon as the 
engine has started. 


51 

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 


Controls 




Driving 


Switching off the engine 

Always take the remote control with you 
when you leave the vehicle. 

Set the parking brake firmly when parking; oth¬ 
erwise, the vehicle could roll.4 

Manual transmission 

1. With the car at a standstill, press the start/ 
stop button. 

2. Shift into first gear or reverse. 

3. Set the parking brake. 

4. Removing the remote control from the igni¬ 
tion lock, refer to page 50. 

Automatic transmission 

1. With the car at a standstill, move the selec¬ 
tor lever to position P. 

2. Press the start/stop button. 

3. Set the parking brake. 

4. Removing the remote control from the igni¬ 
tion lock, refer to page 50. 

7-gear sport automatic transmission 
with dual clutch 

1. With the car at a standstill, engage trans¬ 
mission position P. 

2. Press the start/stop button. 

3. Set the parking brake. 

4. Removing the remote control from the igni¬ 
tion lock, refer to page 50. 

Parking brake 

The concept 

Your BMW is equipped with an electromechan¬ 
ical parking brake that can be set and released 
by using a button. 

The parking brake is primarily used to prevent 
the vehicle from rolling when it is parked. 


When the vehicle is stationary, the parking 
brake acts on the rear wheels via an electrome¬ 
chanical mechanism. When the vehicle is rolling 
or being driven, the parking brake acts on the 
disc brakes of the front and rear wheels via the 
hydraulic brake system. 

Setting the brake 



Pull the button. The parking brake is set. 

1 The indicator lamp in the instrument 
PARK cluster and the LED on the button light 
up red. The parking brake is set. 

r Indicator lamp in Canadian models. 

To set the parking brake, the remote control 
does not need to be in the ignition lock. 

While driving 

In the rare case that the parking brake needs to 
be used while driving, pull the button for a 
lengthy period: 

The vehicle brakes hard while the button is 
being pulled. 

n The indicator lamp in the instrument 
PARK cluster lights up red, a sound is issued 
and the brake lamps light up. 

r' n Indicator lamp in Canadian models. 

As soon as you brake the vehicle almost to a 
standstill, approx. 2 mph/3 km/h, the parking 
brake remains set. 



52 


Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 







Releasing 


Take the remote control with you when 
leaving the vehicle so that children, for 
example, cannot release the parking brake.^ 


The parking brake can only be released while 
the ignition is switched on or the engine is 
running. 



With manual transmission 

Press the button of the parking brake. Depress 
the brake and clutch pedals while doing so. 


Manual transmission 



When shifting into 5th or 6th gear, press 
the gearshift lever to the right. Otherwise, 



the engine could be damaged if you inadvert¬ 
ently shift into 3rd or 4th gear.^ 

Reverse gear 

Select this only when the vehicle is stationary. 
When the gearshift lever is pressed to the left, a 
slight resistance has to be overcome. 


With automatic transmission or 7-gear 
sport automatic transmission with dual 
clutch 

Press the parking brake button while the brake 
is depressed or transmission position P is 
engaged. 


Automatic transmission with 
Steptronic* 

In addition to fully automatic operation, you can 
also manually shift with the Steptronic, refer 
to page 54. 


Indicator lamps 

1 The indicator lamp in the instrument 
PARK cluster goes out. 

r n Indicator lamp in Canadian models. 

(£9 

L J 

Malfunction 

In the event of a failure or malfunction of the 
parking brake, secure the vehicle against rolling 
using a wheel chock, for example, if you leave 
the vehicle. 


Vehicle parking 

To prevent the vehicle from rolling, 
always select position P and set the park¬ 
ing brake before leaving the vehicle with the 
engine running.◄ 

Disengaging the remote control 

In order to remove the remote control from the 
ignition lock, you must first move the selector 
lever to position P and switch off the engine: 
interlock. Removing the remote control from 
the ignition lock, refer to page 50. 



Selector lever positions 

PRNDM/S + - 


53 


Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 




j | j Controls j 





















Driving 


Displays in the instrument cluster 



PRNDDSM1 toM6 

The selector lever position is displayed, or the 
current gear in the manual mode. 


Changing selector lever positions 

> With the ignition switched on or the engine 
running, the selector lever can be moved 
out of position P. 

> Before moving the lever away from P or N 
with the vehicle stationary, first depress the 
brake; otherwise, the selector lever will 
refuse to move: shiftlock. 

□ To prevent the vehicle from creeping 
after you select a driving position, 
depress the brake until you are ready to 
start. ◄ 



A lock prevents you from inadvertently engag¬ 
ing selector lever positions R and P. To cancel 
the lock, press the button on the front of the 
selector lever, see arrow. 

PPark 

Select this only when the vehicle is stationary. 
The rear wheels are locked. 

R Reverse 

Select this only when the vehicle is stationary. 


N Neutral 

You can select this in a car wash, for example. 
The vehicle can roll. 

D Drive, automatic position 

Position for normal vehicle operation. All for¬ 
ward gears are selected automatically. 

Under normal operating conditions, fuel con¬ 
sumption is lowest when you are driving in 
position D. 

Kickdown 

Kickdown enables you to achieve maximum 
performance. 

Press the accelerator pedal beyond the full- 
throttle resistance point. 


Sport program and manual operation 
M/S 



Move selector lever from position D toward the 
left into the M/S shifting slot: 

The sport program is activated and DS is dis¬ 
played in the instrument cluster. This position is 
recommended fora performance-oriented driv¬ 
ing style. 

To deactivate the sport program or manual 
mode M/S, move the selector lever to the right 
into position D. 

Shifting gears via the selector lever 

When you press the selector lever forwards or 
backwards, the manual mode is activated and 
Steptronic changes gear. Ml through M6 are 
displayed in the instrument cluster. 

Upshifts and downshifts are executed only 
when they will result in a plausible combination 
of engine and vehicle speed; thus, for example, 


54 

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 











a downshift that would cause the engine to 
overrev will not be executed by the system. The 
gear selected is briefly displayed in the instru¬ 
ment cluster, followed by the gear actually 
in use. 


Shifting gears via shift paddles* on the 
steering wheel 

The shift paddles allow you to shift gears with¬ 
out taking your hands off the steering wheel. 

> When you use the shift paddles on the 
steering wheel to shift gears in automatic 
mode, the transmission switches to man¬ 
ual mode. 

> If you do not accelerate or shift gears using 
the shift paddles for a certain amount of 
time, the transmission switches back to 
automatic mode. 



If the selector lever is in the M/S gear 
plane, manual mode remains active.◄ 



> To shift up: press one of the shift paddles 
back, arrow 1. 

> To shift down: press one of the shift pad¬ 
dles forward, arrow 2 . 

Upshifts and downshifts are executed only 
when they will result in a plausible combination 
of engine and vehicle speed; thus, for example, 
a downshift that would cause the engine to 
overrev will not be executed by the system. The 
gear selected is briefly displayed in the instru¬ 
ment cluster, followed by the gear actually 
in use. 


Overriding selector lever lock 

Should the selector lever refuse to move out of 
position P although the button on the selector 
lever is pressed, the selector lever lock can be 
overridden: 

1. Unclip the sleeve of the selector lever. 

2. Pull the sleeve up over the selector lever 
until the sleeve is inside out. 



3. Using the screwdriver from the onboard 
vehicle tool kit, refer to page 212, press the 
red lever while moving the selector lever to 
the desired position. 

7-gear sport automatic 
transmission with dual 
clutch* 

The concept 

This transmission is an automated manual 
transmission with two clutches and two gear¬ 
box components in which the gears are 
changed without loss of torque. 

You operate the transmission using the selector 
lever and two shift paddles on the steering 
wheel. 

It offers the following functions: 

> Selection between manual and automatic 
operation: manual mode or drive mode 

> Automatic downshifting and protection 
against selecting the wrong gear, even in 
manual mode 

> Launch Control acceleration assistant, refer 
to page 58 

> Automatic double declutch 


55 

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 


Controls 









Driving 


System limitations 

This transmission is equipped with an over¬ 
heating protection system that protects the 
clutches against extremely high loads. 

The indicator lamp lights up yellow if 
the transmission becomes too warm. 
Avoid high engine loads and driving off 
frequently. 

If the transmission overheats, the indicator 
lamp lights up red and power flow to the engine 
is interrupted. You can only continue driving 
after the transmission has cooled down. 

Avoid driving off frequently with high accelera¬ 
tion and do not hold the vehicle on inclines by 
depressing the accelerator lightly; otherwise, 
the transmission may overheat. 

Transmission positions 

PRNDM/S + - 


Displays in the instrument cluster 



P, R, N, D1 to D7, SI to S7, Ml to M7 

The transmission position and the gear cur¬ 
rently engaged are displayed. 


Engaging transmission 
positions N, D, R 

> Transmission position P can only be disen¬ 
gaged if the engine is running. 

> Before moving the lever away from P or N 
with the vehicle stationary, depress the 
brake; otherwise, the transmission will not 
shift. 



Briefly push the selector lever in the desired 
direction, beyond a resistance point if nec¬ 
essary. 

When shifting out of P or into R, press button 1 
at the same time. 

The engaged transmission position is also dis¬ 
played on the selector lever. 

When you release the selector lever, it returns 
to its center position. 

N Neutral 

The vehicle can roll. 

... “ N remains engaged after the engine is 
switched off if the remote control remains 
in the ignition lock. This function can be used in 
an automatic carwash, for example. P is auto¬ 
matically engaged after approx. 30 minutes.◄ 

D drive mode 

In drive mode, all forward gears are shifted auto¬ 
matically. 

R Reverse 

Select this only when the vehicle is stationary. 


Engaging transmission position P 

Select this only when the vehicle is stationary. 



Press button P. 



56 

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 















P Park 

The rear wheels are locked. 

P is engaged automatically when the following 

conditions are met: 

> The driver's door is opened while the 
engine is running, your safety belt is not fas¬ 
tened and neither the brake pedal nor the 
accelerator are activated. 

> The engine is switched off unless N is 
engaged and the remote control is in the 
ignition lock. 

> The remote control is removed from the 
ignition lock. 

Kickdown 

To accelerate rapidly, e.g., when passing, press 

the accelerator down past the resistance point. 

This provides maximum acceleration. 


Activating the Sport program and 
manual mode M/S 



Move the selector lever from position D toward 
the left: 

The Sport program is activated. 


Sport program 

SI through S7 is displayed in the instrument 
cluster. This position is recommended for a 
performance-oriented driving style. 

Manual mode: 

When you press the selector lever forward or 
backward, or when you press the shift paddles, 
manual mode is activated and the gear is 
changed. 

Ml through M7 are displayed in the instrument 
cluster. 


The transmission provides assistance in the fol¬ 
lowing situations: 

t> Upshifts and downshifts are executed only 
when they will result in a plausible combina¬ 
tion of engine and vehicle speed; thus, for 
example, a downshift that would cause the 
engine to overrev will not be executed by 
the system. 

> When the vehicle stops, the transmission 
automatically shifts down to first gear. 

> Shortly before the vehicle slows down to 
below the minimum speed of the gear cur¬ 
rently engaged, the transmission automati¬ 
cally shifts down without requiring your 
intervention. 

Rapid downshifting: in manual mode, you can 
skip several gears to achieve optimal accelera¬ 
tion. Do so by pressing the accelerator past the 
resistance point. 

Changing to drive mode 

Push the selector lever to the right. 

Shifting gears via the selector lever 

In manual mode: 

> To shift up, pull back the selector lever. 

> To shift down, push it forward. 

Shifting gears via the shift paddles on 
the steering wheel 

The shift paddles allow you to shift gears with¬ 
out taking your hands off the steering wheel. 
You do not need to raise your foot from the 
accelerator when doing so. 



> To shift up: press one of the shift paddles 
back, arrow 1. 


57 

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 


Controls 






Driving 


> To shift down: press one of the shift pad¬ 
dles forward, arrow 2 . 

Gears can be shifted using the shift paddles in 
drive mode or in manual mode. 

Gearchange in manual mode: 

When manual mode is active, refer to page 57, 
gears can be changed using the shift paddles or 
the selector lever. 

Gear change in drive mode 

The shift paddles can be used to change gears 
in drive mode as well. 

Afterwards, if the shift paddles are not used for 
some time and vehicle acceleration is insuffi¬ 
cient, the forward gears are changed again 
automatically. 

Launch Control 

Launch Control enables you to drive off with an 
optimal vehicle acceleration on a high grip road 
surface. 


Launch Control only becomes available again 
after a certain distance has been driven. 


Launch Control can only be used after the 
break-in phase, refer to page 112. 



To maintain driving stability, activate DSC 
whenever possible.^ 


Manually releasing and engaging the 
transmission lock 

If a power failure occurs, e.g., if the battery 

is discharged or disconnected or if there 
is an electrical malfunction, the transmission 
lock must be released manually; otherwise, the 
rear wheels are blocked and the vehicle cannot 
be towed.◄ 

Release the transmission lock manually for tow¬ 
ing only and set the parking brake beforehand 
to prevent the vehicle from rolling. After parking 
the vehicle, lock the transmission lock again 
manually, refer to page 59. 


Manual release 


□ Do not use Launch Control too often, as 
the higher loads on the vehicle lead to 
premature component wear.◄ 

Launch Control is available when the engine is 
at operating temperature, i.e., after driving con¬ 
tinuously for at least 6 miles/10 km. 

1. With the engine running, depress the brake 
pedal with your left foot. 

2. Activate the SPORT+ program of the 
Dynamic Driving Control, refer to page 79. 

3. With the vehicle stationary, activate manual 
mode and select first gear. 

4. Press the accelerator all the way down. The 
engine speed when driving off is controlled. 
A flag symbol appears in the instrument 
cluster. 

5. The vehicle accelerates when you release 
the brake pedal. Keep the accelerator 
pressed all the way down. 

6. The transmission shifts up automatically as 
long as the accelerator is pressed all the 
way down. 


1. Unclip the sleeve of the selector lever. 

2. Pull the sleeve up over the selector lever 
until the sleeve is inside out. 



3. Insert the Allen wrench from the onboard 
vehicle tool kit, refer to page 212, into 
the cap. 


58 

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 













4. Turn the cap with the Allen wrench, arrow 1, 
and remove it, arrow 2. 



5. Insert the Allen wrench into the opening, 
arrow 1. 


Locking manually 

1. Press the button, see arrow. 

The transmission lock is locked again. 



2. Clip the sleeve of the selector lever back in 
place. 

3. Set the parking brake. 

Jump-starting and towing, refer to page 219. 



Turn the Allen wrench as far as it will go, 
arrow 2. The transmission lock is released. 

□ Do not turn the Allen wrench in the 
opposite direction as this may dam¬ 
age the mechanism.◄ 

7. Draw the Allen wrench out of the opening. 

After parking the vehicle, lock the trans¬ 
mission lock again, refer to Locking man¬ 
ually. Otherwise, there is a danger of the vehicle 
rolling.◄ 



1 High beams 

2 Headlamp flasher 

3 Turn signals 



Turn signals/ 
headlamp flasher 


Using turn signals 

Press the lever beyond the resistance point. 


To turn off manually, press the lever to the 
resistance point. 


C> 


Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator 
lamp indicates that a turn signal indicator 


has failed.◄ 


Indicating a turn briefly 


Press the lever as far as the resistance point for 
as long as you wish to indicate a turn. 

59 

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 


Controls 










Driving 


Triple turn signal activation 

Press the lever as far as the resistance point. 
The turn signals flash once. 

You can set whether it should flash once or 
three times when activated. 

1. MENU Press the button. 

2. "Settings" 

3. "Lighting" 

4. "Triple turn signal" 



The setting is stored for the remote control 
currently in use. 


Wiper system 



1 Switching on wipers 

2 Switching off wipers or brief wipe 

3 Activating/deactivating intermittent wipe or 
rain sensor* 

4 Cleaning windshield and headlamps 

5 Setting speed for intermittent wipe, or sen¬ 
sitivity of the rain sensor 


Switching on wipers 

Press the lever upward, arrow 1. 

The lever automatically returns to its initial posi¬ 
tion when released. 

Normal wiper speed 

Press once. 

The system switches to operation in the inter¬ 
mittent mode when the vehicle is stationary. 

Fast wiper speed 

Press twice or press beyond the resistance 
point. 

The system switches to normal speed when the 
vehicle is stationary. 

Intermittent wipe or rain sensor* 

If the car is not equipped with a rain sensor, the 
intermittent-wipe time is a preset. 

If the car is equipped with a rain sensor, the time 
between wipes is controlled automatically and 
depends on the intensity of the rainfall. The rain 
sensor is mounted on the windshield, directly in 
front of the interior rearview mirror. 


Activating intermittent wipe or rain 
sensor 



Press the button, arrow 3. The LED in the but¬ 
ton lights up. 


Setting speed for intermittent wipe or 
sensitivity of the rain sensor 

Turn knurled wheel 5 up or down. 


60 


Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 





























Deactivating intermittent wipe or rain 
sensor 

Press the button again, arrow 3. 

The LED goes out. 

Deactivate the rain sensor before enter¬ 
ing an automatic carwash. Failure to do 
so could result in damage caused by undesired 
wiper activation.◄ 

Cleaning windshield and headlamps* 
Pull the lever, arrow 4. 

Washer fluid is sprayed onto the windshield and 
the wipers are operated for a short time. 

When the vehicle lighting system is switched 
on, the headlamps are cleaned at regular and 
appropriate intervals. 

Do not use the washers if there is any 
danger that the fluid will freeze on the 
windshield. If you do, your vision could be 
obscured. Antifreeze should therefore be 
added to the fluid, refer to Washer fluid. 

Do not use the washers when the washer fluid 
reservoir is empty; otherwise, you will damage 
the washer pump.4 

Windshield washer nozzles 

The windshield washer nozzles are heated 
automatically while the engine is running or the 
ignition is switched on. 

Washer fluid 

Washer fluid antifreeze is flammable. 
Therefore, keep it away from ignition 
sources and only store it in the closed original 
container that is kept out of reach of children; 
otherwise, there is a risk of personal injury. 
Comply with the instructions on the con- 
tainer.^ 

Washer fluid filler neck 

Only refill washer fluid when the engine is 
cool to avoid contact with hot engine 
parts. Otherwise, fluid spills constitute a fire 
hazard and a risk to personal safety.◄ 



All washer nozzles are supplied with washer 
fluid by the same reservoir. 

Fill with water and, if required, with a washer 
antifreeze, according to manufacturer's recom¬ 
mendations. 

Mix the water and antifreeze before filling 
the washer fluid reservoir to make sure 
the correct concentration is maintained.◄ 

Capacity 

Approx. 6.3 US quarts/6 liters. 

Cruise control* 

The concept 

Cruise control is available for use at speeds of 
approx. 20 mph or 30 km/h. The car then stores 
and maintains the speed that you specify using 
the lever on the steering column. In order to 
maintain the specified speed, the system 
brakes the vehicle when the engine braking 
effect is insufficient on downhill gradients. 

Do not use cruise control when driving at 
constant speed is prevented by adverse 
conditions, e.g., winding roads, dense traffic, 
poor visibility or unfavorable road conditions 
due to, e.g., snow, rain, ice or loose surfaces. 
Otherwise, you could lose control of the vehicle 
and cause an accident as a result.4 

Manual transmission 

You can shift gears while cruise control is acti¬ 
vated. An indicator lamp notifies you that you 
should shift gears when you drive for an 
extended period at very high or very low engine 
speeds, or the system is deactivated. 







Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 


| ! ! j j Controls 

















Driving 


One lever for all functions 



1 Storing and maintaining speed or acceler¬ 
ating 

2 Storing and maintaining speed or deceler¬ 
ating 

3 Deactivating cruise control 

4 Resuming a speed stored beforehand 

Maintaining current speed 

Tap the lever, arrow 1, or pull it briefly, arrow 2. 
The car's current speed is stored and main¬ 
tained. It is displayed on the speedometer and 
briefly in the instrument cluster. 

On uphill gradients, it may prove impossible to 
maintain the set speed if current engine power 
output is insufficient. If the engine braking 
effect is insufficient on downhill slopes, the sys¬ 
tem will brake the vehicle slightly. 

Increasing desired speed 

Repeatedly press the lever to the resistance 
point or beyond, arrow 1, until the desired 
speed is reached. 

> Each time the lever is pressed to the resis¬ 
tance point, the desired speed is increased 
by approx. 1 mph or 1 km/h. 

> Each time the lever is pressed beyond the 
resistance point, the desired speed is 
increased by up to 5 mph or 10 km/h. 

The system stores and maintains the speed. 

Accelerating using the lever 

Accelerating slightly: 

Press the lever to the resistance point, arrow 1, 
and hold until the desired speed is reached. 


Accelerating significantly: 

Press the lever beyond the resistance point, 
arrow 1, and hold until the desired speed is 
reached. 

The vehicle accelerates without pressure on 
the accelerator pedal. The system stores and 
maintains the speed. 

Decreasing speed 

Repeatedly pull the lever to the resistance point 
or beyond, arrow 2, until the desired speed is 
displayed. 

> Each time the lever is pulled to the resis¬ 
tance point, the desired speed is decreased 
by approx. 1 mph or 1 km/h. 

> Each time the lever is pulled beyond the 
resistance point, the desired speed is 
reduced by up to 5 mph or 10 km/h until the 
minimum speed of 20 mph or 30 km/h is 
achieved. 

The system stores and maintains the speed. 

Interrupting the system 

Tap the lever upwards or downwards, arrow 3. 
The displays in the speedometer change color. 

In addition, the system is automatically deacti¬ 
vated: 

> When you brake the vehicle 

> When you switch gears very slowly or shift 
to neutral in cars with a manual trans¬ 
mission 

> When you engage selector lever position N 
in cars with an automatic transmission 

> When you engage transmission position N 
in 7-gear sport automatic transmissions 
with a dual clutch 

> When you activate the DTC Dynamic Trac- 
tion Control or deactivate DSC 

> When DSC or ABS is intervening 

Cruise control is not deactivated by depressing 
the accelerator pedal. Once the accelerator 
pedal is released, the stored speed is achieved 
again and maintained. 


62 

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 





Warning lamp 

The warning lamp comes on, for 
example, when cruise control has 
been deactivated as a result of DSC 
intervention. A message appears on the Control 
Display. 

Deactivating the system 

> Press the lever upward or downward twice, 
arrow 3. 

> Switch off the ignition. 

The stored speed is cleared. 

Resuming a speed stored beforehand 

Press the button, arrow 4. The last stored 
speed is resumed and maintained. 



Displays in the instrument cluster 



1 Stored speed 

2 Selected speed is displayed briefly 


D> 


If — mph or — km/h temporarily appears 
in the instrument cluster display, it is pos¬ 
sible that the system prerequisites for operation 
are currently not met. 

Calling up Check Control messages, refer 
to page 74.4 


Malfunction 

* j" The warning lamp comes on when 
/0 ! \ the system has failed. A message 
appears on the Control Display. 
More information can be found beginning 
on page 73. 


63 

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 


Controls 












Controls overview 


Controls overview 


Odometer, outside 
temperature display, clock 



1 Knob in the instrument cluster 

2 Outside temperature display and clock 

3 Odometer and trip odometer 


Knob in the instrument cluster 

> To reset the trip odometer while the ignition 
is switched on 

> To display the time, outside temperature 
and odometer briefly while the ignition is 
switched off 

Units of measure 

To select the respective units of measure, miles 
or km for the odometer as well as °F or °C for 
the outside temperature, refer to page 68. 

The setting is stored for the remote control cur¬ 
rently in use. 

Time, outside temperature display 

Setting the time, refer to page 71 . 

Outside temperature warning 

When the displayed temperature sinks to 
approx. +37 °F /+3 °C, a signal sounds and a 
warning lamp lights up. There is an increased 
risk of black ice. 


Black ice can also form at temperatures 
above +37 °F /+3 °C. You should there¬ 
fore drive carefully on bridges and shaded 
roads, for example; otherwise, there is an 
increased risk of an accident.^ 

Odometer and trip odometer 

Resetting trip odometer: 

With the ignition switched on, press button 1 in 
the instrument cluster. 

When the vehicle is parked 

If you still want to view the time, outside tem¬ 
perature and odometer reading briefly after the 
remote control has been taken out of the igni¬ 
tion lock: 

Press button 1 in the instrument cluster. 


Tachometer 



Never force the engine speed up into the red 
warning field, see arrow. In this range, the fuel 
supply is interrupted to protect the engine. 



64 


Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 











Coolant temperature 

A warning lamp will come on if the coolant, and 
therefore the engine, becomes too hot. In addi¬ 
tion, a message will appear on the Control 
Display. 

Check coolant level, refer to page 204. 


Engine oil temperature* 



When the engine is at normal operating 
temperature, the engine oil temperature is 
between approx. 210°F/100°C and approx. 
300 °F/150 °C. 

If the engine oil temperature is too high, a mes¬ 
sage appears on the Control Display. 


Fuel gauge 



Fuel tank capacity: approx. 14.5 US gallons/ 

55 liters. 

You can find information on refueling 
on page 192. 

If the tilt of the vehicle varies for a longer period, 
when you are driving in mountainous areas, for 
example, the indicator may fluctuate slightly. 


Reserve 

Once the fuel level has fallen to the reserve 
zone, a message briefly appears on the Control 
Display and the cruising range for the remaining 
amount of fuel is displayed on the computer. 
Under a cruising range of approx. 30 miles/ 

50 km, the message remains in the Control 
Display. 

Refuel as soon as possible once your 
cruising range falls below 30 miles/ 

50 km; otherwise, engine functions are not 
ensured and damage can occur. ◄ 

Computer 

Displays in the instrument cluster 


Calling up information 



Press the button in the turn indicator lever. 

The following items of information are dis¬ 
played in the order listed: 

> Cruising range 

> Average speed 

> Average fuel consumption 

> Current fuel consumption* 

> No information 

To set the corresponding units of measure, 
refer to Units of measure on page 68. 



65 

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 


| Controls 

















Controls overview 


Cruising range 

Displays the estimated cruising range available 
with the remaining fuel. The range is calculated 
on the basis of the way the car has been driven 
over the last 18 miles/30 km and the amount of 
fuel currently in the tank. 

Refuel as soon as possible once your 
cruising range falls below 30 miles/ 

50 km; otherwise, engine functions are not 
ensured and damage can occur. ◄ 

Average speed 

Periods with the vehicle parked and the engine 
switched off are not included in the calculations 
of average speed. 

With the trip computer, refer to page 67, you 
can have the average speed for another trip 
displayed. 

To reset average speed: press the button in the 
turn indicator lever for approx. 2 seconds. 

Average fuel consumption 

The average fuel consumption is calculated for 
the time during which the engine is running. 

With the trip computer, refer to page 67, you 
can have the average consumption for another 
trip displayed. 

To reset average fuel consumption: press the 
button in the turn indicator lever for approx. 

2 seconds. 

Current fuel consumption 

Displays the current fuel consumption. This 
allows you to see whether your current driving 
style is conducive to fuel economy with mini¬ 
mum exhaust emissions. 


Displays on the Control Display 

The computer can also be opened via iDrive. 

1. "Vehicle Info" 

2. "Onboard info" or "Trip computer" 


OiibiMuJ info 
i/ Trip computer 
Vehicle stjiui 

T II 


Displays on the "Onboard info": 


|A \:0T OllbCM 

iU infu 


V 

v-= 

M 

450 km 

farm* 

\ 

\ ]' 4* 

230 km 

To desk 

l i 

P i ; -e 

02:1b 

Arrival 

lx 

L/ \ to 

10,5 1/100 km Cons. 



75.0 kmfli 

i SpyyJ 

J 

(1 

J 

1 | 

/ 


> Cruising range 

> Distance from destination 

> Estimated time of arrival if: 

> A distance was manually entered into 
the computer, refer to information 
below. 

t> A destination was entered in the naviga¬ 
tion system*, refer to page 121 . 



66 


Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 





Displays on the "Trip computer": 


\ \ Trip computer 
^ \ *S* 09:30 DviJdiL 

© 01:20 hr Duration 

^ 1411 km Dutnnw 

■ * "ft 10.5 I^IOO km Cons. 

J .y Q 095.5 km/h sp uuj 


> Departure time 

> Trip duration 

> Trip distance 
Both displays show: 

> The average speed and 

t> the average fuel consumption. 

Resetting the fuel consumption and 
speed 

You can reset the values for average speed and 
average consumption: 

1. Select the respective menu item and press 
the controller. 

2. Press the controller again to confirm your 
selection. 

Resetting the Trip computer 

1. "Vehicle Info" 

2. "Trip computer" 

3. "Reset" 

4. "Yes" 


Entering a distance manually 

1. "Vehicle Info" 

2. "Onboard info" 

3. "Todest." 


|\ _\ fc? OhUl 

;id irifg 


-ft 

450 km 

Rjnqy 

Ik Vi 4f 

230 km 

To dfl*L 

mm -e 

<1211^ 

Arrival 

' ■ •; ft 

10,5 l/roo km Cons. 

irr 

75.0 km/h 

Speed 


4. Turn the controller until the desired dis¬ 
tance is displayed. 

5. Press the controller. 

The distance is automatically entered during 
destination guidance using the navigation 
system*. 


Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 


| | | | | Controls j 












Controls overview 



Settings and information 

Operating principle 


1 Button for: 

t> Selecting display 

> Setting values 

2 Button for: 

> Confirming selected display or set 
values 

> Calling up computer information 65 

3 When the lights are on: instrument lighting 
brightness 91 

4 Calling up Check Control 73 

5 Checking engine oil level 202 

6 Setting the time 71 

7 Setting the date 72 

8 Viewing service requirement display 69 

Exiting displays 

The outside temperature reading and the time 
reappear when you press button 2 or if you 
make no entries within approx. 15 seconds. If 
required, complete the current setting first. 


Units of measure 

1. "Settings" 

2. "Language/Units" 



3. Select the desired menu item. 

4. Select the desired unit. 

The settings are stored for the remote control 
currently in use. 


68 

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 















Service requirements 



The remaining driving distance and the date of 
the next scheduled service are displayed briefly 
immediately after you start the engine or switch 
on the ignition. 


U> 

your 


The extent of service work required can 
be read out from the remote control by 
BMW Service Advisor. ◄ 


For certain maintenance operations, you can 
view the respective distance remaining or due 
date individually in the instrument cluster. 



1. Switch on the ignition, refer to page 50. 

2. Push button 1 in the turn indicator lever up 
or down repeatedly until the appropriate 
symbol appears in the display, accompa¬ 
nied by the words "SERVICE-INFO". 

3. Press button 2. 

4. Use button 1 to scroll through the individual 
service items. 


69 

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 


Controls 













Controls overview 


Possible displays 



1 Button for selecting functions 

2 Service requirements 

3 Engine oil 

4 Roadworthiness test* 

5 Front brake pads 


6 Rear brake pads 

7 Brake fluid 

The sequence of displayed service items may 
vary. The data for the next service appointment 
is shown first. 


More information 

Detailed information on service 
requirements 

More information on the scope of service 
required can be displayed on the Control 
Display. 

1. "Vehicle Info" 

2. "Vehicle status" 



Required maintenance procedures and legally 
mandated inspections are displayed. 

You can request more detailed information on 
every entry: 

Select the entry and press the controller. 

To exit from the menu: 

Move the controller to the left. 


Symbols 



No service is currently required. 


The deadline for service or a legally man¬ 
dated inspection is approaching. Please 
schedule a service appointment. 



The service deadline has already passed. 


3. "Service required" 


70 

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 





















Entering deadlines for legally required 
inspections* 

Make sure the date on the Control Display is set 
correctly, refer to page 72; otherwise, the effec¬ 
tiveness of CBS Condition Based Service is not 
ensured. 

1. "Vehicle Info" 

2. "Vehicle status" 

3. "Service required" 



4. "§ Vehicle inspection" 



5. Open the menu for entering the deadline. 

6. "Date:" 

7. Create the settings. 

8. Press the controller to apply the setting. 
The year is highlighted. 

9. Turn the controller to make the adjustment. 

10. Press the controller to apply the setting. 
The date entry is stored. 

To exit from the menu: 

Move the controller to the left. 

More information on the BMW Maintenance 
System can be found on page 206. 


Clock 

Setting the time 


In the instrument cluster 

To set the 12h/24h mode, refer to Setting the 
time format below. 



1. Push button 1 in the turn indicator lever up 
or down repeatedly until the appropriate 
symbol appears in the display, accompa¬ 
nied by the time and the word "SET". 

2. Press button 2. 

3. Use button 1 to set the hours. 

4. Press button 2 to confirm the entry. 

5. Use button 1 to set the minutes. 

6. Press button 2 to confirm the entry. 

7. Press button 2. 

The system accepts the new time. 

Via iDrive 

1. MENU Press the button. 

The main menu is displayed. 



71 

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 


Controls 






















Controls overview 


2. "Settings" 


>1 

fin mtHiu 

CD/MnlTrmpdrft 

|----L 

Refdio 


Tel upbuilt? 

II 

Navigation 

Contacts 

wr 

BMW Assist 


Vehicle Info 


Sy ItlULfi 


Setting the time 

1. "Settings" 

2. "Time/Date" 


k\ 10 Tmefcaiit 


_ I ■ 

' U y^fTfms; 

09:30 

i \ \ 

l 1 Format 

24 h 

11 

I* ^ Date: 


11 

' r Format: 

tt.rrim jjjJ 


■ 1 r 

■1 I 
■/ 1 

Ifl / 


1 r 

/ / 
t j 


3. "Time:" 

4. Turn the controller until the desired hours 
are displayed, and then press the controller. 

5. Turn the controller until the desired minutes 
are displayed, and then press the controller. 

The time is stored. 

Setting the time format 

1. "Settings" 

2. "Time/Date" 

3. "Format:" 

4. Select the desired format and press the 
controller. 

The time format is stored. 

The setting is stored for the remote control 
currently in use, refer also to Personal Profile 
on page 28. 


Date 

The settings are stored for the remote control 
currently in use, refer also to Personal Profile 
on page 28. 

Setting the date 


In the instrument cluster 

To set the dd/mm or mm/dd date format, refer 
to Setting the date format below. 



1. Push button 1 in the turn indicator lever up 
or down repeatedly until the appropriate 
symbol appears in the display, accompa¬ 
nied by the date and the word "SET". 

2. Press button 2. 

3. Use button 1 to set the day of the month. 

4. Press button 2 to confirm the entry. 

5. Set the month and the year in the same way. 

6. Press button 2. 

The system stores the new date. 

Via i Drive 

1. "Settings" 

2. "Time/Date" 

3. "Date:" 

4. Turn the controller until the desired day is 
displayed, and then press the controller. 

5. Create the necessary settings for the 
month and year. 

The date is stored. 


72 


Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 








Setting the date format 

1. "Settings" 

2. "Time/Date" 

3. "Format:" 



4. Select the desired format. 
The date format is stored. 


Check Control 

The concept 

The Check Control monitors vehicle functions 
and alerts you to any malfunctions in the sys¬ 
tems monitored. A Check Control message 
encompasses indicator and warning lamps in 
the instrument cluster and may include an 
acoustic signal and text messages on the Con¬ 
trol Display. 

Indicator and warning lamps 




, 1 . indicates that Check Control messages have 
been stored. You can view the Check Control 
messages whenever it is convenient for you. 

Explanatory text messages 

Text messages at the upper edge of the Control 
Display explain the meaning of the displayed 
indicator and warning lamps. 

For most Check Control messages, you can 
view more information later, e.g., regarding the 
cause of a malfunction and how to respond; 
refer to the information provided below. 


V \ Detail* 




Washer fly id 


■Vflfth'Pf fluffd in 

r ' w 

fluid reservoir, Refill as soon 

ifrf 

1 / v 

rii ui’iiililtr, Peftir Isj 



In urgent cases, this information will be shown 
as soon as the corresponding lamp comes on. 

To exit the displayed information: 

Move the controller to the left. 


Indicator and warning lamps can light up in a 
variety of combinations and colors. 


73 

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 


Controls 















Controls overview 


Hiding Check Control messages 



Press the button in the turn indicator lever. 

Some Check Control messages are displayed 
until the malfunctions have been rectified. They 
cannot be hidden. If several malfunctions occur 
at the same time, they are displayed in suc¬ 
cession. 

They are marked with the symbol 
shown here. 

Other messages are automatically hidden after 
approx. 20 seconds, but are kept in memory. 

They are marked with the symbol 
shown here. 


3. Push button 1 to check for other messages. 

4. Press button 2. 

The display again shows the outside tem¬ 
perature and the time. 

Displaying stored Check Control 
messages 

1. MENU Press the button. 

2. "Vehicle Info" 

3. "Vehicle status" 

4. "Check Control" 


\ X 3 v 

uhtt n» Mfituii 


{.!> 

JEttJ 



*1- r 

P1 A 

t'M 


5. Select the text message. 




Viewing stored Check Control 
messages 



1. Push button 1 in the turn indicator lever up 
or down repeatedly until the appropriate 
symbol appears in the display, accompa¬ 
nied by the words "CHECK CONTROL". 

2. Press button 2. 

"CHECK OK" appears if there are no Check 
Control messages. 

If a Check Control message has been 
stored, the corresponding lamp comes on. 
It is accompanied by a text message on the 
Control Display. 


Speed limit 

You can enter a speed, and a Check Control 
message will indicate when you reach this 
speed. This enables you, for example, to 
receive warnings if you exceed a speed limit in 
an urban area. 

You are not alerted to having reached this 
speed again until afteryour vehicle speed drops 
below it by at least 3 mph or 5 km/h. 

1. "Settings" 

2. "Speed" 

3. "Warning" 



74 

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 














4. Turn the controller until the desired limit is 
displayed. 

5. Press the controller. 

The speed limit is stored. 

Applying your current speed as the 
limit 

1. "Settings" 

2. "Speed" 

3. "Select current speed" 


Ml # Speed \ 

■r i 

Spwd h km/h 

- \ ■ 

□ Wdmiriy 

1 1 

defect cu rrent speed 

1 w 

1 

W 1 

i 

it 


4. Press the controller. 

The system adopts your current speed as the 
limit. 


Activating/deactivating the limit 

1. "Settings" 

2. "Speed" 

3. "Warning" 


\ ® Speed 

_ V_ 

T i 

^ \ Speed 

1' ■ □ Wdmirig 

1 \ 

\ 

Select current speed 



T 

f 

■ 1 ] 

M / 1 

[ i 

1 


4. Press the controller. 

uy The limit warning is switched on. 


Settings on the Control 
Display 

Language on the Control Display 

Setting the language 

1. "Settings" 

2. "Language/Units" 

3. "Language:" 



\y LdPltJLtiiLj|t?/UlirU 


\ 

_ \ __ 

\ 1 

L 




Language: 

Deutsch 

\ \ 

\ 

5 Speech mode 

Default 



Consumption! 

if 100 km 


r? i 

* Dfttance: 

km 


i] 

i 

r Tempeiaiuie, 

F 

1 u c li 

* 1 


4. Select the desired language. 

The setting is stored for the remote control cur¬ 
rently in use. 


Setting the voice dialog 

Switch between a standard dialog and a short 
dialog. 

1. "Settings" 

2. "Language/Units" 

3. "Speech mode:" 

4. Select the desired dialog. 


IA | vjy S p set 11 11 iprit 

il | 

\ 

■111 fi _iiV n i 

ill ) Short 

V 

11 It 


r 

11 

lY 

Hi I 

ml f 

11 

' l 


The setting is stored for the remote control cur¬ 
rently in use. 


75 

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 


Controls 









Controls overview 


Volume of the warning signals* 

You can raise or lower the volume of the warn¬ 
ing signals, e.g., the 'Fasten safety belts' 
reminder, relative to the entertainment sound 
output. The warning signals have a fixed mini¬ 
mum and maximum volume that cannot be 
dropped below or exceeded. 

1. "Settings" 

2. "Tone" 

3. "Volume settings" 


\ \ Vglumt; veUmg* \ 


Spued vo fume 

\ \ 


m 

+ 1 V 


Volume letting 


- 

PDC - 1 

4 

■f ! r 

iii 

Gong - 

4 

1 I, 

I f 

f 1 ■ 


> "Speed volume": speed-dependent vol¬ 
ume control 

t> "PDC": volume of the PDC signal tone 
relative to the entertainment sound 
output 

> "Gong": volume of the signal tone, e.g., 
for the "Fasten safety belts" reminder, 
relative to the entertainment sound 
output 


Brightness of Control Display 

The brightness is automatically adapted to the 
ambient lighting conditions. However, you can 
change the basic setting while the low beams 
are switched on. 

1. "Settings" 

2. "Control display" 

3. "Brightness" 



4. Turn the controller until the desired setting 
is selected. 

5. Press the controller. 

The setting is stored for the remote control cur¬ 
rently in use. In bright conditions, for example, 
the brightness control may not be clearly 
visible. 


76 


Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 





Technology for driving comfort and safety 


Park Distance Control PDC* 

The concept 

The PDC assists you with maneuvering in tight 
parking spaces. Acoustic signals and a visual 
indicator warn you of the presence of an object 
in front of* or behind your vehicle. To measure 
the distance, there are four ultrasonic sensors 
in either bumper. 

These sensors have a range of approx. 6.5 ft/ 

2 m. However, an acoustic warning does not 
sound until an object is approx. 24 in/60 cm 
from the corner sensors, or approx. 5 ft/1.50 m 
from the center sensors. 

PDC is a parking aid that can indicate 
objects when they are approached 
slowly, as is usually the case when parking. 
Avoid approaching an object at high speed; oth¬ 
erwise, physical circumstances may lead to the 
system warning being issued too late.4 

Switching on automatically 

With the engine running orthe ignition switched 
on, the system is activated after approx. 1 sec¬ 
ond when you engage reverse gear or move the 
automatic transmission selector lever to 
position R. Wait this short period before driving. 

Switching off automatically 

After approx. 165 ft/50 m of driving or above 
approx. 20 mph or 30 km/h, the system 
switches off and the LED goes out. 

Signal tones 

When nearing an object, its position is indicated 
correspondingly by an interval tone. As the dis¬ 
tance between vehicle and object decreases, 
the intervals between the tones become 
shorter. If the distance to the nearest object 
falls to below roughly 1 ft/30 cm, then a contin¬ 
uous tone sounds. 

An interval tone is interrupted after approx. 

3 seconds 


> If you remain in front of an object that has 
been detected by only one of the corner 
sensors 

> If you are driving parallel to a wall. 

Malfunction 

r J The indicator lamp in the instrument 
cluster comes on. PDC is malfunc¬ 
tioning. A message appears on the 
Control Display.Have the system checked. 

To avoid this problem, keep the sensors clean 
and free of ice or snow in order to ensure that 
they will continue to operate effectively. When 
using a high-pressure cleaner, do not spray the 
sensors for extended periods of time and only 
from a distance of at least 12 in/30 cm. 

PDC with visual warning 

The approach of the vehicle to an object is 
shown on the Control Display. Objects that are 
farther away are displayed on the Control Dis¬ 
play before a signal tone sounds. The display 
appears on the Control Display as soon as PDC 
is activated. 

System limitations 

Even with PDC, final responsibility for 
estimating the distance between the 
vehicle and any obstructions always remains 
with the driver. Even when sensors are pro¬ 
vided, there is a blind spot in which objects can 
no longer be detected. The system is also sub¬ 
ject to the physical limits that apply to all forms 
of ultrasonic measurement, such as those 
encountered with trailer towbars and hitches, 
thin or wedge-shaped objects, etc. Low objects 
that have already been displayed, e.g., curbs, 
can disappear again from the detection area of 
the sensors before or after a continuous tone 
sounds. Higher, protruding objects, e.g., 
ledges, cannot be detected. Therefore, always 
drive cautiously; otherwise, there is a risk of 
personal injury or property damage. 




77 

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 


Controls 






Technology for driving comfort and safety 


Loud sound sources outside or inside the car 
can drown out the PDC signal. Therefore, 
always drive cautiously; otherwise, there is a 
risk of personal injury or property damage.◄ 


Driving stability control 
systems 

Your BMW has a number of systems that help 
to maintain the vehicle's stability even in 
adverse driving conditions. 

Antilock Brake System ABS 

ABS prevents locking of the wheels during 
braking. Safe steering response is maintained 
even during full braking. Active safety is thus 
increased. 

The ABS is operational every time you start the 
engine. Braking safely, refer to page 114. 

Electronic brake-force distribution 

The system controls the brake pressure in the 
rear wheels to ensure stable braking behavior. 

Dynamic Brake Control DBC 

When you apply the brakes rapidly, this system 
automatically produces the maximum braking 
force boost and thus helps to achieve the short¬ 
est possible braking distance during full brak¬ 
ing. This system exploits all of the benefits pro¬ 
vided by ABS. 

Do not reduce the pressure on the brake for the 
duration of the full braking application. 

Dynamic Stability Control DSC 

DSC prevents the driving wheels from losing 
traction when you pull away from rest or accel¬ 
erate. The system also recognizes unstable 
driving conditions, for example if the rear of the 
car is about to swerve or if momentum is acting 
at an angle past the front wheels. In these 
cases, DSC helps the vehicle maintain a safe 
course within physical limits by reducing engine 
output and through braking actions at the indi¬ 
vidual wheels. 


□ The laws of physics cannot be repealed, 
even with DSC. An appropriate driving 
style always remains the responsibility of the 
driver. Therefore, do not reduce the additional 
safety margin again by taking risks, as this could 
result in an accident.^ 


Deactivating/activating the DSC OFF 
program 

The program can be deactivated via Dynamic 
Driving Control, refer to DSC OFF. 

For better control 

The indicator lamp flashes: DSC con¬ 
trols the drive forces and brake forces. 

The indicator lamp lights up: DSC has 

failed. 


m 


DTC Dynamic Traction Control 

The concept 

The DTC system and the TRACTION program 
are a variant of the DSC in which forward 
momentum is optimized. 

The system ensures maximum forward 
momentum on special road conditions, e.g., 
unplowed snowy roads, but driving stability is 
limited. 

It is therefore necessary to drive with appropri¬ 
ate caution. 

You may find it useful to briefly activate DTC 
under the following special circumstances: 

> When driving in slush or on uncleared, 
snow-covered roads. 

> When rocking the vehicle or driving off in 
deep snow or on loose surfaces. 

> When driving with snow chains. 

Deactivating/activating DTC Dynamic 
Traction Control 

The system and program can be deactivated/ 
activated via Dynamic Driving Control. 


78 

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 







Dynamic Driving Control 

The concept 

Dynamic Driving Control can be used to adjust 
the driving dynamics of the vehicle. 

Several programs are available for this purpose; 
they can be activated using the two Dynamic 
Driving Control buttons. 

The following characteristics are adapted, 
depending on which program was selected: 

> Engine response. 

> Shift times of the automatic transmission*. 

> Power steering support*. 

> Changes in the suspension characteristics 
through damping control*. 

> Vehicle stabilization through DSC Dynamic 
Stability Control. 


Operating the programs 



1 You can activate or deactivate the following 
programs using this button: 

> DSC OFF 

> TRACTION 

2 You can activate or deactivate the following 
programs using this rocker switch: 


DSC OFF 



Driving stability is limited during acceleration 
and when driving in bends. 

To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC again 
as soon as possible. 


Activating DSC OFF 

Press and hold the button, but not 
longer than approx. 10 seconds, until 
the indicator lamp for the DSC lights up in the 
instrument cluster and DSC OFF is displayed in 
the instrument cluster. 

The DSC system is switched off. 


Deactivating DSC OFF 

BfiMj Press the button. 

DSC OFF and the DSC indicator lamp 

go out. 


For better control 

When DSC is switched off, DSC OFF is dis¬ 
played in the instrument cluster. 

The indicator lamp lights up: DSC is 
deactivated. 



> SPORT+ 

> SPORT 

> NORMAL 


TRACTION 

Maximum traction on loose road surfaces. DTC 
Dynamic Traction Control is switched on. Driv¬ 
ing stability is limited during acceleration and 
when driving in bends. 


79 

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 


Controls 














Technology for driving comfort and safety 


Activating TRACTION 


Press the button. 


“““ TRACTION is displayed in the instru¬ 
ment cluster. 


The DSC indicator lamp in the instrument clus¬ 
ter lights up. 


Deactivating TRACTION 

Press the button again. 

TRACTION and the DSC indicator 
lamp go out. 


For better control 

When DTC is switched on, TRACTION is dis¬ 
played in the instrument cluster. 

The indicator lamp lights up: DTC 
Dynamic Traction Control is activated. 



SPORT 

Consistently sporty tuning of the suspension 
for greater driving agility with maximum driving 
stabilization. 

Activating SPORT 

■ Press the button repeatedly until 

SPORT+ appears in the instrument 

cluster. 

NORMAL 

For a balanced tuning with maximum driving 
stabilization. 

Activating NORMAL 

■ Press the button repeatedly until the 
program display disappears in the 
instrument cluster. 


SPORT+ 



Sporty driving with a tight suspension and lim¬ 
ited driving stabilization. 

Dynamic Traction Control is switched on. 

The driver handles several of the stabilization 
tasks. 

Activating SPORT+ 

UU Press the button repeatedly until 
■■J SPORT+appears in the instrument 
cluster and the DSC indicator lamp lights up. 

For better control 

SPORT+ is displayed in the instrument cluster, 
jhg j nc |i ca tor lamp lights up: DTC 
gg Dynamic Traction Control is activated. 


Displays in the instrument cluster 



The selected program is displayed in the instru¬ 
ment cluster. 


Drive-off assistant 

The drive-off assistant enables you to drive off 
smoothly on uphill gradients. The parking brake 
is not required. 

1. Hold the car in place by depressing the 
brake. 

2. Release the brake and drive off without 
delay. 

The drive-off assistant holds the car in 
place for approx. 2 seconds after the 
brake is released. Drive off without delay after 
releasing the brake. Because the drive-off 



80 

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 


















assistant will not hold the car in place after 
approx. 2 seconds, the car would otherwise 
start to roll backwards.^ 


Flat Tire Monitor FTM* 

The concept 

The Flat Tire Monitor detects pressure loss in a 
tire by comparing the rotating speeds of the 
individual tires while moving. 

In the event of pressure loss, the rolling circum¬ 
ference changes and, thus, the rotating speed 
of the affected wheel. This change is detected 
and is reported as a flat tire. 

Functional requirement 

In order to assure the reliable reporting of a flat 
tire, the system must be initialized for the cor¬ 
rect tire inflation pressure. 

TT1 The system must be reinitialized each 
time a tire inflation pressure has been cor¬ 
rected or a wheel or tire has been changed.◄ 

System limitations 

The Flat Tire Monitor is unable to warn 
the driver of sudden, severe tire damage 
caused by external factors, nor can it identify 
the gradual loss of pressure that will inevitably 
occur in all four tires over a lengthy period 
of time.4 

In the following situations, the system could be 
delayed or malfunction: 

> System has not been initialized 

> Driving on snowy or slippery road surface 

t> Performance-oriented style of driving: slip 
in the drive wheels, high lateral acceleration 

t> Snow chains are attached 



Initializing the system 

“I The initialization is completed during driv¬ 
ing, which can be interrupted at any time. 
When driving resumes, the initialization is con¬ 
tinued automatically. 

Do not initialize the system while snow chains 
are attached.◄ 


Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 


1. "Vehicle Info" 

2. "Vehicle status" 

3. "Reset" 



4. Start the engine - do not drive away. 

5. Start the initialization using "Reset". 

6. Start to drive. 

The initialization is completed during the trip. 

The initialization is completed during driving, 
which can be interrupted at any time. 

When driving resumes, the initialization is con¬ 
tinued automatically. 


Indication of a flat tire 

(JJ The warning lamps come on in yellow 
and red. A message appears on the 
Control Display. In addition, an 
acoustic signal sounds. There is a flat 

tire or substantial loss of tire pressure. 

1. Cautiously reduce speed to below 50 mph 
or 80 km/h. Avoid sudden braking and 
steering maneuvers. Do not exceed a speed 
of 50 mph or 80 km/h. 

If the car is not equipped with run-flat 
tires, refer to page 199, the standard 
equipment by design, do not continue driv¬ 
ing. Otherwise, a severe accident could 
result if you continue driving.◄ 

2. At the next opportunity, check the air pres¬ 
sure in all four tires. 

TT1 If all four tires are inflated to the cor¬ 
rect pressures, the Flat Tire Monitor 
might not have been initialized. The system 
must then be initialized.◄ 




81 

2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 


Controls 























Technology for driving comfort and safety 


3. In the event of complete tire pressure loss, 
0 psi/0 kPa, you can estimate the possible 
distance for continued driving on the basis 
of the following guidelines: 

> With a light load: 

1 person without luggage: 
approx. 155 miles/250 km 

> With a medium load: 

1 person, cargo area full, or 2 people 
without luggage: 

approx. 90 miles/150 km 

> With a full load: 

2 people, cargo area full: 
approx. 30 miles/50 km 

Drive cautiously and do not exceed a 
speed of 50 mph or 80 km/h; otherwise, 
there is a risk of an accident. In the event of 
pressure loss, vehicle handling changes. This 
includes reduced tracking stability in braking, 
extended braking distance and altered natural 
steering characteristics. 

If unusual vibration or loud noises occur during 
the journey, this may be an indication that the 
damaged tire has finally failed. Reduce your 
speed and pull over as soon as possible at a 
suitable location. Otherwise, parts of the tire 
could come loose, resulting in an accident. Do 
not continue driving. Instead, contact your 
BMW center. ◄ 

Status display 

1. "Vehicle Info" 

2. "Vehicle status" 

3. "Flat Tire Monitor" 



The status is displayed. 


Tire Pressure Monitor TPM* 

The concept 

TPM checks the inflation pressures of the four 
mounted tires. The system notifies you if there 
is a significant loss of pressure in one or more 
tires. 

Functional requirement 

In order to assure the reliable reporting of a flat 
tire, the system must be reset while all tire infla¬ 
tion pressures are correct. 

Always use wheels with TPM electronics. Oth¬ 
erwise, the system may malfunction. 

Each time a tire inflation pressure has 
been corrected or a wheel or tire has been 
changed, reset the system. ◄ 

System limitations 

TPM cannot warn you in advance of sud¬ 
den severe tire damage caused by out¬ 
side influences.◄ 

The system does not work correctly if it has not 
been reset; for example, a flat tire may be indi¬ 
cated even though the tire inflation pressures 
are correct. 

The system is inactive and cannot indicate a flat 
tire if a wheel without TPM electronics, such as 
a compact spare wheel, has been mounted, or if 
TPM is temporarily malfunctioning due to other 
systems or devices using the same radio fre¬ 
quency. 

Status indicator on the Control Display 

The color of the tires represents the status of 
the tires and the system. 

TPM takes into account that tire pressures 
change while the vehicle is being driven. The 
tire pressures do not need to be corrected 
unless the TPM instructs you to do so by means 
of color indicators. 




82 

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 







Green 

The tire inflation pressure corresponds to the 
established target value. 

"TPM active" appears on the Control Display. 

One wheel yellow 

There is a flat tire or substantial loss of tire pres¬ 
sure in the indicated tire. A message appears on 
the Control Display. 

All wheels yellow 

There is a flat tire or substantial loss of tire pres¬ 
sure in several tires. A message appears on the 
Control Display. 

Gray 

The system cannot detect a puncture. 

Possible reasons for this: 


5. Start the engine, but do not start driving. 

6. Start the initialization using "Reset TPM". 

7. Start to drive. 

The tires are shown in gray and "Resetting 
TPM..." is displayed. 

After driving a few minutes, the set inflation 
pressures in the tires are accepted as the target 
values to be monitored. The system reset is 
completed during your drive, and can be inter¬ 
rupted at any time. When driving resumes, the 
reset is continued automatically. On the Control 
Display, the tires are shown in green and "TPM 
active" is displayed again. 

If a flat tire is detected while the system is 
resetting and determining the inflation 
pressures, all tires on the Control Display are 
displayed in yellow. The message "Low tire!" is 
shown.◄ 


> TPM is being reset 

> Temporary malfunction caused by systems 
or devices using the same radio frequency 

> Malfunction 


Resetting the system 

Each time a tire inflation pressure has 
been corrected or a wheel or tire has been 
jed, reset the system.◄ 

1. MENU Press the button 
The start menu is opened. 

2. "Vehicle Info" 

3. "Vehicle status" 

4. "Reset TPM" 


C> 


char 



Message for low tire inflation pressure 

(J_) The warning lamps come on in yellow 
nm and red. A message appears on the 
tow Control Display. In addition, a signal 
sounds. There is a flat tire or substan¬ 
tial loss of tire pressure. 

1. Cautiously reduce speed to below 50 mph/ 
80 km/h. Avoid sudden braking and steer¬ 
ing maneuvers. Do not exceed a speed of 
50 mph/80 km/h. 

□ If the car is not equipped with run-flat 
tires, refer to page 199, the standard 
equipment by design, do not continue driv¬ 
ing. Otherwise, a severe accident could 
result after a tire puncture if you continue 
driving.◄ 

2. In the event of complete pressure loss, 

0 psi/0 kPa, you can estimate the possible 
distance for continued driving on the basis 
of the following guidelines: 

> With a light load: 

1 person without luggage: 
approx. 155 miles/250 km 


83 

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 


Controls 














Technology for driving comfort and safety 


> With a medium load: 

1 person, cargo area full, or 2 people 
without luggage: 
approx. 95 miles/150 km 

> With a full load: 

2 people, cargo area full: 
approx. 30 miles/50 km 

Drive cautiously and do not exceed a 
speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. In the event of 
pressure loss, vehicle handling changes. This 
includes reduced tracking stability in braking, 
extended braking distance and altered natural 
steering characteristics. 

If unusual vibration or loud noises occur during 
the journey, this may be an indication that the 
damaged tire has finally failed. Reduce your 
speed and pull over as soon as possible at a 
suitable location. Otherwise, parts of the tire 
could come loose, resulting in an accident. Do 
not continue driving. Instead, contact your 
BMW center. ◄ 

Message for unsuccessful system 
reset 

The warning lamp lights up yellow. A 
message will appear on the Control 
Display. The system was not reset 
after a tire was changed, for example. 

Check the tire inflation pressure and reset the 
system, refer to page 83. 

Status display 

1 . MENU Press the button 
The start menu is opened. 

2. "Vehicle Info" 

3. "Vehicle status" 

4. "TPM" 

5. The status is displayed. 

Malfunction 

{[) The small warning lamp flashes in 
yellow and then lights up continu¬ 
ously; the larger warning lamp comes 
on in yellow. On the Control Display, 
the tires are shown in gray and a message 
appears. No punctures can be detected. 


This type of message is shown in the following 
situations: 

> If there is a malfunction 
Have the system checked. 

> If a wheel without TPM electronics has 
been mounted 

> If TPM is temporarily malfunctioning due to 
other systems or devices using the same 
radio frequency. 

Declaration according to NHTSA/ 
FMVSS138 

Tire Pressure Monitoring Systems 

Each tire should be checked monthly when cold 
and inflated to the inflation pressure recom¬ 
mended by the vehicle manufacturer on the 
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. If 
your vehicle has tires of a different size than the 
size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire infla¬ 
tion pressure label, you should determine the 
proper tire inflation pressure for those tires. As 
an added safety feature, your vehicle has been 
equipped with a tire pressure monitoring sys¬ 
tem, TPMS, that illuminates a low tire pressure 
telltale when one or more of your tires are signif¬ 
icantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the 
low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should 
stop and check your tires as soon as possible, 
and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving 
on a significantly underinflated tire causes the 
tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. 
Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency and 
tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s han¬ 
dling and stopping ability. Please note that the 
TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte¬ 
nance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to 
maintain correct tire pressure, even if underin¬ 
flation has not reached the level at which the 
TPMS low tire pressure telltale illuminates. 

The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined 
with the low tire pressure telltale. When the sys¬ 
tem detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash 
for approximately one minute and then remain 
continuously lit. This sequence will continue 
upon subsequent vehicle startups as long as 
the malfunction exists. When the malfunction 
indicator is illuminated, the system may not be 





84 

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 




able to detect or signal low tire pressure as 
intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a 
variety of reasons, including the installation of 
replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the 
vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning 
properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction 
telltale after replacing one or more tires or 
wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the 
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow 
the TPMS to continue to function properly. 

Servotronic* 

The concept 

The Servotronic varies the steering force 
required to turn the wheels depending on the 
speed at which you are driving. When you are 
driving at low speeds, power steering provides 
more support, i.e. little effort is needed to turn 
the wheels. Power steering support lessens as 
your speed increases. 

The system works automatically. 

Malfunction 

Malfunctions are displayed via Check Control. 


Dynamic brake lamps* 



On the left: normal braking. 

On the right: sharp braking. 

During sharp braking, the brake lamps and the 
dynamic brake lamps of your BMW light up. 

The dynamic brake lamps are automatically 
activated if the turn signal is not flashing. 


Airbags 



The following airbags are located under the 
marked covers: 

1 Front airbags 

2 Side airbags in the seat backrests 

3 Knee airbag 

Protective action 

Observe the adjustment instructions on 
page 41 to ensure the best possible per¬ 
sonal protection.◄ 

The front airbags help protect the driver and 
passenger by responding to frontal impacts in 
which safety belts alone cannot provide ade¬ 
quate restraint. When needed, the side airbags 
help provide protection in the event of a side 
impact. The relevant side airbag supports the 
head and the side upper body area. 

The airbags have been designed to not be trig¬ 
gered in every collision situation, e.g., not in 
minor accidents or rear-end collisions. 

Do not apply adhesive materials to the 
cover panels of the airbags, cover them or 
modify them in any other way. 

Keep the dashboard and window on the pas¬ 
senger side clear, i.e., do not cover with adhe¬ 
sive labels or coverings, and do not attach hold¬ 
ers such as for navigation instruments and 
mobile phones. 

Do not attach seat covers, cushions or other 
objects to the front seats that are not specifi¬ 
cally approved for seats with integral side air¬ 
bags. Do not hang items of clothing such as 
coats or jackets over the backrests. 

Do not attempt to remove the airbag retention 
system from the vehicle. Do not modify the indi- 




85 

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 


Controls 














Technology for driving comfort and safety 


vidual components of the system or its wiring in 
anyway. This includes the upholstered covers 
of the steering wheel, the dashboard and the 
seats. Do not attempt to remove or dismantle 
the steering wheel. 

Do not touch the individual components imme¬ 
diately after the system has been triggered, 
because there is a danger of burns. 

In the event of malfunctions, deactivation or 
triggering of the airbag restraint system, have 
the testing, repair, removal and disposal of air¬ 
bag generators executed only by a BMW center 
or a workshop that works according to repair 
procedures of BMW with correspondingly 
trained personnel and that has the required 
explosives licenses. Unprofessional attempts to 
work on the system could lead to failure in an 
emergency or to undesired airbag activation, 
either of which could result in personal injury. ◄ 

Warning notices and information about the air¬ 
bags can also be found on the sun visors. 

Automatic deactivation of the 
passenger airbags 

The system determines whether the passenger 
seat is occupied by measuring the resistance of 
the human body. Front, knee and side airbags 
on the passenger side are activated or deacti¬ 
vated accordingly. 

Make sure that the passenger keeps his 
or her feet in the footwell; otherwise, the 
passenger airbags may not function properly. ◄ 

The indicator lamp above the interior rearview 
mirror shows the current status of the passen¬ 
ger airbags, deactivated or activated, refer to 
Status of passenger airbags below. 

Before transporting a child on the front 
passenger seat, read the safety precau¬ 
tions and handling instructions under Trans¬ 
porting children safely, see page 48. 


Malfunction of the automatic 
deactivation system 

The front, knee and side airbags can also be 
deactivated by adolescents and adults sitting in 
certain positions; the indicator lamp for the pas¬ 
senger airbags comes on. In such cases, the 
passenger should change his or her sitting 
position so that the passenger airbags are acti¬ 
vated and the indicator lamp goes out. If the 
desired airbag status cannot be achieved by 
changing the sitting position, do not transport 
the passenger in the vehicle. 

To make sure that occupation of the seat cush¬ 
ion can be detected correctly: 

> Do not attach seat covers, seat cushion 
padding, ball mats or other items to the pas¬ 
senger seat unless they are specifically rec¬ 
ommended by BMW. 

> Do not place any items under the seat which 
could press against the seat from below.◄ 

Status of passenger airbags 


The indicator lamp for the passenger airbags 
shows the functional status of the passenger's 
front, knee and side airbags in accordance with 
whether and how the passenger seat is occu¬ 
pied. The indicator lamp shows whether the 
passenger airbags are activated or deactivated. 
> The indicator lamp lights up when a child 
who is properly seated in a child restraint 
system intended for that purpose is 
detected on the seat or the seat is empty. 
The front, knee and side airbags for the pas¬ 
senger are not activated. 






86 


Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 












Most child seats are detected by the sys¬ 
tem, especially child seats required by the 
NHTSA at the time of vehicle production. 
After mounting a child seat, ensure that the 
indicator lamp for the passenger airbag is lit. 
It indicates that the child seat has been 
detected and that the passenger airbags 
are deactivated. 

> The indicator lamp does not come on when, 
for example, a person of sufficient size and 
in a correct sitting position is detected on 
the seat. 

The front, knee and passenger airbags for 
the passenger are activated. 


Operational readiness of airbag system 



Airbag system malfunction 

> Warning lamp does not light up at radio 
readiness or beyond. 

> Warning lamp remains permanently on. 

In the event of a fault in the airbag system, 
have it checked without delay; otherwise, 
there is the risk that the system will not function 
as intended even if a sufficiently severe acci¬ 
dent occurs.◄ 



As of radio readiness, refer to page 50, the 
warning lamp comes on briefly to indicate that 
the entire airbag system and the belt tensioners 
are operational. 


87 

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 


Controls 











Lamps 


Lamps 


Parking lamps/low beams 




0 Lamps off, 

daytime running lights 

1 Parking lamps and daytime running lights 

2 Low-beam headlamps and welcome lamps 

3 Automatic headlamp control*, daytime run¬ 
ning lights, welcome lamps, high-beam 
assistant* and adaptive light control* 

When you open the driver's door with the igni¬ 
tion switched off, the exterior lighting is auto¬ 
matically switched off if the light switch is in 
position 0, 2 or 3. 

Switch on the parking lamps if necessary, 
switch position 1. 

Parking lamps 

In switch position 1, the front, rear and side 
vehicle lighting is switched on. You can use the 
parking lamps for parking. 

The parking lamps will discharge the bat¬ 
tery. Therefore, do not leave them on for 
unduly long periods of time; otherwise, the bat¬ 
tery might not have enough power to start the 
engine. It is preferable to switch on the left- 
hand or right-hand roadside parking lamps, 
refer to page 90.4 




Low beams 

The low beams light up when the light switch is 
in position 2 and the ignition is on. 

Automatic headlamp control* 

When the switch is in position 3, the low beams 
are switched on and off automatically depend¬ 
ing on ambient light conditions, e.g., in a tunnel, 
in twilight, or if there is precipitation. The adap¬ 
tive light control* is active. The LED next to the 
symbol is illuminated when the low beams are 
on. You can also activate the daytime running 
lights, refer to page 89. In the situations 
described above, the lamps then automatically 
switch from daytime running lights to low 
beams. 

The headlamps may also come on when the 
sun is sitting low on a blue sky. 

□ The automatic headlamp control cannot 
serve as a substitute for your personal 
judgment in determining when the lamps 
should be switched on in response to ambient 
lighting conditions. For example, the system 
cannot detect fog or hazy weather. To avoid 
safety risks, you should always switch on the 
low-beam headlamps manually under these 
conditions.◄ 

Welcome lamps 

If you leave the light switch in position 2 or 3 
when you park the car, the parking lamps and 
the interior lamps light up briefly when you 
unlock the vehicle. 


88 


Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 







Activating/deactivating welcome 
lamps 


1. "Settings" 

2. "Lighting" 

3. "Welcome light" 

l\ \ G? Ui^hiiriq 


Pathwav Mghw o s \ 


□ Triple turn ilgpigi 

1 

—v k U Daylim£ nmrunrj Ifimp* 

1 

i - * . cy welcome light 


1/ f j 

mj / / 

/ 


CY Welcome lamps are activated and are 
stored for the remote control currently in use. 


Pathway lighting 

If you activate the headlamp flasher after 
parking the car, with the lights switched off, 
the low beams come on and remain on for a 
certain time. 

You can adjust the operating period or deacti¬ 
vate the function. 

1. "Settings" 

2. "Lighting" 

3. "Pathway light.:" 

4. Set or deactivate the duration. 


l @ Lkfhunq \ 

ir i f i ^ , 

jfi 1 Parhway Ughw \ 

1 ) □ Triple Uimilgnai 

i l 

n Daytime winning lamp* 

* 

1 r 

■ # □ Welcome light 


III ll 

I 1 
/ 


The setting is stored for the remote control cur¬ 
rently in use. 


Daytime running lights 

The daytime running lights light up in switch 
position 0,1 and 3. They are less powerful than 
the low beams. 


Activating/deactivating the daytime 

running lights 

1. "Settings" 

2. "Lighting" 

3. "Daytime running lamps" 



R/' Daytime running lights are activated and 
are stored for the remote control currently 
in use. 


Adaptive light control* 

The concept 

Adaptive light control is a variable headlamp 
control system that enables better illumination 
of the road surface. Depending on the steering 
angle and other parameters, the light from the 
headlamp follows the course of the road. 

Activating adaptive light control 

With the ignition switched on, turn the light 
switch to position 3, refer to page 88. 

Standstill function*: To avoid blinding oncom¬ 
ing traffic, adaptive light control directs light 
towards the passenger side when the vehicle is 
at a standstill. 

Malfunction 

A message appears on the Control Display. 
Adaptive light control is malfunctioning or has 
failed. Have the system checked as soon as 
possible. 


89 

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 


| | ||| Controls j 















Lamps 


High beams/roadside parking 
lamps 



1 High beams 

2 Headlamp flasher 

3 Roadside parking lamps* 


Roadside parking lamps, left or right* 

There is an additional option of switching on the 
lamps on the side of the car facing the road 
when parked. 

Switching on 

After parking the vehicle, press the lever up or 
down beyond the pressure point for a longer 
period, arrow 3. 

The roadside parking lamps drain the bat¬ 
tery. Therefore, do not leave them on for 
unduly long periods of time; otherwise, the bat¬ 
tery might not have enough power to start the 
engine.◄ 

Switching off 

Press the lever in the opposite direction to the 
pressure point, arrow 3. 

High-Beam Assistant* 

The concept 

This system automatically switches the high 
beams on and off. The procedure is controlled 
by a sensor on the front of the interior rearview 
mirror. The assistant ensures that the high 
beams are switched on whenever the traffic sit¬ 


uation allows. It handles this task for you and 
gives you the benefit of the best possible view. 
You can intervene at any time and switch the 
high beams on and off as usual. 

Activating the system 

1. Turn the light switch to position 3, refer 
to page 88. 

2. With the low beams switched on, briefly 
push the turn indicator lever in the direction 
of the high beam. 

The indicator lamp in the instrument 
cluster lights up when the high beams 
are activated. The system automati¬ 
cally switches from high beams to low beams 
and vice versa in response to oncoming traffic, 
traffic ahead of you, and adequate ambient 
lighting, e.g., on city streets. 

Switching the high beams on and off 
manually 

Whenever you wish, or when the situation 
requires, you can intervene: 

> If the high-beam assistant switches on the 
high beams, but you would like to drive with 
the low beams, simply switch off the high 
beams using the turn indicator lever. This 
deactivates the high-beam assistant. 

To reactivate the system, briefly push the 
turn indicator lever toward the high beams 
again. 

> If the high-beam assistant switches on the 
low beams, but you would like to drive with 
the high beams, switch on the high beams 
as usual. This deactivates the system and 
the high beams need to be switched off 
manually, if necessary. 

To reactivate the system, briefly push the 
turn indicator lever toward the high beams 
again. 

> Use the headlamp flasher as usual with the 
low beams switched on. 



90 

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 











System limitations 

□ The high-beam assistant cannot serve as 
a substitute for the driver's personal judg¬ 
ment of when to use the high beams. Therefore, 
manually switch off the high beams in situations 
where this is required to avoid a safety risk.4 

The system is not fully functional in situations 
such as the following, and driver intervention 
may be necessary: 

> In very unfavorable weather conditions, 
such as fog or heavy precipitation 

> In detecting poorly-lit road users, such as 
pedestrians, cyclists, horseback riders and 
wagons; when driving close to train or ship 
traffic; and at animal crossings 

> In tight curves, on hilltops or in depressions, 
in cross traffic or half-obscured oncoming 
traffic on highways 

> In poorly lit towns and cities and in the pres¬ 
ence of highly reflective signs 

> At low speeds 

> When the windshield in front of the interior 
rearview mirror is fogged over, dirty or cov¬ 
ered with stickers, etc. 

> If the sensor is dirty. Clean the sensor on 
the front of the interior rearview mirror using 
a cloth moistened with a small amount of 
glass cleaner. 


Switching off via iDrive 

1. "Settings" 

2. "Lighting" 

3. "High beam assistant" 



The high-beam assistant is activated and 
is stored for the remote control currently in use. 


Instrument lighting 


You can adjust the brightness of the instrument 
lighting only when the parking lamps or the low 
beams are switched on. 



1. Push button 1 up or down repeatedly until 
the appropriate symbol appears in the dis¬ 
play, accompanied by the brightness set¬ 
ting and scale the word "SET". 


2. Press button 2. 



3. Push button 1 up or down to select the 
desired brightness level. 

4. Press button 2. 

The display again shows the outside tem¬ 
perature and the time. 


91 

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 


Controls 















Lamps 


Reading lamps 


Interior lamps 

The interior lamps, footwell lamps*, entry 
lamps*, cargo area lamp and courtesy lamps* 
are controlled automatically. 

The LEDs for the courtesy lamps are set in the 
door handles and illuminate the ground in front 
of the doors. 

To avoid draining the battery, all lamps 
inside the car are switched off about 
8 minutes after the ignition is switched off, refer 
to Start/stop button on page 50. ◄ 


Switching interior lamps on/off 
manually 



Interior lighting*: 

To switch on and off, press the button. 

To switch off the interior lamps, footwell 
lamps*, entry lamps* and courtesy lamps* per¬ 
manently, press the button for the front interior 
lamps for about 3 seconds. 



The reading lamps are located next to the 
interior lamps. To switch on and off, press the 
button. 


92 


Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 
































Climate 



Equipment versions 

Depending on the equipment version, your car 
has an air conditioner or an automatic climate 
control system. 

1 Air conditioner 94 

2 Automatic climate control* 96 


Air vents 

3 Air flow directed toward the windshield and 
side windows 

4 Air to the upper body area. 

The thumbwheels open and close the air 
supply continuously. The levers alter the 
direction of the air flow. For further details 
on draft-free ventilation refer to page 98. 

5 Air in the knee area, footwell 


93 

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 


Controls 























Climate 


Air conditioning system 



1 Air distribution 

2 Recirculated-air mode 

3 Cooling function 


4 Temperature 

5 Air flow rate 

6 Rear window defroster 


Air distribution 


Airflow rate 


Direct the flow of air to the win¬ 
dows W, to the upper body area 
V ortothekneeareaandfootwell 
_W V . Intermediate settings are pos¬ 
sible. In the 6 o'clock position, a small amount 
of air is also directed towards the windows in 
order to keep them from fogging over. 




will be. 


Press the corresponding button. 
The higher the rate, the more 
effective the heating or cooling 


The air flow rate may be reduced or the blower 
may be switched off entirely to save on battery 
power. 


Recirculated-air mode 

If the air outside the car has an 
unpleasant odor or contains pollut¬ 
ants, shut off the supply to the interior of the car 
temporarily. The system then recirculates the 
air currently within the vehicle. 

You can also activate/deactivate the recircu¬ 
lated-air mode by means of a button* on the 
steering wheel, refer to page 11 . 

□ If condensation starts to form on the 

inside window surfaces during operation 
in the recirculated-air mode, you should switch 
it off while also increasing the air flow rate as 
required. 

The recirculated-air mode should not be used 
continuously for lengthy periods; otherwise, the 
quality of the air inside the car will gradually 
deteriorate. ◄ 


Switching the system on/off 

With the blower at its lowest set¬ 
ting, press the left side of the but¬ 
ton. The blower and air conditioner 
are completely switched off and the air supply is 
cut off. 

To switch on the air conditioner, set the desired 
air flow rate. 



Switching cooling function on/off 

The cooling function cools and 
dehumidifies the incoming air 
before reheating it as required, according to the 
temperature setting. This function is only avail¬ 
able while the engine is running. 


The cooling function helps prevent condensa¬ 
tion on the windows or removes it quickly. 


Depending on the weather, the windshield may 
fog over briefly when the engine is started. 


94 

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 



Rear window defroster 


Ventilation 


The defroster switches off auto¬ 
matically after a certain time or 
when the hardtop is opened. 


Temperature 

® To increase the temperature, turn 
the rotary switch clockwise 
towards red. 

For a lower temperature, turn the 
rotary switch counterclockwise towards blue. 


Defrosting windows and removing 
condensation 



6 5 

_ _■£ 


1. Air distribution 1 in position W. 

2. Deactivate recirculated-air mode 2. 

3. Switch on cooling function 3. 

4. T emperature 4 to the right, red. 

5. Set the air flow rate 5 to the maximum level. 

6. Switch on rear window defroster 6 to 
defrost the rear window ffl. 



1 Use the lever to change the direction of the 
airflow 

2 Use the thumbwheels to smoothly open 
and close the air vents 

Ventilation for cooling 

Adjust the vent outlets to direct the flow of cool 
air in your direction, for instance if it has become 
too hot in the car. 

Draft-free ventilation 

Set the vent outlets so that the air flows past 
you and not straight at you. 

Microfilter 

The microfilter removes dust and pollen from 
the incoming air. The microfilter is changed by 
your BMW center during routine mainte¬ 
nance work. 


95 

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 


Controls 


















Climate 


Automatic climate control* 



1 Temperature, left side of passenger com¬ 
partment 

2 Maximum cooling 

3 Rear window defroster 

4 Defrosting windows and removing conden¬ 
sation 

5 Automatic recirculated-air control AUC/ 
recirculated-air mode 


6 Air distribution, manual 

7 AUTO program 

8 Air flow rate, manual, climate level 

9 Temperature, right side of passenger com¬ 
partment 

10 Switching cooling function on/off manually 


Comfortable interior climate 

AUTO program 7 offers the ideal air distribution 
and air flow rate for almost all conditions, refer 
to AUTO program below. All you need to do is 
select an interior temperature which is comfort¬ 
able for you. 

The following sections inform you in detail 
about how to adjust the settings. 

Most settings are stored for the remote control 
currently in use, refer also to Personal Profile 
settings on page 28. 

Air distribution, manual 

Depending on the selected setting, the air is 
directed to the windshield, to the upper body 
area, to the knee area and into the footwell. 


Adjusting air distribution manually 

Press the button repeatedly until 
the air distribution is set as 
required. The corresponding LED lights up. 


The manual air distribution is also switched on 
when the AUTO program is deactivated. 


Temperature 

Set the desired temperatures indi¬ 
vidually for the driver's and pas¬ 
senger sides. 

The automatic climate control 
achieves this temperature as quickly as possi¬ 
ble regardless of the season, using maximum 
cooling or heating power if necessary, and then 
maintains it. 



To give the automatic climate control 
enough time to achieve the set tempera¬ 
ture, do not switch between different tempera¬ 
ture settings in quick succession.◄ 

You can achieve maximum heating power with 
the highest setting, regardless of the outside 
temperature. 

The lowest setting effects continuous cooling. 


96 

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 







Switching the cooling function on 
and off 


The cooling function cools and 
dehumidifies the incoming air 
before reheating it as required, 
according to the temperature set¬ 
ting. This function is only available while the 
engine is running. 



The cooling function helps prevent condensa¬ 
tion on the windows or removes it quickly. 

Depending on the weather, the windshield may 
fog over briefly when the engine is started. 

The cooling function is automatically switched 
on along with the AUTO program. 


Maximum cooling 



Maximum cooling is achieved most 
quickly at outside temperatures 
above 32 °F 10 °C and when the 
engine is running. 


The automatic climate control goes into recir- 
culated-air mode at the lowest temperature. Air 
flows at maximum rate from the vents for the 
upper body area. You should therefore open the 
vents for maximum cooling. 


AUTO program 

The AUTO program automatically adjusts the 
air distribution to the windshield and side win¬ 
dows, towards the upper body area, and into the 
footwell and knee area. 

The air flow rate and air distribution, in addition 
to your temperature specifications, will be 
adapted to outside influences as a result of sea¬ 
sonal changes, e.g., sunlight or window con¬ 
densation. 

The cooling is switched on automatically with 
the AUTO program. 


Switching on/off 


Press the button. 


AUTO program climate level 

The climate levels can be used to vary the inten¬ 
sity when the AUTO program is switched on. 
For example, air flow is adjusted automatically 
to optimize climate control. 

When the AUTO program is 
switched on, you can select the cli¬ 
mate level of the AUTO program 
using the buttons for controlling the manual air 
flow rate. 

The selected climate level is displayed by 
an LED. 

Convertible program 

When the hardtop is open, the convertible pro¬ 
gram is activated as well. In the convertible pro¬ 
gram, the automatic climate control is opti¬ 
mized for driving with the hardtop open. In 
addition, the air flow rate is increased as vehicle 
speed increases. 

The effectiveness of the convertible pro¬ 
gram can be enhanced considerably by 
installing the wind deflector. ◄ 

Adjusting air flow rate manually 

Press the left side of the button to 
reduce air flow. Press the right side 
of the button to increase it. 

The air flow rate may be reduced to save battery 
power. The display remains the same. 

Switching the system on/off 

With the blower at its lowest setting, press the 
left side of the button to switch off the auto¬ 
matic climate control. All displays are cleared 
except for the rear window defroster if it is 
switched on. 

Press any button except the rear window 
defroster to reactivate the automatic climate 
control. 




Manual air distribution and air flow rate are acti¬ 
vated when the AUTO program is deactivated. 


97 

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 




J | | ! Controls 










Climate 


Residual heat 

The heat stored in the engine is used to heat the 
interior. 

This function can be switched on 
using the right button under the 
following conditions: 

> Up to 15 minutes after the engine has been 
switched off 

> While the engine is at operating tem¬ 
perature 

> As long as battery voltage is sufficient 

> At an outside temperature below 77 °F/ 

25 °C 

The middle LED is lit when the function is on. 



Automatic recirculated-air control 
AUC/recirculated-air mode 



Switch on the desired operating 
mode by pressing this button 
repeatedly: 


> LED off: outside air flows in continuously. 

> Left-hand LED on, AUC mode: a sensor 
detects pollutants in the outside air. If nec¬ 
essary, the system blocks the supply of out¬ 
side air and recirculates the inside air. As 
soon as the concentration of pollutants in 
the outside air has decreased sufficiently, 
the system automatically switches back to 
outside air supply. 

> Right-hand LED on, recirculated-air mode: 
the supply of outside air is permanently 
shut off. The system then recirculates the 
air currently within the vehicle. 


□ If condensation starts to form on the 

inside window surfaces during operation 
in the recirculated-air mode, you should switch 
it off while also increasing the air flow rate as 
required. 

The recirculated-air mode should not be used 
over an extended period of time; otherwise, the 
air quality inside the car will deteriorate contin- 
uously.4 


Defrosting windows and removing 
condensation 


Quickly removes ice and conden¬ 
sation from the windshield and 
front side windows. 

Switch on the cooling function as well. 


Rear window defroster 


The defroster switches off auto¬ 
matically after a certain time or 
when the hardtop is opened. 


Ventilation 



1 Lever for changing the direction of the 
airflow. 

2 Thumbwheels for opening and closing the 
air vents. 

3 Thumbwheel for adjusting the amount of 
cool air from the vents to the upper body 
area. In this way you can optimize the air 
temperature for the upper body area. 


Ventilation for cooling 

Adjust the vent outlets to direct the flow of cool 
air in your direction, for instance if it has become 
too hot in the car. 


Draft-free ventilation 

Set the vent outlets so that the air flows past 
you and not straight at you. 

Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter 

The microfilter traps dust and pollen in the 
incoming air. The activated-charcoal filter pro¬ 
vides additional protection by filtering gaseous 
pollutants from the outside air. Your BMW cen¬ 
ter replaces this combined filter during routine 
maintenance. 


98 

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 









99 

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 


Controls 



Practical interior accessories 


Practical interior accessories 


Integrated universal remote 
control* 


The concept 

The integrated universal remote control can 
replace as many as three hand-held transmit¬ 
ters for various remote-controlled devices, 
such as garage doors and gates or lighting sys¬ 
tems. The integrated universal remote control 
registers and stores signals from the original 
hand-held transmitters. 

The signal of an original hand-held transmitter 
can be programmed on one of the three mem¬ 
ory buttons 1. After this, the programmed 
memory button 1 will operate the system in 
question. The LED 2 flashes to confirm trans¬ 
mission of the signal. 

Should you sell your vehicle one day, be sure to 
delete the stored programs beforehand for your 
safety, refer to page 101. 

□ To prevent possible damage or injury, 
before programming or using the inte¬ 
grated universal remote control, always inspect 
the immediate area to make certain that no peo¬ 
ple, animals or objects are within the pivoting or 
travel range of the device being operated. Com¬ 
ply also with the safety instructions supplied 
with the original hand-held transmitter. ◄ 


Checking compatibility 

If this symbol appears on the package 
or in the instructions supplied with the 
original hand-held transmitter, you can 
assume that the radio remote control device will 
be compatible with the integrated universal 
remote control. 



For additional information, please contact your 
BMW center or call: 1 -800-355-3515. 

You can also obtain information on the 
Internet at: 

www.bmwusa.com or 
www.homelink.com. 

HomeLink is a registered trademark of Johnson 
Controls, Inc.^ 


Programming 



1 Memory buttons 

2 LED 


Fixed-code hand-held transmitters 


1. Switch on the ignition, refer to page 50. 

2. When starting operation for the first time: 
press the left and right memory buttons 1 
for approx. 20 seconds until the LED 2 
flashes rapidly. The three memory buttons 
are cleared. 


3. Hold the original hand-held transmitter at a 
distance of approx. 4 to 12 in/10 to 30 cm 
from the memory buttons 1. 


D> 


The required distance between the 
hand-held transmitter and the mem¬ 
ory buttons 1 depends on the system of 
the respective original hand-held transmit¬ 
ter used.4 


100 


Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 
























4. Simultaneously press the transmit key on 
the original hand-held transmitter and the 
desired memory button 1 on the integrated 
universal remote control. The LED 2 flashes 
slowly at first. As soon as the LED 2 flashes 
rapidly, release both buttons. If the LED 2 
does not flash rapidly after approx. 

15 seconds, alter the distance and repeat 
this step. 

5. To program other original hand-held trans¬ 
mitters, repeat steps 3 and 4. 

The corresponding memory button 1 is now 
programmed with the signal of the original 
hand-held transmitter. 

You can operate the device while the ignition is 
switched on. 


D> 


If the device fails to function even after 
repeated programming, check whether 
the original hand-held transmitter uses an alter¬ 
nating-code system. To do so, either read the 
instructions for the original hand-held transmit¬ 
ter or hold down the programmed memory 
button 1 of the integrated universal remote 
control. If the LED 2 on the integrated universal 
remote control flashes rapidly and then remains 
lit for about two seconds, the original hand-held 
transmitter uses an alternating-code system. If 
it uses an alternating-code system, program 
the memory buttons 1 as described under 
Alternating-code hand-held transmitters.◄ 


Alternating-code hand-held 
transmitters 


To program the integrated universal remote 
control, consult the operating instructions for 
the device to be set. You will find information 
there on the possibilities for synchronization. 
When programming hand-held transmitters 
that employ an alternating code, please observe 
the following supplementary instructions: 



Programming will be easier with the aid of 
a second person.◄ 


Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 


1. Park your vehicle within the range of the 
remote-controlled device. 

2. Program the integrated universal remote 
control as described above in the section 
Fixed-code hand-held transmitters. 

3. Locate the button on the receiver of the 
device to be set, e.g., on the drive unit. 

4. Press the button on the receiver of the 
device to be set. After step 4, you have 
approx. 30 seconds for step 5. 

5. Press the programmed memory button 1 of 
the integrated universal remote control 
three times. 

The corresponding memory button 1 is now 
programmed with the signal of the original 
hand-held transmitter. 

If you have any questions, please contact 
your BMW center.◄ 

Deleting all stored programs 

Press the left and right memory buttons 1 for 
approx. 20 seconds until the LED 2 flashes rap¬ 
idly: all stored programs are deleted. 

Reassigning individual programs 

1. Hold the original hand-held transmitter at a 
distance of approx. 4 to 12 in/10 to 30 cm 
from the memory buttons 1. 

The required distance between the 
hand-held transmitter and the mem¬ 
ory buttons 1 depends on the system of 
the respective original hand-held transmit¬ 
ter used.^ 

2. Press the desired memory button 1 of the 
integrated universal remote control. 

3. If the LED 2 flashes slowly after approx. 

20 seconds, press the transmit key of the 
original hand-held transmitter. Release 
both buttons as soon as the LED 2 flashes 
rapidly. If the LED 2 does not flash rapidly 
after approx. 15 seconds, alter the distance 
and repeat this step. 


101 

2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 


Controls 




















Practical interior accessories 


Digital compass* 



1 Adjustment button 

2 Display 

The display shows you the main or secondary 
compass direction in which you are driving. 

Operating principle 

You can call up various functions by pressing 
the adjustment button with a pointed object 


such as a pen or similar item. The following 
adjustment options are displayed one after the 
other, depending on how long you keep the 
adjustment button pressed: 

> Press briefly: switch display on/off 

> 3 to 6 seconds: set the compass zone 

> 6 to 9 seconds: calibrate the compass 

> 9 to 12 seconds: set left-hand/right-hand 
steering 

> 12 to 15 seconds: Setting the language 

Setting compass zones 

Set the compass zone corresponding to your 
vehicle's geographic location so that the com¬ 
pass can function correctly; refer to the world 
map with compass zones. 



To set the compass zone, press the adjustment The compass is operational again after approx, 

button for approx. 3-4 seconds. The number of 10 seconds, 
the compass zone set is shown in the display. 

To change the zone setting, briefly press the 
adjustment button repeatedly until the display 
shows the number of the compass zone corre¬ 
sponding to your current location. 


102 

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 




















Calibrating the digital compass 

The digital compass must be calibrated in the 
following situations: 

> An incorrect compass direction is shown. 

> The compass direction shown does not 
change although the direction of 
travel does. 

> Not all compass directions are shown. 

Procedure 

1. Make sure that no large metal objects or 
overhead power lines are in the vicinity of 
your vehicle and that you have enough 
space to drive in a circle. 

2. Set the currently valid compass zone. 

3. Ensure that the retractable hardtop is fully 
closed. 

4. Press the adjustment button for approx. 

6-7 seconds to call up C. Drive at least one 
full circle at a maximum speed of 7 km/h. 
After the system is calibrated correctly, dis¬ 
play C is replaced by the compass direc¬ 
tions. 

5. Open the retractable hardtop fully and 
repeat step 4. 

Setting right-hand/left-hand steering 

Your digital compass is factory-set to right- 
hand or left-hand steering, in accordance with 
your vehicle. 

Setting the language 

You can set the language of the display: 

Press the adjustment button for approx. 

12-13 seconds. Briefly press the adjustment 
button again to switch between English, "E", 
and German, "O". 

The setting is automatically saved after approx. 
10 seconds. 


Glove compartment 



Opening 

Pull the handle, arrow 2. 

The light in the glove compartment comes on. 


□ To prevent injury in the event of an acci¬ 
dent while the vehicle is being driven, 
close the glove compartment immediately 
after use.^ 


Closing 

Fold cover up. 


Locking 

Lock with a key, arrow 1. 


0 


If you hand out the remote control without 
the integrated key, such as at a hotel, 
refer to page 28, the glove compartment cannot 
be unlocked. 


USB interface for data transmission 



Port for importing and exporting data on a USB 
device, e.g., music collections, refer to 
page 158. 




103 

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 


Controls 




















Practical interior accessories 


Observe the following when connecting: 

> Do not use force when plugging the con¬ 
nector into the USB audio interface. 

> Do not connect devices such as fans or 
lamps to the USB audio interface. 

> Do not connect a USB hard drive. 

> Do not use the USB interface to recharge 
external devices. 

Center armrest 

Storage compartment 

The center armrest contains either two cup- 
holders, a compartment or the cover for the 
snap-in adapter*, depending on the equipment 
version. 

Locking the storage compartment* 

When you lock the vehicle from the outside, the 
storage compartment in the center armrest is 
locked as well. 


Opening 



Fold the center armrest up, see arrow. 


Connection for external audio device 

You can connect an external audio device such 
as a CD or MP3 player and play audio tracks 
over the car's loudspeaker system: 

> AUX-IN port, refer to page 1 63 

> USB audio interface*, refer to page 163 


Storage compartments inside 
the vehicle 

The following compartments are available, 
depending on how your vehicle is equipped: 


Compartments* in the doors 



To open: fold open the cover. 


Compartment* in the center console 

There is an open storage compartment in the 
center console. 


Storage compartment* in the partition 



To open: pull the handle. 



The inserts in the storage compartment can be 
removed individually. 


104 

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 


















Removing the storage compartment 

The storage compartment can be removed 
completely to be able to use other inserts, for 
example. 



In the cargo area: Press the handle up and fold 
the storage compartment completely down. 


D> 


For more information on the various 
inserts available, contact your BMW 


center.^ 


Lateral storage shelf behind the seats 

This space can be used to store briefcases, for 
example. 



□ When loading the lateral storage shelf, do 
not move both seats all the way forward 
while moving them to their uppermost position 
and leaning the backrests forward. Otherwise, 
the seats could hit and damage the seal on the 
windshield and the sun visor. 

Only transport light and small objects on the lat¬ 
eral storage shelf; otherwise, braking maneu¬ 
vers and swerving may lead to a safety hazard 
due to objects flying about the passenger com¬ 
partment. Only transport heavy luggage in the 
cargo area if it has been appropriately 
secured.◄ 


Cupholders 91 


□ Use lightweight and shatterproof contain¬ 
ers and do not transport hot beverages; 
otherwise, there is an increased risk of injury in 
the event of the accident. Do not force contain¬ 
ers that are too large into the cupholders; other¬ 
wise, damage could result.◄ 

In the center armrest 




The cupholders are located in the center 
console. 

Attachable cupholder* 

Attaching to the center console 


Mount the cupholder onto the center console 
so that it snaps into place. 


Storing in the glove compartment 

Insert the cupholder into the holder in the glove 
compartment. 


105 

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 


Controls 


















Practical interior accessories 


Connecting electrical 
appliances 

Sockets 

In your BMW, when the engine is running or the 
ignition is switched on, you can use electrical 
devices such as a flashlight, car vacuum 
cleaner, etc., up to approx. 200 watts at 
12 volts, as long as one of the following sockets 
is available. Avoid damaging the sockets by 
attempting to insert plugs of unsuitable shape 
or size. 

Cigarette lighter socket* 

To access the socket: take the cigarette lighter 
out of the socket. 

Under the center armrest 

External audio device, refer to page 104. 

In the passenger footwell* 

A socket is located on the left below the glove 
compartment. 


Cargo area 

Depending on your vehicle's equipment, the 
following storage spaces can be found in the 
cargo area: 

> Rubber band* for securing light objects 

> Storage compartment 

To open: turn the lock to the left, see arrow, 
and fold the cover up. 


Enlarging the cargo area 



When the hardtop is closed you can enlarge the 
cargo area: 

To do so, press the cargo area partition 1 
upward. 

Before opening the hardtop, pull the cargo area 
partition 1 down until it engages in both 
guides 2 . 

Before moving the hardtop, ensure that 
there are no objects on or next to the 
cargo area partition; otherwise, parts of the 
hardtop may be damaged. Do not exceed the 
maximum loading height; refer to the sticker in 
the cargo area showing a line indicating the 
maximum height. Do not use force to push 
down the cargo area partition.◄ 



> 


The retractable hardtop can only be 
opened if the cargo area partition is in its 
lowermost position and engaged on both 
sides.◄ 


Through-loading opening 
with integrated 
transport bag* 

□ Always secure transported skis or similar 
objects with the ski support*; otherwise, 
they could endanger occupants during braking 
maneuvers and swerving.◄ 

The transport bag lets you transport up to two 
pairs of standard skis safely and cleanly. 

The transport bag can hold skis up to a length of 
5.4 ft/1.70 m. When transporting skis that are 
5.4 ft/1.70 m in length, the overall capacity of 
the ski bag is reduced as the bag narrows. 


106 

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 





Loading 


Securing cargo 


1. Fold the cover down. 



2. In the cargo area: press the tab up and fold 
the cover down. 



After loading, secure the transport bag and its 
contents. Tighten the retaining strap on the 
tensioning buckle for this purpose. 



3. Undo the fastener and spread out the trans¬ 
port bag between the seats. 

4. Insert the latch plate of the retaining strap 
into the belt buckle under the transport bag. 


Secure the transport bag in the manner 
described; otherwise, it could endanger 
the car's occupants, e.g., in case of heavy brak¬ 
ing or sudden swerving.◄ 

To store the transport bag, perform the steps 
described for loading in reverse order. 

Ski support* 

Always secure transported skis or similar 
objects with the ski support* as they 
could otherwise endanger occupants during 
braking maneuvers and swerving.◄ 

1. Remove both covers 1 with the screwdriver. 





5. Load the transport bag. The zipper eases 
access to the stored items. 



2. Attach the ski support 2 and fold it down, 
see arrow. 


Only place clean skis in the transport bag. Wrap 
sharp edges to prevent damage. 


107 

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 


Controls 







Practical interior accessories 


3. Pull the fastener up and attach the rear of 
the ski. 



Before closing the cargo area, ensure that 
the luggage compartment lid cannot be 
damaged by the skis.^ 



Removing the transport bag 

The transport bag can be completely removed, 
e.g., for faster drying or to allow you to use other 
inserts. 



In the cargo area: Press the handle up and fold 
the transport bag completely down. 

For more information on the various 
inserts available, contact your BMW 
center. ◄ 


108 


Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 









109 

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 


Controls 




Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 






Driving tips 

This section provides you with information 
useful in dealing with specific driving and 
operating conditions. 


Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 



Things to remember when driving 


Things to remember when driving 


Break-in period 

Moving parts need breaking-in time to adjust to 
each other. Please follow the instructions below 
in order to achieve the optimal service life and 
economy of operation for your vehicle. 

Engine and differential 

Always obey all official speed limits. 

Up to 1,200 miles/2,000 km 

Drive at varying engine and road speeds, but do 
not exceed an engine speed of 4,500 rpm or a 
road speed of 100 mph/160 km/h. 

Do not drive with full-throttle operation, and do 
not use the transmission's kickdown mode or 
Launch Control. 

After driving 1,200 miles/2,000 km 

Engine and vehicle speeds can be gradually 
increased. 

Tires 

Due to technical factors associated with their 
manufacture, tires do not achieve their full trac¬ 
tion potential until after an initial break-in 
period. Therefore, drive cautiously during the 
first 200 miles/300 km. 

Brake system 

Brakes require an initial break-in period of 
approx. 300 miles/500 km to achieve optimized 
contact and wear patterns between brake pads 
and rotors. Drive cautiously during this break-in 
period. 

Clutch 

The function of the clutch reaches its optimal 
level only after a distance driven of approx. 

300 miles/500 km. During this break-in period, 
engage the clutch gently. 


Following part replacement 

The same break-in procedures should be 
observed if any of the components mentioned 
above have to be renewed in the course of the 
vehicle's operating life. 

Saving fuel 

The fuel consumption of your vehicle depends 
on several factors. You can lower fuel consump¬ 
tion and the environmental impact by taking 
certain measures, adjusting your driving style 
and having the vehicle serviced regularly. 

Remove any unneeded cargo 

Additional weight increases fuel consumption. 

Remove any mounted parts after you 
have finished using them 

Remove additional mirrors and the luggage rack 
when they are no longer in use. Mounted parts 
affect the vehicle's aerodynamics and increase 
fuel consumption. 

Close both windows 

An open window causes higher air resistance 
and thus increases fuel consumption. 

Check tire inflation pressure regularly 

Check the tire inflation pressure at least twice a 
month and before embarking on a long journey, 
and correct it if necessary. 

Low tire inflation pressure causes higher rolling 
resistance and thus increases fuel consumption 
and tire wear. 

Set off immediately 

Do not let the engine warm up while the car is 
still standing, but set off immediately at moder¬ 
ate engine speed. This is the fastest way for the 
cold engine to reach its operating temperature. 


112 


Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 


Drive defensively 

Avoid unnecessary acceleration and braking 
maneuvers. To do so, keep an adequate 
distance to the forward vehicle. A defensive 
and smooth driving style keeps fuel consump¬ 
tion down. 

Avoid high engine speeds 

Only use first gear when setting off. In second 
and higher gears, accelerate without hesitation 
or pauses. When accelerating, shift up before 
reaching high engine speeds. 

When you reach the desired speed, shift into 
the highest applicable gear and drive with the 
engine speed as low as possible and at a con¬ 
stant speed. 

As a rule: driving at low engine speeds lowers 
fuel consumption and reduces wear. 

Coasting 

When approaching a red light, take your foot off 
the accelerator and coast to a stop in the high¬ 
est applicable gear. 

On a downhill slope, take your foot off the accel¬ 
erator and coast in a suitable gear. 

The fuel supply is interrupted when coasting. 

Switch off the engine during lengthy 
stops 

Switch off the engine when stopping for lengthy 
periods, e.g., at traffic lights, railroad crossings 
or in traffic congestion. You achieve fuel sav¬ 
ings even if standing time is as short as approx. 
4 seconds. 

Switch off functions you do not need at 
the moment 

Functions such as the air conditioner and the 
seat or rear window heating draw large amounts 
of power and consume additional fuel. Espe¬ 
cially in city traffic and in stop-and-go driving 
they have a considerable impact. Therefore, 
switch these functions off when they are not 
really needed. 


Have the vehicle serviced 

Have the vehicle serviced regularly to achieve 
good economy and a long vehicle life. BMW 
recommends having the vehicle serviced at a 
BMW center. Also note the BMW service sys¬ 
tem, refer to page 206. 

General driving notes 

Close the luggage compartment lid 

Operate the vehicle only when the lug¬ 
gage compartment lid is closed. Other¬ 
wise, exhaust fumes could enter the interior of 
the vehicle.◄ 

If the vehicle must be driven with the luggage 
compartment lid open: 

1. Close all windows. 

2. Greatly increase the air volume of the 
automatic climate control system, refer 
to page 97. 

Hot exhaust system 

In all vehicles, extremely high tempera¬ 
tures are generated in the exhaust sys¬ 
tem. Do not remove the heat shields installed 
adjacent to various sections of the exhaust sys¬ 
tem, and never apply undercoating to them. 
When driving, standing at idle and while park¬ 
ing, take care to avoid possible contact 
between the hot exhaust system and any highly 
flammable materials such as hay, leaves, grass, 
etc. Such contact could lead to a fire, with the 
risk of serious personal injuries and property 
damage. Do not touch hot exhaust tail pipes. 
Otherwise, there is a risk of burns.◄ 

Hydroplaning 

When driving on wet or slushy roads, 
reduce road speed. If you do not, a wedge 
of water can form between tires and road sur¬ 
face. This situation, known as hydroplaning, 
means that the tire can completely lose contact 
with the road surface, so that neither the car can 
be steered nor the brake be properly applied.◄ 





113 

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 


Driving tips 



Things to remember when driving 


The risk of hydroplaning increases with declin¬ 
ing tread depth on the tires, refer also to Mini¬ 
mum tread depth on page 1 98. 

Driving through water 

Drive though calm water only if it is not 
deeper than 1 ft/25 cm and at this height 
no faster than walking speed, up to 6 mph/ 

10 km/h. Otherwise, the vehicle's engine, the 
electrical systems and the transmission may be 
damaged.◄ 

Use the parking brake on inclines 

On inclines, do not hold the vehicle for a 
lengthy period using the clutch; use the 
parking brake instead. Otherwise, greater 
clutch wear will result.4 

For more information about the drive-off assis¬ 
tant, refer to page 80. 

Braking safely 

Your BMW is equipped with ABS as a standard 
feature. Applying the brakes fully is the most 
effective way of braking in situations in which 
this is necessary. Since the vehicle maintains 
steering responsiveness, you can still avoid 
possible obstacles with a minimum of steering 
effort. 

Pulsation of the brake pedal, combined with 
sounds from the hydraulic circuits, indicate that 
ABS is in its active mode. 

Driving in wet conditions 

When roads are wet or there is heavy rain, 
briefly exert gentle pressure on the brake pedal 
every few miles. Monitor traffic conditions to 
ensure that this maneuver does not endanger 
other road users. The heat generated in this 
process helps dry the pads and rotors. Full 
braking efficiency will then be available when 
you need it. 

Hills 

To prevent overheating and the resulting 
reduced efficiency of the brake system, 
drive long or steep downhill gradients in the 
gear in which the least braking is required. Even 


light but consistent brake pressure can lead to 
high temperatures, brake wear and possibly 
even brake failure.◄ 

You can increase the engine's braking effect by 
shifting down, all the way to first gear if neces¬ 
sary. This strategy helps you avoid placing 
excessive loads on the brake system. Down¬ 
shifting in manual mode of the automatic trans¬ 
mission, refer to page 54. 

7-gear sport automatic transmission with 
dual clutch: Never drive with the trans¬ 
mission in neutral or with the engine switched 
off; otherwise, engine braking action will not be 
present or there will be no power assistance to 
the brakes or steering. 

Manual transmission: Never drive with the 
clutch held down, with the transmission in neu¬ 
tral or with the engine switched off; otherwise, 
engine braking action will not be present or 
there will be no power assistance to the brakes 
or steering. 

Never allow floor mats, carpets or any other 
objects to protrude into the area around the 
pedals; otherwise, pedal function could be 
impaired.◄ 

Corrosion on brake rotors 

When the vehicle is driven only occasionally, 
during extended periods when the vehicle is not 
used at all, and in operating conditions where 
brake applications are less frequent, there is an 
increased tendency for corrosion to form on 
rotors, while contaminants accumulate on the 
brake pads. This occurs because the minimum 
pressure which must be exerted by the pads 
during brake applications to clean the rotors is 
not reached. 

Should corrosion form on the brake rotors, the 
brakes will tend to respond with a pulsating 
effect that even extended application will fail 
to cure. 

When the vehicle is parked 

Condensation forms while the automatic cli¬ 
mate control is in operation, and then exits 
under the vehicle. Traces of condensed water 
under the vehicle are therefore normal. 






114 

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 


Before driving into a car wash 

General information on caring for your BMW 
can be found on page 208. 

With Comfort Access and automatic 
transmission 

Insert the remote control into the ignition 
switch. 

The engine can be switched off when the selec¬ 
tor lever is in position N. Refer also to page 208. 

With Comfort Access and 7-gear sport 
automatic transmission with dual 
clutch 

Insert the remote control into the ignition 
switch. 

The engine can be switched off when the trans¬ 
mission is in position N. Refer also to page 209. 

Cargo loading 

To avoid loading the tires beyond their 
approved carrying capacity, never over¬ 
load the vehicle. Overloading can lead to over¬ 
heating and increases the rate at which damage 
develops inside the tires. This can ultimately 
result in a sudden blowout.^ 

Make sure that no liquids are spilled or 
leak from their containers in the cargo 
area, as this could result in damage to the 
vehicle.^ 

Always position and secure the cargo as 
described so that it cannot endanger the 
car's occupants, for example if sudden braking 
or swerving is necessary. 

Never exceed either the approved gross vehicle 
weight or either of the approved axle loads, refer 
to page 228, as excessive loads can pose a 
safety hazard, and may also place you in viola¬ 
tion of traffic safety laws. 

Heavy or hard objects should not be carried 
loose inside the car, since they could be thrown 
around, for example as a result of heavy braking, 
sudden swerves, etc., and endanger the occu¬ 
pants.◄ 


Determining loading limit 



1. Locate the following statement on your 
vehicle's placard*: 

The combined weight of occupants 
and cargo should never exceed 
XXX kg or YYY lbs. Otherwise, overloading 
can result in damage to the vehicle and 
unstable driving conditions.◄ 

2. Determine the combined weight of the 
driver and passengers that will be riding in 
your vehicle. 

3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver 
and passengers from XXX kilograms or YYY 
pounds. 

4. The resulting figure equals the available 
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. 
For example, if the YYY amount equals 

1,400 lbs and there will be five 150 lbs 
passengers in your vehicle, the amount of 
available cargo and luggage load capacity 
is 650 lbs: 

1,400 lbs minus 750 lbs = 650 lbs 

5. Determine the combined weight of luggage 
and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That 
weight may not safely exceed the available 
cargo and luggage load capacity calculated 
in step 4. 

6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, part of 
the load from your trailer will be transferred 
to your vehicle. Consult the manual for 
transporting a trailer to determine how this 
may reduce the available cargo and luggage 
load capacity of your vehicle. 






115 

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 


Driving tips 





Things to remember when driving 


Load 


i Max, Load 


g Max. Load 


The permissible load is the sum of the occu¬ 
pants' weights and the weight of the cargo. The 
greater the weight of the occupants, the less 
cargo/luggage can be transported. 

Stowing cargo 

Cargo area 

> Load heavier cargo as far forward as possi¬ 
ble, directly behind the cargo area partition, 
and as low as possible. 




> Cover sharp edges and corners. 

□ Before opening the hardtop, fold down 
the cargo area partition. Make sure the 
cargo area is loaded correctly; otherwise, 
parts of the hardtop can be damaged, refer 
to page 38. ◄ 


Lateral storage shelf 

□ When storing objects on the lateral stor¬ 
age shelf, do not move both seats all the 
way forward while moving them to their upper¬ 
most position and leaning the backrests for¬ 
ward. Otherwise, the seats could hit and dam¬ 
age the seal on the windshield, the sun visor 
and the headliner. ◄ 



Light and small objects can be stored on the lat¬ 
eral storage shelf. 


Securing cargo 

Cargo area 

Secure smaller and lighter items using retaining 
straps, a cargo area net* or draw straps*. 

Lateral storage shelf 

You can obtain cargo straps* from your BMW 
center. Four lashing eyes are provided behind 
the seats for attaching the cargo straps. 
Adhere to the information included with the 
cargo straps. 


116 


Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 











Lashing eyes on the lateral storage 

shelf 

Top: 



|| | I! 1 Driving tips ( j 



















Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 













Navigation 

This chapter describes how you can 
enter destinations and specify your route 
so that your navigation system guides you 
reliably to your destination. 



Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 



Navigation system 


Navigation system* 


General information 

With the help of satellites, the navigation sys¬ 
tem is able to ascertain the precise position of 
the vehicle and guide you reliably to any desti¬ 
nation you enter. 

Enter data only when the vehicle is sta¬ 
tionary, and always give priority to the 
applicable traffic regulations in the event of any 
contradiction between traffic and road condi¬ 
tions and the instructions issued by the naviga¬ 
tion system. Failure to take to this precaution 
can place you in violation of the law and put 
vehicle occupants and other road users in 
danger.^ 

Navigation data 

General information 

Navigation data are stored in the vehicle and 
can be updated. 

Navigation data and authorization codes are 
available from your BMW center. 

Depending on the data volume, a data update 
may take several hours. 

> The data are updated while you are driving. 

> The update is resumed automatically when 
a trip is continued after an interruption. 

> All functions are available during the trip. 

> The data are stored in the vehicle. 

> After the update, the system restarts. 

> The medium that holds the navigation data 
can be removed after the update is com¬ 
pleted. 


Updating the navigation data 

Inserting the navigation DVD 

1. Insert the navigation DVD into the DVD 
player with the labeled side facing up. 

2. Follow the instructions on the Control 
Display. 

3. Enter the authorization code of the naviga¬ 
tion DVD and change the DVD if needed. 


Removing navigation DVD 



1. IQI Press button 1. 

The DVD emerges slightly from the drive. 

2. Remove the DVD. 


Displaying information on the version 

1. "Navigation" 

2. Open "Options". 

3. "Navigation system version": 

Information on the data version is displayed. 



120 


Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 
























Destination entry 


In entering your destination you can select from 
the following options: 

> Entering a destination manually, see below 

> Selecting destination from the address 
book, refer to page 123 

> Last destinations, refer to page 124 

t> Special destinations, refer to page 1 24 

> Entering a destination on the map, refer 
to page 126 

> Selecting a home address, refer 
to page 124 

> Entering a destination by voice com¬ 
mands*, refer to page 127 

> Destination entry via BMW Assist*, refer 
to page 125 

You can also store a navigation destination on 
the programmable memory keys, refer 
to page 21. 

Enter data only when the vehicle is sta¬ 
tionary, and always give priority to the 
applicable traffic regulations in the event of any 
contradiction between traffic and road condi¬ 
tions and the instructions issued by the naviga¬ 
tion system. Otherwise, vehicle occupants and 
other road users may be endangered.◄ 

Entering a destination 
manually 

The system's word-matching principle makes it 
easier for you to enter the names of streets or 
towns, refer to page 129. This allows you to 
enter different spellings and completes your 
entry automatically, so that stored names can 
be called up quickly. 

1. Press the MENU button. 

2. "Navigation" 


3. "Enter address" 



The system also supports you with the follow¬ 
ing features: 

> If you do not enter a street, the system will 
guide you to the downtown area of a town 
or city. 

> You can skip the entry of state/province and 
locality if the current entries should be 
retained for your new destination. 

Entering a state/province 

1. "Navigation" 

2. "Enter address" 

3. Select "State/Province" or the displayed 
state/province. 

Entering a town/city 

1. Select "Town/City/Postal Code" or the dis¬ 
played town/city. 



2. Select letters, if necessary. 



121 

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 


Navigation 














Destination entry 


To delete letters: 

> To delete individual letters: 

Turn the controller to select K-, and 
then press the controller. 

> To delete all letters: 

Turn the controller to select K-, and 
then press the controller for an extended 
period. 

To enter spaces: 

> Select the symbol. 

The list gradually grows smaller each time 
you enter a new letter. 

3. Move the controller to the right. 

4. Select the name of the town/city from 
the list. 

If there are several towns/cities with the 
same name: 

1. Change to the list of town/city names. 

2. Highlight the town/city: a preview map is 
displayed. 

3. Select the town/city. 

Entering the postal code 

1. Select "Town/City/Postal Code" or the dis¬ 
played town/city. 

2. Select the 1®+- symbol. 

3. Select the digits. 

4. Change to the list of postal codes and 
towns/cities. 

5. Highlight the postal code: a preview map is 
displayed. 

6. Select the postal code. 

Entering street and intersection 

1. Select "Street" or the displayed street. 

2. Enter a street and intersection as you would 
the town/city. 

After the street you can also enter the intersec¬ 
tion or the house number. 

If there are several streets with the same name: 


1. Change to the list of street names. 

2. Highlight the street: a preview map is dis¬ 
played. 

3. Select the street. 

Entering a street without a destination 
town/city 

You can also enter a street without specifying a 
town/city. In this case, all streets of the same 
name in the designated state/province are 
offered. The corresponding town/city is dis¬ 
played after the street name. 

If a town/city has already been entered, you can 
negate this entry. This could be helpful in 
instances where the desired street does not 
exist in the entered town/city because it 
belongs to another suburb, for example. 

1. "Navigation" 

2. "Enter address" 

3. Select "Street" or the displayed street. 

4. Change to the list of street names. 

5. Select "In" with the state/province currently 
displayed. 


in \ In 8EVOUV HILLS CA 


i 1 In UNITED STATES 


UUSAU55THA5SE 

MUSEPJBEftGSTRASSE 

il 

■ ■■ MusiUMsitm 


r-j .‘J? MlCiPFI MFIMSTRA55F 

J 

M 1 J SP< LUSTRASSE 

/ 


6. Select the letters. 

7. Change to the list of street names. 

8. Highlight the street: a preview map is dis¬ 
played. 

9. Select the street. 


122 


Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 



Entering a house number 

You can enter any house number stored in the 
navigation data for the street. 

1. "House number" 

2. Select the digits. 

3. Change to the list of house numbers. 

4. Select a house number or range of house 
numbers. 

Starting destination guidance after 
entering the destination 

1. "Accept destination" 

2. "Start guidance" or "Add as another dest.". 

> Set your "Route preference", 
refer to page 130. 

> Search for "Points of Interest at loc.", 
refer to page 124. 


Address book 

To create contacts, refer to page 182. 


Selecting a destination from the 
address book 

1. "Navigation" 

2. "Address book" 

Contacts with addresses are displayed if 
these have been checked as destinations. 

If the contacts with addresses from the 
mobile phone are not displayed, they first 
need to be checked as destinations, refer 
to page 183. 


& Ndvi 

C)4l W 


Enter address 

■/ 

Address book 


Last destination* 

r 

' 'jV 1 

Points of Imoran 

& 

Map 


ftoute information 


3. Select a contact from the list or, if neces¬ 
sary, using "A-Z search". 

4. If necessary, select "Business address" or 
"Home address". 

Storing a destination in the 
address book 

Store the destination in the address book after 
entering the destination. 

1. Open "Options". 

2. "Store as new contact" or "Add to existing 
contact". 


Options 

Split kj.v&m 

Switch o1+ Control dtspToy 
Enter address 
: f Stor e a s n ew con tact 
Add to existing font Act 
BMW Assist destination entry 
Navigation 


3. Select an existing contact, if available. 

4. Select "Business address" or "Home 
address". 

5. Enter "Last name" and, if necessary, 

"First name". 

6. "Store in vehicle" 

Storing the position 

Your current position can be stored in the 
address book. 

1. "Navigation" 

2. Open "Options". 

3. "Store position as contact" or "Add position 
to contact". 




C?'Split tutt&Fi 

Switch ot\ Control dls-pTcy 

NAVtg/itirtn 


Store postlion as contact 


Add puiiliun Lu tuntdil 
O'Receive Traff ic Info 
^Dynamic guidance 



123 

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 


Navigation 









Destination entry 


4. Depending on the selection, select an exist¬ 
ing contact from the list or the type of 
address and enter the last and first name. 

5. "Store in vehicle" 

Editing or deleting an address 

1. "Navigation" 

2. "Address book" 

3. Highlight the entry. 

4. Open "Options". 

5. "Edit in Contacts" or "Delete entry". 

Using home address as destination 

The home address must be stored as a destina¬ 
tion. Refer to Specifying a contact as the home 
address, page 182. 

1. "Navigation" 

2. "Address book" 

3. "Home" 


I _ 

Check My contacts address l 

1 Home I 

- Andreas 

" *■ Angela Q 

| Marcus (£J I 


4. "Start guidance" 

Last destinations 


Opening the last destinations 

1. "Navigation" 

2. "Last destinations" 


Enief address 
Addrest book 
t/ uut 

* Points of interest 

ir Mdp 

Route informal son 


3. Select the destination. 

4. "Start guidance" 

Editing a destination 

Destinations can be edited, for example, to 
change the house number of an existing entry. 

1. "Navigation" 

2. "Last destinations" 

3. Highlight the destination. 

4. Open "Options". 

5. "Edit destination" 

Deleting the last destinations 

1. "Navigation" 

2. "Last destinations" 

3. Highlight the destination. 

4. Open "Options". 

5. "Delete entry" or "Delete all last destina¬ 
tions". 


The last destinations are stored automatically. 
These destinations can be called up and used 
as a destination for destination guidance. 


Special destinations 


You can search for special destinations, e.g., 
hotels and places of interest, and start destina¬ 
tion guidance to this location. 

The search can be narrowed by entering the 
location and type of special destination. 


> 


The scope of information provided 
depends on the particular set of naviga¬ 


tion data you are using.◄ 


124 

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 







Opening the search for special 
destinations 

1. "Navigation" 

2. "Points of Interest" 

Special destination location 

Search for a special destination according to its 
location relative to a locality or route. 

1. "Search area" 


A VI Point* tnteret \ 

| Sejn.f’ dim7 {At d«>ti nationi \ 
■111 Acr ™ * M categof i« 

Pf J—l* Several c a tegor y dfi taih 

* F Start search 

| f fMmr. A-7 search 

Iff I / 'I 

I/// /1 


2. Select the location where the system is to 
search for the special destination: 

> "At current location" 

> "At destination" 

> "At a different destination" 

> "Along route" 

Special destination category 

1. "Category" 

2. Select "AN" or a specific category, e.g., 
hotels or restaurants. 

Category details 

For some special destinations, additional 
details can be displayed that are available in the 
navigation data, e.g., Italian-style restaurant. 

"Category details" 


Starting the search for special 
destinations 

1. "Start search" 

2. A list of the special destinations is dis¬ 
played. 

> "At current location" 

Special destinations are listed according 
to their distance from the current loca¬ 
tion and are displayed with a directional 
arrow pointing to the destination. 

> "At destination", "At a different destina¬ 
tion", "Along route" 

Special destinations are listed according 
to their distance from the location where 
the search is being performed. 

> Destinations of the selected category 
are displayed in the map display as sym¬ 
bols. The display depends on the map 
scale and the category. 

3. Highlight a special destination: The desti¬ 
nation is displayed in the preview map. 

4. Select the special destination. 

5. Select the symbol. 

6. "Start guidance" or "Add as another dest.". 

If a phone number is available, a connection 
can be established, if desired. 

Destination entry via BMW Assist* 

A connection is established to the BMW Con¬ 
cierge service, refer to page 1 85. 

1. "Navigation" 

2. "Enter address" 

3. Open "Options". 

4. "BMW Assist dest. entry" 




125 

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 


Communications Entertainment Navigation 











Destination entry 


Entering special destinations by name 

1. "Navigation" 

2. "Points of Interest" 

3. "Name, A-Z search" 

4. Enter the letters. 

Depending on the distance, the search may 
take some time. The list can contain a max¬ 
imum of 100 entries. 

5. Change to the list of special destinations. 

6. Highlight a special destination: The desti¬ 
nation is displayed in the preview map. 

7. Select the special destination. 

8. Select the symbol. 

9. "Start guidance" or "Add as another dest.". 

Displaying special destinations in 
the map 

To display symbols of the special destinations 
in the map: 

1. "Navigation" 

2. "Map" 

3. Open "Options". 

4. "Display Points of Interest" 



5. Select the settings. 


Entering the destination via 
the map 

If you only know the location of the town or 
street, you can enter the destination using 
the map. 


Opening the map 

1. "Navigation" 

2. "Map" 

A map section is displayed on the Control Dis¬ 
play. The map shows the current position of the 
vehicle. 


Selecting the destination 

1. Select the © symbol. The interactive map is 
started. 



2. Select the destination with the cross-hairs. 

> To change the scale: Turn the controller. 

t> To shift the map: move the controller in 
the required direction. 

> To shift the map diagonally: move the 
controller in the required direction and 
turn it. 

3. Press the controller to display additional 

menu items. 

> Select the ^ symbol: "Start guidance" 
or "Add as another dest.". 

> "Return": return to the map view. 

> "Find points of interest": the search for 
special destinations is started. 

Specifying the street 

If the system cannot recognize a street, it dis¬ 
plays a street name in the vicinity or the coordi¬ 
nates of the destination. 


126 


Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 
























Interactive map 

In the interactive map, the scale can be adjusted 
and the visible map section can be shifted. In 
addition, pressing the controller makes further 
functions available: 


\CS Selected 

& 4BW10-O 

' Ex.it mrip 

* * View In northern direction 


Ditplay rufrwit Jotatifm 

Find points of Intcfesx 


> ^ Select a symbol and "Start guid¬ 
ance", if necessary. 

> "Exit interactive map" 

> Map display 

> "Display destination" 

The map section around the destination 
is displayed. 

> "Display current location" 

The map section around your current 
location is displayed. 

> "Find points of interest", refer 
to page 124. 



Entering a destination by 
voice commands* 

General information 

You can enter a desired destination via the 
voice activation system. During the destination 
input, you can switch between voice entry and 
entry via iDrive at any time. To do so, reactivate 
the voice activation system if necessary. 

You can have the possible commands 
read aloud via >Voice commands< .◄ 

Saying the entries 

> Countries, towns and cities, streets and 
intersections can be said as whole words or 
spelled in the system language, refer 
to page 23. 


Example: to enter a destination in a US state 
as a complete word, the system language 
must be English. 

t> The town/city, street and house number 
can be said as a single sentence.* 

> Spell the entry if the language region and 
the system language differ. 

> Say the letters smoothly, and avoid exag¬ 
gerating the pronunciation and inserting 
lengthy pauses between the letters. 

Entering an address* 


1. Press the *+0 button on the steering wheel. 


2. >Enter address< 

3. Wait for a request from the system. 

4. Say the town or city, street and house num¬ 
ber in a single sentence. 

5. Continue making the entry as prompted by 
the system. 

6. If necessary, individually name the sepa¬ 
rate components of the address, e.g., the 
town/city. 

Entering a town/city 

The town/city can be spelled or entered as a 

complete word*. 


D> 


The methods of entry depend on the nav¬ 
igation data in use and the country and 


language settings.◄ 


1 >City< or >Spell city<. 

2. Wait for the system to prompt you for the 
town/city. 

3. Say the name of the town/city, or name at 
least the first three letters. 

Depending on the entry, up to 20 towns/ 
cities may be suggested. 


4. Select a location: 

> To select a recommended town/ 
city: >Yes< 

> To select another town/city: >New 
entry< 


> To select an entry: e.g., >Entry 2< 

> To spell an entry: >Spell city< 


127 

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 


Navigation 












Destination entry 


Identical-sounding towns/cities that can¬ 
not be distinguished by the system are 
compiled in a separate list and shown as a town/ 
city followed by three dots. 

If necessary, select this entry with >Yes<. Then 
select the desired town/city from that list.^ 

The town/city can also be selected from the list 
via iDrive: Turn the controller until the town/city 
is selected and press the controller. 

Entering a street or intersection 

The street or intersection is entered in the same 
manner as the town/city. 

Entering a house number 

You can enter house numbers up to 999: 

^ 1. >House number< 

2. Say the house number. 

3. >Yes< to confirm the house number. 

4. "Accept destination" 

Starting destination guidance 

>Start guidance< 

Destination guidance starts immediately. 

Adding further intermediate 
destinations 

>Add as another destination 

Further intermediate destinations can be 
added. 

Storing destinations 

The destination is automatically added to the 
list of last destinations. 

Planning atrip 

New trip 

Various intermediate destinations can be 
entered for a trip. 

1. "Navigation" 

2. "Map" 

3. Move the controller to the left, if necessary. 


4. Select the ^ symbol. 

5. "Enter new destination" 

6. Select the type of destination entry and 
enter the intermediate destination. 


■\ \ Cfi UtfilitutiuM \ j 

Enter address using: i 

| Enter address 

i 1 

IP Arid r^tt book 

J 

1 r Use destinations 

lei ** Points oF Interest 

i+ 

s 

1 f 

Intfirartivf 1 rrinp 

1 


Entering further intermediate 
destinations 

A maximum of 30 intermediate destinations can 
be entered for one trip. 

1. "Enter new destination" 

2. Select the type of destination entry and 
enter the intermediate destination. 


| Cy Ntw uaslifiritiun \ 

I Enter address using: \ V 

l Enter address 

■ r use destinations (+ 

S* 

tr Points of Interest 
inttrartivf* map 


3. Select "Add as another dest.". 

4. Select the location where the intermediate 
destination is to be inserted. 

Starting the trip 

After all intermediate destinations have been 
entered: 

"Start guidance" 

Storing a trip 

Up to 30 created trips can be stored in the 
trip list. 

1. Open "Options". 

2. "Store trip" 


128 

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 









3. Enter the letters. 

4. "OK" 

The trip is stored in the trip list under the 
entered name. 

Starting a stored trip 

1. "Navigation" 

2. "Stored trips" 

3. Select the desired trip. 

4. "Start guidance" 

Changing trips 

Changing the trip direction 

Intermediate destinations can be displayed in 
reverse order after destination guidance is 
started. 

1. "Map" 

2. "Guidance" 

3. Open "Options". 

4. "Reverse order of trip dest." 

Rearranging the intermediate 
destinations 

1. "Map" 

2. "Guidance" 

3. "Display all trip dest." 

4. Select an intermediate destination. 

5. "Reposition dest. in the trip" 

Deleting an intermediate destination 

1. "Map" 

2. "Guidance" 

3. "Display all trip dest." 

4. Select an intermediate destination. 

5. "Delete dest. in the trip" 


Deleting a trip 

1. "Navigation" 

2. "Stored trips" 

3. Select the desired trip. 

4. Open "Options". 

5. "Delete all trips" or "Delete trip". 

Word-matching principle 

The system's word-matching principle makes it 
easier for you to enter the names of towns or 
streets. The system runs ongoing checks, com¬ 
paring your destination entries with the data 
stored in the vehicle as the basis for instant 
response. The benefits for you include: 

t> Names of towns entered may differ from the 
official versions if you are using a spelling 
that is customary in another country. 
Example: 

Instead of the German spelling "Munchen" 
you can also enter the English spelling 
"Munich" or the Italian spelling "Monaco". 

t> When you are entering the names of towns 
and streets the system will complete them 
automatically as soon as enough letters are 
available to ensure unambiguous identifi¬ 
cation. 

t> The system offers only those letters for 
selection of name entries that are stored in 
the vehicle. Thus, entry of erroneous or 
unregistered names is impossible. 


129 

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 


Navigation 



Destination guidance 


Destination guidance 


Starting destination 
guidance 

1. "Navigation" 

2. "Enter address" 

3. Select the destination. 

4. "Accept destination" 

5. "Start guidance" 

The route is displayed on the Control Display 
after it is calculated. 

Terminating destination 
guidance 

1. "Navigation" 

2. "Map" 

3. Select the symbol. 

4. "Stop guidance" 

Continuing destination 
guidance 

If the destination was not reached during the 
last trip, destination guidance can be resumed. 

"Resume guidance" 

Route criteria 

General information 

You can influence the calculated route by 
choosing certain route criteria. You can change 
the route criteria as often as you like during des¬ 
tination entry or during destination guidance. 

The route is planned according to fixed rules. 
The type of road is taken into account, e.g., 
whether it is a highway or a winding road. As a 
result, the routes recommended by the naviga¬ 
tion system may not always be the same ones 
that you would choose based on personal expe¬ 
rience. 


The settings are stored for the remote control 

currently in use. 

Changing route criteria 

1. "Navigation" 

2. "Map" 

3. "Route preference" 

4. Selecting a criterion: 

> "Fast route": time-optimized route, 
which is a combination of the shortest 
possible route and the fastest roads 

> "Efficient route": optimized combination 
of the fastest and shortest roads 

> "Short route": short distance, irrespec¬ 
tive of how fast or slow progress will be 

> "Alternative routes": other suggested 
alternative routes while destination 
guidance is active 


1 \ 'VJ 


. V 

H 1 ■/ Fast route 

l 

I 

Efficient route 

m 

1 

Pf — ^ Short rout? 

/ 

1 

■ r 1017 

44 km 

1 

■ K Af Ltff f idLivt? I'juliiv 


1 T 

10:Z* 

EG km 


I T 1 1QZ7 

SO km 



5. Select additional route criteria, if desired. 
Where possible, the selected criteria will be 
avoided on the route. 

> Avoid highways where possible: 

"Avoid highways" 

> Avoid toll roads where possible: 

"Avoid toll roads" 

> Avoid ferries where possible: 

"Avoid ferries" 

The setting applies to the current route and to 
the planning of future routes. 


130 


Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 



Dynamic destination guidance 

"Dynamic guidance" is switched on: 

The route is automatically changed in the event 
of traffic obstructions. The system does not 
point out traffic obstructions along the original 
route. 

Depending on the type of road and the nature 
and length of the traffic obstruction, the route 
can also be calculated so that you travel 
through the traffic obstruction. 

1. "Navigation" 

2. Open "Options". 

3. "Dynamic guidance" 

If the "Avoid highways", "Avoid toll roads" 
or "Avoid ferries" route criteria are 
selected, route calculation may take longer. ◄ 

Route 

General information 

Depending on the equipment in your vehicle, 
various views of the route are available during 
destination guidance. 

> List of streets and towns/cities 

> Map view, refer to page 132 

Displaying a list of the streets or towns/ 
cities on the route 

When destination guidance is started, a list of 
the streets and towns/cities on the route is dis¬ 
played. The driving distances and traffic bulle¬ 
tins are displayed for each route section. 

1. "Navigation" 

2. "Route information" 

3. Highlight a section. 

The section is displayed in the preview map. 

Bypassing a section of the route 

During destination guidance, you can revise the 
navigation system's route recommendations to 
avoid particular stretches of road. Enter the 
number of miles/kilometers that you want to 
travel before returning to the original route. 


1. "Navigation" 

2. "Route information" 

3. "New route for:" 


Il\ \ ' ^ m n ii£iliE.'i i 


V 

pi 

“l \ 

m 1 Wroute f&r” 


\ \ 

MAX-VON-GRU ... 

0,1 km 


1 rmiivk LbTHA 

lU km 

l 

■ - PARZlVALPLATZ 

0.1 km 


|1 Y Lf OPOtDSTRA 

0 8 km 


fcDUAHU^LHh 

(U km 


i ^ TORQUATO TA... 

0,0 km 

II 


4. Turn the controller: enter the desired num¬ 
ber of miles. 

5. Press the controller. 


Resuming the original route 

If the route section should no longer be 
bypassed: 

1. "Navigation" 

2. "Route information" 

3. "Remove blocking" 

Gas station recommendations 

The remaining range is calculated and gas sta¬ 
tions along the route are recommended. 

1. "Navigation" 

2. "Route information" 

3. "Recommended refuel" 

A list of gas stations is displayed. 

4. Select a gas station. 

5. Select the symbol. 

6. "Start guidance" or "Add as another dest.". 


131 

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 


Navigation 






Destination guidance 


Destination guidance 
through voice instructions 

Switching voice instructions on/off 

Voice instructions can be switched on or off 
during destination guidance. 

1. "Navigation" 

2. "Map" 

3. Select the symbol. 


Symbol 

Meaning 

cty 

Voice instructions are 
switched on 


Voice instructions are 
switched off 


For rapid access, the feature can be stored on a 
programmable memory key, refer to page 21 . 


Repeating a voice instruction 

1. "Navigation" 

2. "Map" 

3. Highlight the symbol. 

4. Press the controller twice. 

Adjusting the volume of voice 
instructions* 

The volume can be adjusted only while a voice 
instruction is being issued. 

1. Have the last voice instruction repeated, if 
necessary. 

2. Turn the button during the voice instruction 
to select the desired volume. 



The setting is stored for the remote control cur¬ 
rently in use. 


Map display 

Map display 

You can have your current position displayed on 
a map. After starting the destination guidance, 
the planned route is shown on the map. 

1. "Navigation" 

2. "Map" 

The following functions are directly available in 
the map display: 


Symbol 

Function 


Starting/stopping destina¬ 
tion guidance 


Switching voice instructions 
on/off 


Changing route criteria or 
selecting route alternatives 

& 

Special destinations 

A 

Display traffic bulletins 

© 

Interactive map 

®Qi N 

Map view settings 


Changing scale 


Information in the map display: 

> Time, entertainment source, sound output, 
map orientation. 

> Distance from destination, estimated time 
of arrival, if destination guidance is active. 

> Any traffic obstructions are highlighted in 
color. 

To show/hide the information on the map: 

Press the controller. 


132 

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 












Viewing the map 

1. Select the i N G>G) symbol. 

2. Select a setting: 

> "View facing north" 

> "View in dir. of travel" 

> "Perspective view" 

> "Arrow display" 

3. Press the controller. 

Changing the map section 

© Select the interactive map. 

> To shift the map: move the controller in the 
required direction. 

> To shift the map diagonally: move the con¬ 
troller in the required direction and turn it. 

Changing scale 

1. Select the symbol. 

2. Turn the controller to adjust the scale. 

Automatic scaling of the map 

In the map view facing north, turn the controller 
in any direction until AUTO is displayed as the 
map scale. 

The map shows the entire range from your loca¬ 
tion to the destination. 

Settings for the map display 

The map is shown on the Control Display. 

1. Open "Options". 

2. "Settings" 

3. Set the optimized map view. 

> "Day/night mode" 

Select and create the necessary settings 
depending on the light conditions. When 
the traffic bulletin map is activated, this 
setting is disregarded. 

> "Satellite images" 

Satellite images* are displayed depend¬ 
ing on availability and resolution. 

> "Perspective view in 3D" 

Displays a spatial view. Prominent areas 
that are contained in the navigation data 
are displayed on the map in 3D. 


> "Traffic Info map" 

The map is optimized for displaying traf¬ 
fic bulletins. Symbols for the special 
destinations are no longer displayed. 

Map view for the split screen display 

The map view for the split screen can be 
selected separately from the main screen. 

1. Open "Options". 

2. "Splitscreen" 

uy The split screen is switched on. 

3. Move the controller to the right repeatedly 
until the split screen content is selected. 

4. Select the map view: 

> "Arrow display" 

> "Map facing north" 

> "Map direction of travel" 

> "Map view with perspective" 

> "Exit ramp view" 

Changing scale 

1. Move the controller to the right until the 
split screen is selected. 

2. Turn the controller. 

Traffic bulletins* 

You can display the traffic bulletins from radio 
stations that broadcast the TMC (Traffic Mes¬ 
sage Channel) of a traffic information service. 
This information from the traffic information 
service is continuously updated on the basis of 
measurement data from traffic control centers 
and information on traffic congestion. 

During destination guidance, traffic bulletins 
that are relevant to areas along the route are 
automatically displayed and taken into account 
in the route planning. You can open all traffic 
bulletins manually via iDrive. 

The traffic bulletins are shown in the map 
display. 


133 

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 


Navigation 



Destination guidance 


Real Time Traffic Information End-User 
Provisions 

Certain BMW models equipped with navigation 
have the capability to display real-time traffic 
information. If your system has this capability 
the following additional terms and conditions 
apply: 

An End-User shall no longer have the right to 
use the Traffic Data in the event that the End- 
User is in material breach of the terms and con¬ 
ditions contained herein. 

A. Total Traffic Network, a division of Clear 
Channel Broadcasting, Inc. ("Total Traffic Net¬ 
work") holds the rights to the traffic incident 
data and RDS-TMC network through which it is 
delivered. You may not modify, copy, scan or 
use any other method to reproduce, duplicate, 
republish, transmit or distribute in anyway any 
portion of traffic incident data. You agree to 
indemnify, defend and hold harmless BMW of 
North America, LLC. ("BMW NA") and Total 
Traffic Network, Inrix, Inc (and their affiliates) 
against any and all claims, damages, costs or 
other expenses that arise directly or indirectly 
out of (a) your unauthorized use of the traffic 
incident data or the RDS-TMC network, (b) your 
violation of this directive and/or (c) any unautho¬ 
rized or unlawful activities by you in connection 
herewith. 

B. Total Traffic Network traffic data is informa¬ 
tional only. User assumes all risk of use. Total 
Traffic Network, BMW NA, and their suppliers 
make no representations about content, traffic 
and road conditions, route usability, or speed. 

C. The licensed material is provided to license 
"as is," and "where is". Total Traffic Network, 
including, but not limited to, any and all third 
party providers of any of the licensed material, 
expressly disclaims, to the fullest extent permit¬ 
ted by law, all warranties or representations 
with respect to the licensed material (including, 
without limitation, that the licensed material will 
be error-free, will operate without interruption 
or that the traffic data will be accurate), express, 


implied or statutory, including, without limita¬ 
tion, the implied warranties of merchantability, 
non-infringement fitness for a particular pur¬ 
pose, or those arising from a course of dealing 
or usage of trade. 

D. Neither Total Traffic Network, Inrix, Inc. nor 
BMW NA will be liable to you for any indirect, 
special, consequential, exemplary, or incidental 
damages (including, without limitation, lost rev¬ 
enues, anticipated revenues, or profits relating 
to the same) arising from any claim relating 
directly or indirectly to use of the traffic data, 
and even if Total Traffic Network, Inrix, Inc., or 
BMW NA are aware of the possibility of such 
damages. These limitations apply to all claims, 
including, without limitation, claims in contract 
and tort (such as negligence, product liability 
and strict liability). Some states do not allow the 
exclusion or limitation of incidental or conse¬ 
quential damages, so those particular limita¬ 
tions may not apply to you. 

Activating/deactivating reception 

1. "Navigation" 

2. Open "Options". 

3. Activate/deactivate "Receive Traffic Info". 

In many metropolitan areas you can receive 
traffic information broadcast by radio stations. 
The traffic conditions are monitored by traffic 
control centers and the traffic information is 
updated periodically. 

During destination guidance, the traffic bulle¬ 
tins relevant to your planned route are automat¬ 
ically shown. Whether destination guidance is 
active or not, you can have the traffic bulletins 
displayed in the map view or in the traffic bulle¬ 
tin list. 


134 


Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 


Traffic bulletins in a list 

A list of the traffic bulletins can be opened via 
the menu or map display. 

Opening the traffic bulletins 

1. "Navigation" 

2. "Map" 

3. Move the controller to the left, if necessary. 

4. Select the A symbol: "Traffic Info" 

First, the traffic bulletins on the planned 
route are displayed. The traffic bulletins are 
sorted in the order of their distance from the 
current vehicle position. 

5. Select a traffic bulletin. 

Additional information can be displayed for 
some traffic bulletins: 

1. Select the symbol. 

2. Additional information is displayed. 

3. Exit the menu: 

Move the controller to the left. 

Traffic bulletins in the map 

When the traffic bulletin map is activated, the 
Control Display changes to a black and white 
display. This enables a better view of the traffic 
bulletins. The day/night mode is disregarded in 
this setting. The symbols for the special desti¬ 
nations are no longer displayed. 

1. "Navigation" 

2. "Map" 

3. Open "Options". 

4. "Settings" 

5. "Traffic Info map" 

Symbols in the map display 

Depending on the scale of the map and the 
location of the traffic obstruction along the 
route, the symbols for the traffic obstructions 
are displayed. 


Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 


Additional information in the map view 

Depending on the map scale, a traffic obstruc¬ 
tion's length, direction and impact are displayed 
on the map using triangles or gray bars along 
the calculated route. 

Filtering of traffic bulletins 

You can filter which traffic bulletins are to be 
displayed by the system: 

1. "Navigation" 

2. "Map" 

3. Open "Options". 

4. "Traffic Info categories" 

5. Select the desired category. 


f. \ 1 & Traffic forecasts 

1 j Rgddwuih 

' , Gf Traffic disruptions 


Traffic bulletins of the selected category are 
displayed. 

> Traffic bulletins on incidents along the route 
are always displayed. 

> For your own safety, traffic bulletins that 
notify you of potentially dangerous situa¬ 
tions, such as wrong-way drivers, cannot be 
hidden. 

Traffic bulletins during destination 
guidance 

System response will vary depending on 
whether or not "Dynamic guidance" is selected, 
refer to page 131. 

During destination guidance, traffic obstruc¬ 
tions on the route are taken into consideration. 

Information on sources of great danger, such as 
wrong-way drivers, is displayed regardless of 
the setting. 


135 

2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 


Communications Entertainment Navigation j 










Destination guidance 


Displaying traffic obstructions 

When the navigation system receives a traffic 
obstruction message and "Dynamic guidance" 
is not selected, you will be shown certain infor¬ 
mation, such as the length of the traffic conges¬ 
tion, when you are approx. 30 miles/50 km away 
from the traffic obstruction. 

The last possible detour exit is indicated just 
before you reach it. 

This information is displayed even if you have 
called up another application on the Control 
Display. 

Selecting a detour 

Select the f* symbol: "Detour". 

"Dynamic guidance" is activated for the current 
destination guidance. 

Dynamic route planning 

When "Dynamic guidance" is selected, the 
route will be changed automatically in the event 
of a traffic obstruction. The system will not point 
out traffic obstructions on the original route. 
Depending on the road type and the kind and 
extent of the traffic obstruction, the newly 
calculated route may lead through the traffic 
obstruction. 


136 


Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 


What to do if 


What to do if... 

> The current position cannot be displayed? 
The position is in an unrecognized region, in 
a poor reception area, or the system is in the 
process of determining the position. 
Reception is generally available when you 
are in the open. 

> Destination guidance does not accept an 
address without the street name? 

A downtown area cannot be determined for 
the town or city that has been entered. Input 
any street in the selected town/city and 
start destination guidance. 

> The destination guidance does not accept a 
destination? 

The destination data are not contained in 
the navigation data. Choose a destination 
as close as possible to the original one. 

> The letters for a destination cannot be 
selected during destination entry? 

The stored data do not contain the data of 
the destination. Select a destination that is 
as close as possible to the original. 

t> The map view is displayed in black and 
white? 

When the traffic bulletin map is activated, 
the Control Display changes to a black and 
white display. This enables a better view of 
the traffic bulletins. 

> Voice instructions are no longer issued 
before intersections during destination 
guidance? 

The area has not yet been fully recorded, or 
you have left the recommended route and 
the system requires a few seconds to calcu¬ 
late a new route suggestion. 


137 

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 


Navigation 





Entertainment 


Operation of the radio, CD equipment and 
external audio devices as well as their tone 
settings are described in this chapter. 



Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 


On/off and tone 


On/off and tone 


The following audio and video sources share 
the same control elements and adjustments: 

> Radio 

> CD/DVD player 

> CD/DVD changer* 

> Video* 

> External devices, e.g., MP3 player 

Controls 

The audio and video sources can be controlled 
using the: 

> Buttons near the CD/DVD player 

> iDrive 

> Buttons on the steering wheel, refer 
to page 10 

> Programmable memory keys, refer 
to page 21 

> Voice activation system 

Buttons near the CD/DVD player 



1 Sound output for entertainment on/off, 
volume 

> Press: switch on/off 

When the system is switched on, the 
most recently selected radio station or 
track is played. 

> Turn: Adjusting volume 

2 |y| Ejecting a CD/DVD 

3 CD/DVD drive 


4 FM/AM: change the radio station 
waveband 

5 MODE: change the audio and video 
sources 

6 L J Station scan/track search 

> Change the radio station 

> Select the track for the CD/DVD player, 
CD/DVD changer and certain multimedia 
devices 

Switching on/off 

In order to switch the entertainment sound out¬ 
put on and off: 

Press button 1 next to the CD/DVD player. 

This symbol on the Control Display indicates 
that sound output is switched off. 

The sound output is available for approx. 

20 minutes after the ignition is switched off. 

For sound output, switch the unit back on. 

Adjusting volume 

Turn button 1 next to the CD/DVD player until 
the desired volume is obtained. 

You can also adjust the volume with buttons on 
the steering wheel, refer to page 10. 

Tone control 

You can alter various tone settings, e.g., treble 
and bass or the speed-dependent volume 
increase. 

The tone settings are applied to all audio 
sources. 

The settings are stored for the remote control 
currently in use. 


140 

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 













Treble, bass, balance, fader 

> "Balance": left/right volume distribution 

> "Fader": front/rear volume distribution 


Adjustments 

1. "CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings". 

2. "Tone" 



3. Select the desired tone setting. 


Equalizer* 

You can set individual sound frequency ranges. 


1. 

"CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or" 

Settings". 

2. 

"Tone" 


3. 

"Equalizer" 


4. 

Select the desired setting. 



11 ?r EmwJkw 






\ I TOO Hz - ; 

* \ \ 


‘ . jm Hr -r_T_ 

4 \ \ 


500 He - i 

4 J 


> +ij 1kHz 

4 (J 


ItK 2 k Hz 

+ 


If 5 kHz _ \ 

f If 

mil *u ! 

4 / nm 

5. 

To adjust: Turn the controller. 


6. 

To store: Press the controller. 



Treble - +- I 

r * I ] 

Balance L ! R 1 

Fador F j _ ft 

Equal tier 
U Surround 

Volume settings / 1 


4. To adjust: Turn the controller. 

5. To store: Press the controller. 


Multi-channel playback, surround* 

You can choose between stereo and multi¬ 
channel playback, surround. 

1. "CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings". 

2. "Tone" 

3. "Surround" 


■\ \ r ** Tgnc 

i 

\ { Treble - - 

p + \ \ 

1 i 


• t l I 

m —< Balance L 

R 1 

' r ■ Fad or F_ { 

R 

■f r ^ Equalize 


[J ' tar Surround 

Volume settings / 1 


Multi-channel playback, surround, is simulated 
when playing back an audio track in stereo. 

Surround is automatically activated or deacti¬ 
vated, depending on the audio track selected. 



141 

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 


j Communications Entertainment Navigation 
















On/off and tone 


Volume 

> "Speed volume": speed-dependent volume 
control 

> "PDC"*: volume of the PDC signal tone rel¬ 
ative to the entertainment sound output 

> "Gong": volume of the signal tone, e.g., for 
the "Fasten safety belt" reminder, relative 
to the entertainment sound output 

Adjustments 

1. "CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings". 

2. "Tone" 

3. "Volume settings" 

4. Select the desired volume setting. 


ft \ \^ Volume setting* l! 

Speed volume 

\ \ 

— w 

■fr 11 

t Volume setting: 


’ * PDC 

4- 


A 

ml 1 1 

1 I 

1 f 


Resetting tone settings 

You can reset all tone settings to the default 
setting. 

1. "CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings". 

2. "Tone" 

3. "Reset" 


5. To adjust: Turn the controller. 

6. To store: Press the controller. 


142 


Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 




Radio 


Your radio is designed for reception of the fol¬ 
lowing stations: 

> FM and AM 

> HD Radio* 

> Satellite radio* 

Selecting a station 



Press the button if the sound output is 
switched off. 

1. "Radio" 



2. "FM" or "AM" 


3. Select the desired station. 



The selected station is stored for the remote 
control currently in use. 


Changing stations 

Turn the controller and press it 
or 

ESfl Press the button for the corresponding 
direction 

or 

Press the buttons on the steering wheel, refer 
to page 10. 

Selecting a station manually 

Station selection using the frequency. 

1. "Radio" 

2. "FM"or"AM" 

3. "Manual" 

4. Select the frequency: turn the controller. 



To store the station: press the controller for an 
extended period. 


143 

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 


Entertainment 






























Radio 


Storing a station 

Via iDrive 

1. "Radio" 

2. "FM"or"AM" 

3. Select the desired station. 



4. Press the controller for an extended period. 

5. Select the desired memory location. 

The stations are stored for the remote control 
currently in use. 

Via programmable memory keys 

You can also store a station on the programma¬ 
ble memory keys, refer to page 21 . 

1. Select a station. 

2. ... P. Press the desired button 
fora longer period. 

Radio Data System RDS* 

In the FM waveband, additional information is 
transmitted via RDS. If the reception conditions 
are good, the station names are shown on the 
Control Display. Where reception is poor or in 
the event of interference, it may take some time 
before the station names will appear in the 
display. 

Switching the RDS on/off 

1. "Radio" 

2. "FM" 

3. Open "Options". 



The setting is stored for the remote control cur¬ 
rently in use. 


HD Radio* 

Many stations broadcast both analog and digi¬ 
tal signals. If a digital radio network is available, 
these stations can be received digitally and thus 
with better sound quality. 

License conditions 

HD Radio™ technology is manufactured under 
license from iBiquity Digital Corp. U.S. and For¬ 
eign Patents. HD Radio™ and the HD and HD 
Radio logos are proprietary trademarks of iBiq¬ 
uity Digital Corp. 

Switching digital radio reception on/off 

1. "Radio" 

2. "FM" or "AM" 

3. Open "Options". 

4. "HD Radio" 

The setting is stored for the remote control cur¬ 
rently in use. 

This symbol is displayed when a station is 
received digitally. 

In areas in which the station is not continuously 
received in digital mode, the playback switches 
between analog and digital reception. Due to 
time delayed broadcasting, there may be repe¬ 
titions or interruptions. In this case, switch off 
digital radio reception. 


144 


Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 




















Displaying additional information 

Some stations broadcast additional information 
on the current track, such as the name of the 
artist. 

1. Select the desired station. 

2. Open "Options". 

3. "Station info" 


Deleting a station 

1. "Radio" 

2. "Presets" 

3. Select the desired station. 

4. Open "Options". 

5. "Delete entry" 


Selecting a substation 

1. Select the desired station. 

2. Press the controller. 

3. Select the substation. 

Presets 

It is possible to store up to 40 stations. 


Calling up a station 

1. "Radio" 

2. "Presets" 

3. Select the desired station. 


Storing a station 

The station currently selected is stored. 

1. "Radio" 

2. "Presets" 

3. "Store station" 



4. Select the desired memory location. 

The list of stored stations is stored for the 
remote control currently in use. 

You can also store the stations on the program¬ 
mable memory keys, refer to page 21 . 


145 

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 


Entertainment 





Satellite radio 


Satellite radio* 


General information 

The channels are offered in predefined pack¬ 
ages. The packages must be enabled by tele¬ 
phone. 


Navigation bar overview 


Symbol 

Function 


Changing the list view 


Selecting a category 


Direct channel entry 

© 

Timeshift 


Opening the favorites, opening 
the My Favorites category 


Managing the favorites 


Traffic Jump 


The functions of the navigation bar symbols can 
also be stored on the programmable memory 
buttons, refer to page 21 . 


Managing a subscription 

To be able to enable or unsubscribe from the 
channels, you must have reception. It is usually 
at its best when you have an unobstructed view 
of the sky. The channel name is displayed in the 
status line. 

Enabling the channels 

The Unsubscribed Channels category contains 
all disabled channels. 

1. "Radio" 

2. "Satellite radio" 


3. Q, "Categories" 



4. Select the Unsubscribed Channels 
category. 

5. Select the desired channel. 

The phone number and an electronic serial 
number, ESN, are displayed. 

6. Select the phone number to have the chan¬ 
nel enabled. 



You can unsubscribe from the channels again 
via this phone number. 

Unsubscribing from channels 

1. "Radio" 

2. "Satellite radio" 

3. Open "Options" 

4. "Manage subscription" 


146 


Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 














The phone number and an electronic serial 
number, ESN, are displayed. 

5. Call Sirius to unsubscribe from the 
channels. 


Via direct channel entry 

1. "Radio" 

2. "Satellite radio" 

3. c* "Select channel" 

4. Turn the controller until the desired channel 
is reached and press the controller. 

Storing a channel 

1. "Radio" 

2. "Satellite radio" 

3. If necessary, open "All Channels" or the 
desired category. 


Selecting a channel 

You can only listen to enabled channels. 

The selected channel is stored for the remote 
control currently in use. 

Via iDrive 

1. "Radio" 

2. "Satellite radio" 

3. Select "All Channels" or the desired 
category. 

4. Select the desired channel. 



Via the button in the area of the CD/ 
DVD player 

ESI Press the button for the corresponding 
direction. 

The next channel is selected. 


Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 


4. Select the desired channel. 

5. Press the controller again. 

6. Press the controller again to confirm the 
highlighted channel. 


\ 

n 




A~ 

_ 1 


m 


Thy fi dy; 
Over My 



7. Select the desired memory location. 

The channels are stored for the remote control 
currently in use. 


You can also store the channels on the pro¬ 
grammable memory keys, refer to page 21 . 


Changing the list view 

The list view changes every time the first sym¬ 
bol on the navigation bar is pressed. 
Information on the channel is displayed. 


Symbol 

Function 

r* 

Channel name 


Artist 


Track 

2 602 883 

147 

-©08/09 BMW AG 


Entertainment 

























Satellite radio 


Selecting a category 


Timeshift menu 


1. "Radio" 

2. "Satellite radio" 

3. Q, "Categories" 

4. Select the desired category. 

Timeshift 

Approx, one hour of the program being broad¬ 
cast on the channel currently being listened to 
is stored in a buffer. The signal must be avail¬ 
able. The stored audio track can be played with 
a delay following the live broadcast. When the 
buffer is full, the older tracks are overwritten. 
The buffer is cleared when a new channel is 
selected. 


Symbol 

Function 

0 

Go to the live broadcast 

>n 

Playback/pause 

l> 

Next track 

W 

Previous track 


Fast forward 

<1 

Reverse 


Storing favorites 

Up to 30 favorites can be stored in the favorites 
list. Available favorites are artist, track, game, 
league and team. 


Opening the timeshift function 

1. "Radio" 

2. "Satellite radio" 

3. Open "Options". 

4. © "Replay - Time Shift" 

A new panel opens. 



> The red arrow shows the current playback 
position. 

> The time difference to the live broadcast is 
displayed next to the buffer bar. 


Storing the artist, track or game 

It is only possible to store favorites that are cur¬ 
rently being broadcast. The channel informa¬ 
tion must be available. 

1. "Radio" 

2. "Satellite radio" 

3. If necessary, select "All Channels" or the 
desired category. 

4. Select the desired channel. 

5. Press the controller again. 

6. Select the artist, track or game. 

Storing the league or team 

Leagues or teams can be added to the favorites 
from a selection list. 

1. "Radio" 

2. "Satellite radio" 

3. "Manage favorites" 

4. "Add sports information" 


> If playback is live, "live" is displayed next to 
the buffer bar. 


148 


Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 








5. Select the desired league. 

6. Select "Add all teams" or the desired team. 

Opening the favorites 

When an activated favorite is playing, the fol¬ 
lowing message appears for approx. 20 sec¬ 
onds: "Playing favorite!". 

Select "Favorites" while the message is 
being displayed. 



The displayed favorite is played. 

If there is no message, the system changes to 
the My Favorites category. All favorites cur¬ 
rently being broadcast can be selected from 
a list. 

Managing the favorites 

Activating/deactivating the favorites 

Favorites can be activated and deactivated glo¬ 
bally and individually. 

1. "Satellite radio" 

2. +jlj- "Manage favorites" 


3. Select "Activate alert" or the desired 
favorite. 

The setting is stored for the remote control cur¬ 
rently in use. 

Deleting favorites 

1. "Satellite radio" 

2. "Manage favorites" 

3. Highlight the desired favorite. 

4. Open "Options". 

5. "Delete entry" 

Traffic Jump 

Traffic and weather information for a selected 
region is broadcast every few minutes. 

Selecting a region 

1. "Radio" 

2. "Satellite radio" 

3. Open "Options". 

4. "Set Jump" 

5. Select the desired region. 

The region is stored for the remote control cur¬ 
rently in use. 

Activating/deactivating the jump 

1. "Radio" 

2. "Satellite radio" 

3. /I "Jump to:" 

Information for the selected region is broadcast 
as soon as it is available. 

A new panel opens. 

Canceling the Traffic Jump: "Cancel". 


Symbol 

Meaning 


Information will be broadcast 


shortly. 

a 

Information is currently being 


broadcast. 


Select one of the symbols to deactivate 
Traffic Jump. 


149 

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 


Entertainment 







Satellite radio 


Automatic update 

About twice a year, Sirius performs an update of 
the channel names and positions. The update 
takes place automatically and may take several 
minutes. 


Notes 

> Reception may not be available in some sit¬ 
uations, such as under certain environmen¬ 
tal or topographic conditions. The satellite 
radio cannot influence this. 

> The signal may not be available in tunnels or 
underground garages; next to tall buildings; 
or near trees, mountains or other powerful 
sources of radio interference. 


150 


Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 


CD/DVD player and CD/DVD changer* 


CD/DVD playback Starting playback 



Inserting a CD/DVD 

Insert the CD/DVD into the drive with the 
printed side up. The CD/DVD is drawn in auto¬ 
matically. 

Playback starts automatically if the sound out¬ 
put is on. When playing CDs/DVDs with com¬ 
pressed audio files, it may take several minutes 
to read in the data, depending on the directory 
structure. 

Playable formats 

CD/DVD player 

> DVD: DVD-ROM, DVD-R, DVD+R, DVD- 
RW, DVD+RW, DVD-R DL, DVD+R DL, DVD 
audio (video part only), DVD video 

> CD: CD-ROM, CD-R, CD-RW, CD-DA, 
VCD, SVCD 

> Compressed audio files: MP3, WMA, AAC 
CD changer* 

> CD: CD-ROM, CD-R, CD-RW, CD-DA 
DVD changer* 

> DVD: DVD-ROM, DVD-R, DVD+R, DVD- 
RW, DVD+RW, DVD-R DL, DVD+R DL, DVD 
audio (video part only), DVD video, CD: CD- 
ROM, CD-R, CD-RW, CD-DA, VCD, SVCD 


Via iDrive 

Fill the CD/DVD magazine and insert it, refer 
to page 155. 

To start playback if a CD is already located in 
the player or changer: 

1. "CD/Multimedia" 


M l 

Mjjpi mt.wu 


H 1 

|L 

ftadio 


TakjpiiyMtr 

i •, 

Navigation 


/ Contacts 

r / 

BMW Assist 

B/ 

Vehicle info 

1/ 

Settings i 

2. "CD/DVD" 


3. Select the desired CD or DVD: 



Ejecting a CD/DVD 

Q Press the button next to the CD/DVD player. 
The CD/DVD emerges slightly from the drive. 


Symbol Function 

© CD/DVD player 

CD/DVD changer 



151 

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 


Communications Entertainment 





















CD/DVD player and CD/DVD changer 


Audio playback 

Selecting a track using the button 

!■! Press the button for the appropriate 
direction as often as necessary until the desired 
track is reached. 

Selecting a track using iDrive 

Audio CDs 

1. "CD/Multimedia" 

2. "CD/DVD" 

3. Select the desired CD or DVD. 

4. Select the desired track to begin playback. 


l\\\ CO 

—1- 

Bill /i, Biutv.Sfinritifrtairi 

■tt m 

l 

■ r H Store in vehicle 

. 1 

Nowhere 

You'll Be Comm' Down 

|| 

If/ f t LrvJn' In The f uture 



CDs/CDs/DVDs with compressed audio 
files* 

Depending on the data, some letters and num¬ 
bers of the CD/DVD may not be displayed cor¬ 
rectly. 

1. "CD/Multimedia" 

2. "CD/DVD" 

3. Select the desired CD or DVD. 

4. Select the directory, if necessary. 

To change to a higher level directory: Move 
the controller to the left. 


i\\\ "'if CO 

ill 

- f!_— 

_ _ „ 1 

Hilt fa 

nil _ 

* \ Prince 

r 

,. lvi4:j i 

p ^ 

| i v v Santana 

n 71 

iij r j 1 F Sportfreunde Stiller 

■ f J 

D / | | 

If Ilf Tom Jone-i 

0 ' / 


5. Select a track and press the controller. 


B Store in vehicle i (* 

{Da Le) Yako 
v' Ah ka Bamba 

LnfftJOtt EspifiArttl (re... 


Displaying information about the 
track* 

If information about a track has been stored, it is 


displayed automatically: 

1\ \l . co 

■111 it, SdUlcIMd 

-M 

■ r Prince 


r V Santana 

■o ■ 

Sportfreunde Stiller 

O 1 

p/ F J Tom ionfrt 

mill 

0 I 


> Artist 

> Album title 

> Number of tracks on the CD/DVD 

> Track file name 

Random play sequence 

The tracks on the current CD/DVD are played 
once each in random order. 

1. "CD/Multimedia" 

2. "CD/DVD" 

3. Select the desired CD or DVD. 

4. Open "Options". 


152 

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 







5. "Random" 



Optiom 


ft 


\ 


O'* Spjlit iuedn 


1 


Switch on Control display 


CDs/DVDs with compressed audio files: the 
directories and the tracks contained therein are 
played back in random sequence. 

Random mode is switched off if the audio 
source is changed or the ignition is switched off. 

Fast forward/reverse 

DU Press and hold the button for the corre¬ 
sponding direction. 

Automatic repeat* 

Selected tracks, directories or CDs/DVDs are 
repeated automatically. 


Video playback* 

Country codes 

Only DVDs with the code of the home region 
can be played back; also refer to the information 
on your DVD. 


Code Region 

1 USA, Canada 

2 Japan, Europe, Middle East, South 
Africa 

3 Southeast Asia 

4 Australia, Central and South Amer¬ 
ica, New Zealand 

5 Northwest Asia, North Africa 

6 China 

0 All regions 


Start playback 

For your own safety, the video image is only dis¬ 
played up to approx. 2 mph/3 km/h, and in some 
market-specific versions only with the parking 
brake applied. 


DVD video 

1. "CD/Multimedia" 

2. "CD/DVD" 

3. Select a DVD with video content. 

4. 5 ^" DVD menu" 



5. Start the DVD via the DVD menu. 


VCD/SVCD 

1. "CD/Multimedia" 

2. "CD/DVD" 

3. Select a CD/DVD with video content. 

4. 5] "Select track" 



5. Select the desired track. 
The CD/DVD is started. 


153 

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 


Entertainment 
















CD/DVD player and CD/DVD changer 


Video menu 

To open the Video menu: 

1. Turn the controller during playback. 

2. Press the controller when "Back" is dis¬ 
played. 

The Video menu is displayed: 


Symbol 

Function 


Open the DVD menu* 

> 

Start playback 

II 

Pause 

□ 

Stop 

N 

Next chapter/next track 

W 

Previous chapter/previous 
track 


Fast forward 

<1 

Reverse 


In fast forward/reverse: the speed increases 
every time the controller is pressed. To stop, 
start playback. 


DVD menu 

1. If necessary, turn the controller to open the 
video menu. 

2. iK? "DVD menu" 

The DVD menu is displayed. The display 
depends on the contents of the DVD. 

> To select menu items: move and press the 
controller. 

> To change to the Video menu: turn the con¬ 
troller and select "Back". 

DVD/VCD settings 

For some DVDs, settings can only be made via 
the DVD menu; refer also to the information on 
your DVD. 


Language* 

1. Turn the controller during playback. 

2. Open "Options". 

3. "Audio/language" 


\ Option; _V 

IV Switch off Control display I 1 

\ I DV/D video 

V, Audlo/lanatiagfi 
* Subtitles 

r Display f ettrngs 

Additional options J / 

f f CD/Wtulliftjudjd / J 


4. Select the desired language. 

The languages that are available depend on 
the DVD. 

Subtitles* 

Subtitles can be selected if they are contained 
on the DVD. 

1. Turn the controller during playback. 

2. Open "Options". 

3. "Subtitles" 

4. Select the desired language or "Do not dis¬ 
play subtitles". 


V v* Subtitle* 

Du rrul liupldy >ubtitlu^ 
I German 

m English 


Brightness, contrast, color 

1. Turn the controller during playback. 

2. Open "Options". 

3. "Display settings" 


154 


Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 





4. "Brightness", "Contrast" or "Color' 



5. Turn the controller until the desired setting 
is displayed, and then press the controller. 

Zoom 

Display the video image on the full screen. 

1. Turn the controller during playback. 

2. Open "Options". 

3. "Additional options" 

4. "Zoom mode" 



Selecting track 

DVD video: 

1. Turn the controller during playback. 

2. Open "Options". 

3. "Additional options" 

4. "Select title" 

5. Select the desired track. 
VCD/SVCD: 

1. [?| "Select track" 

2. Select the desired track. 


Camera angle* 

The camera angle depends on the DVD. 

1. Turn the controller during playback. 

2. Open "Options". 

3. "Additional options" 

4. "Viewing angle" 

5. Select the desired camera angle. 

Opening the main menu, back 

These functions are not contained on every 
DVD. Therefore, they may not be available 
for use. 


CD/DVD changer* 



The BMW CD/DVD changer for six CDs/DVDs is 
located in the glove compartment. 

Press the lever. 

The CD/DVD changer drops down. 

To close the CD/DVD changer, fold it back up. 


155 

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 


j Communications Entertainment Navigation | 


























CD/DVD player and CD/DVD changer 


Controls and displays 



1 2 3 4 2 5 



1 Empty CD/DVD compartments 

2 LEDs on the CD/DVD slot 

flash when a CD/DVD can be inserted. 

3 Buttons for the CD/DVD compartments 
LED lights up when the CD/DVD compart¬ 
ment is filled. 

4 CD/DVD slot 

5 Load CD/DVD compartments 


Filling the CD/DVD changer 

1. H23 Press the button. 

The LED on the first empty compartment 
flashes. 


Select a different CD/DVD compartment, if 
needed: 

WSM ... M itf Press the button. 


3. When the LEDs 2 on the CD/DVD slot 4 
flash, insert a single CD/DVD in the middle. 
The CD/DVD is drawn in automatically and 
placed into the selected CD/DVD com¬ 
partment. 



Do not insert a CD/DVD until the 
LEDs 2 on the CD/DVD slot 4 flash, as 


otherwise the CD/DVD or the CD/DVD 
changer could be damaged. 

Do not continue to push on the CD/DVD; 
this may cause it to jam and prevent it from 
being able to eject again.◄ 


4. To fill additional CD/DVD compartments: 
Repeat steps 1 to 3. 


Filling empty CD/DVD compartments 

1. fiSa Press the button for a longer period. 
The LEDs on the empty CD/DVD compart¬ 
ments flash. 


2. When the LEDs 2 on the CD/DVD slot 4 
flash, insert a single CD/DVD in the middle. 
The CD/DVD is drawn in automatically and 
placed into the first empty CD/DVD com¬ 
partment. 

□ Do not insert a CD/DVD until the 

LEDs 2 on the CD/DVD slot 4 flash, as 
otherwise the CD/DVD or the CD/DVD 
changer could be damaged. 

Do not continue to push on the CD/DVD; 
this may cause it to jam and prevent it from 
being able to eject again.◄ 

3. Wait until the CD/DVD is drawn in. 

4. To fill additional CD/DVD compartments: 
Repeat steps 2 and 3. 

After they are inserted, it may take several min¬ 
utes for the CDs/DVDs to be read in. 


Removing the CDs/DVDs individually 

1. g Press the button. 

2. Si ... Press a button to select a CD/ 
DVD compartment. 

The CD/DVD is partially ejected from the 
CD/DVD changer. 

3. Remove the CD/DVD. 



If the CD/DVD is not removed, it is drawn 
in again after approx. 10 seconds.◄ 


Removing all CDs/DVDs 

1. g Press the button for a longer period. 

One after the other, the CDs/DVDs are par¬ 
tially ejected out of the CD/DVD changer. 

2. Remove the CDs/DVDs. 


156 


Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 

















Malfunctions 

If all LEDs on the CD/DVD changer flash rapidly, 
the system is malfunctioning. 

To correct the malfunction: 

1. Press the flE2J or 0 button. 

The CD/DVD inserted last is ejected. 

2. Remove the CD/DVD. 

If the LEDs stop flashing rapidly, the CD/DVD 
changer is functional again. 

Notes 

BMW CD/DVD players and changers are 
officially designated Class 1 laser prod¬ 
ucts. Do not operate if the cover is damaged; 
otherwise, severe eye damage can result. 

Do not use self-recorded CDs/DVDs with labels 
applied as these can become detached during 
playback due to heat build-up and can cause 
irreparable damage to the device. 

Only use round CDs/DVDs with a standard 
diameter of 4.7 in/12 cm and do not play CDs/ 
DVDs with an adapter, e.g., Single-CDs; other¬ 
wise, the CDs or the adapter can jam and will no 
longer eject. 

Do not use a combined CD/DVD, e.g., DVD plus ; 
otherwise, the CD/DVD can jam and will no 
longer eject.◄ 

General malfunctions 

BMW CD/DVD changers and players have been 
optimized for performance in vehicles. In some 
instances they may be more sensitive to faulty 
CDs/DVDs than stationary devices would be. 

If a CD/DVD cannot be played, first check if it 
has been inserted correctly. 

Humidity 

High levels of humidity can lead to condensa¬ 
tion on the CD/DVD or the laser's scan lens and 
temporarily prevent playback. 


Malfunctions with individual CDs/DVDs 

If malfunctions occur only with particular CDs/ 
DVDs, this may be due to one of the following 
reasons. 

Self-recorded CDs/DVDs 

Possible reasons for malfunctions with self- 
recorded CDs/DVDs are inconsistent data-cre- 
ation or recording processes, or poor quality or 
old age of the CD/DVD blank. 

Only label CDs/DVDs on the top, with a pen 
designed for this purpose. 

Damage 

Avoid leaving fingerprints, as well as dust, 
scratches or moisture on the CDs/DVDs. 

Keep CDs/DVDs in protective sleeves or cases. 
Do not subject CDs/DVDs to temperatures over 
122 °F 15 0 °C, high levels of humidity or direct 
sunlight. 

CDs/DVDs with copy protection 

CDs/DVDs are often copy-protected by the 
manufacturer. This can mean that some CDs/ 
DVDs cannot be played or can only be played to 
a limited extent. 

MACROVISION 

This product contains copyrighted technology 
that is based on multiple registered US patents 
and the intellectual property of the Macrovision 
Corporation and other manufacturers. The use 
of this copy protection must be approved by 
Macrovision. Media protected by this product - 
unless otherwise agreed with Macrovision - 
may only be used for private purposes. Copying 
of this technology is prohibited. 



Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 










Music collection 


Music collection 


Storing music 

The music tracks from CDs, DVDs and USB 
devices can be stored in the music collection in 
the vehicle and played from there. 

> Audio CD: tracks are converted into a com¬ 
pressed audio format when they are stored. 
If available, information on the album, such 
as the artist, is stored as well. 

> CD/DVD or USB device with compressed 
audio files: The entire content of the CD/ 
DVD or the USB device is stored in the vehi¬ 
cle as an album. After storing, the tracks and 
directories can be deleted individually. Files 
are only stored in the WMA, MP3, and AAC 
formats. 

Tracks with DRM copy protection can 
be stored in the vehicle but cannot be 
played back. 

Regularly back up the music data; other¬ 
wise, it could be lost if there is a fault on 
the hard drive.◄ 

# Music recognition technology and 
related data are provided by 
Gracenote®. Gracenote® is the industry stan¬ 
dard in music recognition technology and 
related content delivery. For more information, 
please visit www.gracenote.com. 

CD and music-related data from Gracenote, 
Inc., copyright 

© 2000-2009 Gracenote. Gracenote Software, 
copyright 2000-2009 Gracenote. This product 
and service may practice one or more of the fol¬ 
lowing U.S. Patents: #5,987,525; #6,061,680; 
#6,154,773, #6,161,132, #6,230,192, 
#6,230,207, #6,240,459, #6,330,593, and 
other patents issued or pending. Some services 
supplied under license from Open Globe, Inc. 
for U.S. Patent: 6.304.523. 


Gracenote and CDDB are registered trade 
marks of Gracenote. The Gracenote logo, the 
logo typeface and the "powered by Gracenote" 
logo are trade marks of Gracenote. 

Storing from CDs/DVDs 

CDs/DVDs can only be stored from the CD/DVD 
player. 

1. Insert a CD/DVD into the CD/DVD player. 

2. "CD/Multimedia" 

3. "CD/DVD" 

4. © Select the symbol for the CD/DVD 
player. 

5. "Store in vehicle" 


V\U 4 

m\ \\‘ 

udiu CD 

\ 

■LI l 1 

Hi 11 

Lj 

\ 

1/14 || 

l. r JK 

53 Store rn vehicle 

_1 


Title oi 

I I 

ml 

Title 02 


■ iff 

Title Oi 



The music collection is displayed. 

The tracks are stored and played back in 
sequence out of the music collection. 

Observe the following during the storage 
process: 

Do not switch back to the CD/DVD player and 
do not remove the CD/DVD from the CD/DVD 
player as this will interrupt the storage process. 
You can switch to the other audio sources with¬ 
out interrupting the storage process. Tracks 
from the current CD/DVD that have already 
been stored can be called up. 



158 


Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 




Interrupting storage 

1. "CD/Multimedia" 

2. "CD/DVD" 

3. "Storing..." 


ji\_\ 

d/dvd 

_ 1_ 

■'ll ft Storing. \ , 

■ i .. 

u W 

H | 

si? Audio CO 

1 1 


Sr Beautiful 



4. "Cancel storing" 

The storage process is interrupted and can be 
continued at any time. 


Continuing the storage process 

1. "CD/Multimedia" 

2. "CD/DVD" 

3. ® Select the symbol for the CD/DVD 
player. 

4. "Continue storing" 

Storage of the CD continues at the beginning of 
the track at which storage was interrupted. 

Album information 


It is only possible to store music from a 
USB device via the USB interface in the 
glove compartment.4 


1. Connect the USB device to the USB inter¬ 
face in the glove compartment. 

2. "CD/Multimedia" 

3. "Music collection" 

4. Open "Options". 

5. "Music data import/export" 

6. "Import music (USB)" 



linpou iruniL (USB) 


Music collection management 
Backup music on USB 
Restore musit from USB 


Music, playing 

Music search 

All tracks for which additional information has 
been stored can be accessed by the music 
search. Tracks without additional information 
can be called up via the corresponding album. 


During storage, information such as the name 
of the artist is stored with the track, if this infor¬ 
mation is available in the vehicle database or on 
the CD. 

To update the database, contact your service 
center. 

Storing from a USB device 

To store music, a suitable device must be con¬ 
nected to the USB interface in the glove com¬ 
partment. 

> Suitable devices: USB mass storage 
devices, such as USB flash drives or MP3 
players with a USB interface. 

> Unsuitable media: USB hard drives, USB 
hubs, USB memory card readers with multi¬ 
ple inserts, Apple iPod/iPhone. 


1. "CD/Multimedia" 

2. "Music collection" 

3. "Music search" 


'37 Mu>n; ujilttftiyn 

_ 

Music search I, 

Current playback 

w 1 

TOp L it] 

Ml 

r , Audia-CD 1 


■/ Frank 


LftU 1 

n 

uesungssgngs 

Cl 1 




159 

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 


I Communications Entertainment 














Music collection 


4. Select the desired category. 



5. To select the desired entry: 

> Open "A-Z search" and enter the 
desired entry. 

or 

> Select the desired entry from the list. 

6. Select additional categories if desired. 

The tracks found are listed in alphabetical 
order. 

Not all categories need to be selected. For 
example, to search for all tracks by a certain 
artist, call up that artist only. All of the tracks 
by that artist are then displayed. 

7. "Start play" 

Restarting the music search 

"New search" 


Current playback 

The list of tracks that was generated last by the 
music search or the album selected last. 

1. "Current playback" 



2. Select the desired track, if necessary. 


Top 50 

List of the 50 most frequently played tracks. 

1. "CD/Multimedia" 

2. "Music collection" 

3. "Top 50" 

4. Select the desired track, if necessary. 


Albums 

All stored albums, listed in order of their storage 
dates. Symbols indicate the format. 


Music search by voice* 

For instructions on the voice activation system, 
refer to page 23. 

1. Press the Of button on the steering wheel. 

2. >Music search< 

3. Open the desired category, e.g., 
>Select artist<. 


Symbol 

Format 


Audio CD 

a 

Compressed audio files 


1. "CD/Multimedia" 

2. "Music collection" 

3. Select the desired album. 


4. Say the desired entry in the list. 

5. Select additional categories if desired. 
To select a track directly: 

>Title ...< 

Say the voice command and the name of the 
desired track in one sentence. 


i \ V i'5? M u>iC U y n 

II 

Music search 

\ \ 

Current playback 

Ur. 

1 —^ Tftp M] 

su 

* r Audi a-CD 1 

:C\ 

■flK Hit£ 


i 1 • J 8-rsnk 

M ■ 

| j UESUNGSSONGS 

o / /' 


160 

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 









Depending on the album, the tracks or the 
subdirectories of the album are displayed. 
The first track is played automatically, if 
possible. 

4. To select tracks, change directories if 
needed. To go up one level in the directory, 
move the controller to the left. 

Random play sequence 

All tracks of the selection are played back in 

random order. 

1. "CD/Multimedia" 

2. "Music collection" 

3. Open "Options". 

4. "Random" 


i\ v i i 

Dpt tern 


Km 

Free memory 

Delete mutk collection 


m 11 

OJJM'iifTirnpdJd 


\ ' 

□ Random 


mill 

mill 

Mu* it data imporl/cKpurt 

1 


Managing music 

Albums 

Renaming an album 

The name of the album, if available, is automat¬ 
ically entered when the album is stored. If the 
name is unknown, it can be changed later. 

An album cannot be renamed while a track from 
that album is being played. 

1. "CD/Multimedia" 

2. "Music collection" 

3. Highlight the album. 

4. Open "Options". 


5. "Rename album" 


|V\V Option* 

H11 Audm-CD > 

Hi V1 ' 

r Oclere album 

■* Mu*k cttltactlofi 

fc ? f / Musk data import/e* port 

' | free memory 

V, 1 ' I Oulu to iiiusEl cEjIlmLtiui] 


6. Select the letters individually. 

Deleting an album 

An album cannot be deleted while a track from 
that album is being played. 

1. "CD/Multimedia" 

2. "Music collection" 

3. Highlight the album. 

4. Open "Options". 

5. "Delete album" 

Deleting a track and directory 

A track cannot be deleted while it is being 
played back. 

A directory cannot be deleted while a track from 
that directory is being played back. 

1. "CD/Multimedia" 

2. "Music collection" 

3. Highlight the directory or track. 

4. Open "Options". 

5. "Delete folder" or "Delete track". 

Free memory capacity 

Display the free memory capacity in the music 
collection. 

1. "CD/Multimedia" 

2. "Music collection" 

3. Open "Options". 

4. "Free memory" 


161 

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 


j Communications Entertainment Navigation j || 













Music collection 


Music collection 

Backing up the music collection 

The entire music collection can be stored on a 
USB medium. Make sure there is enough free 
memory capacity on the USB device. 

Depending on the number of tracks, backing up 
the music collection may take several hours. 
Therefore, it is best to perform the backup dur¬ 
ing a long trip. 

1. Start the engine. 

2. Connect the USB device to the USB inter¬ 
face in the glove compartment. 

3. "CD/Multimedia" 

4. "Music collection" 

5. Open "Options". 

6. "Music data import/export" 



Fret 1 memory 

Delete niuik collection 



□ Random 


Musk data Imporl/export 


7. "Backup music on USB" 



Restoring the music collection in the 
vehicle 

When storing from the USB device, the 
music collection existing in the vehicle is 
replaced. ◄ 

1. "CD/Multimedia" 

2. "Music collection" 

3. Open "Options". 

4. "Music data import/export" 

5. "Restore music from USB" 

Deleting the music collection 

1. "CD/Multimedia" 

2. "Music collection" 

3. Open "Options". 

4. "Delete music collection" 



162 


Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 


















External devices 


AUX-IN port 

You can connect an external audio device, for 
instance an MP3 player, and play audio tracks 
over the car's loudspeaker system. You can 
adjust the tone using iDrive. 


Connecting 

Lift up the center armrest. 



Connection for audio playback: 

TRS connector 1/8 in/3.5 mm 

To play audio tracks over the car's loudspeaker 
system, connect the headset or line-out port of 
the external device to the AUX-IN port. 

Starting audio playback 

Connect the audio device, switch it on and 
select a track. Operate the system on the audio 
device. 

Via iDrive 

1. "CD/Multimedia" 

2. If applicable, "External devices" 

3. ✓ "AUX front" 

Adjusting volume 

The volume of the sound output depends on 
the audio device. If this volume differs markedly 
from the volume of the other audio sources, it is 
advisable to adjust the volumes. 

1. "CD/Multimedia" 

2. If applicable, "External devices" 


3. ✓ "AUX front" 

4. "Volume" 



5. To adjust: Turn the controller. 

6. To store: Press the controller. 

USB audio interface*/ 
additional connection of the 
music player in the mobile 
phone* 

It is possible to connect external audio devices/ 
mobile phones. They can be operated via iDrive. 
Sound is output on the vehicle loudspeakers. 

Connection options for external 
devices 

t> Connection via USB audio interface: Apple 
iPod/iPhone, USB devices, e.g., MP3 
player, USB flash drive, or mobile phones 
that are supported by the USB audio 
interface. 

> Connection via snap-in adapter*, refer to 
page 180, when equipped with additional 
connection of music player in the mobile 
phone: Apple iPhone/mobile phones. Play¬ 
back is possible only if no audio device/ 
mobile phone is connected to the USB 
audio interface. 


163 

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 


Entertainment 






















External devices 


Due to the large number of different audio 
devices/mobile phones available on the market, 
it cannot be ensured that every audio device/ 
mobile phone is operable on the vehicle. 

Ask about suitable audio devices/mobile 
phones at your BMW center. 

Audio files 

Standard audio formats, e.g., MP3, WMA, WAV 
(PCM) and AAC, and playlists in the M3U format 
can be played. 

Connecting via USB audio interface 

Lift up the center armrest. 



1 AUX-IN port for audio playback: 
TRS connector 1/8 in/3.5 mm 

2 USB interface 


Apple iPod/iPhone 

To connect the device, use the special cable 
adapter for the Apple iPod/iPhone, available 
from your BMW center. The cable adapter is 
required for a flawless connection. 

Connect the Apple iPod/iPhone with the AUX¬ 
IN port and USB interface 1 using the cable 
adapter for the Apple iPod/iPhone. 

The Apple iPod/iPhone menu structure is sup¬ 
ported by the USB audio interface. 

USB device 

□ To connect the device, use a flexible 
adapter cable to protect the USB inter¬ 
face and your USB device against physical 
damage.◄ 

Connect the USB device with connector 2 
using the flexible adapter cable. 


After the device is connected for the first time, 
the information on all tracks (e.g., artist, type of 
music) and the playlists are transferred from the 
USB device to the vehicle. This procedure may 
take some time. The duration depends on the 
USB device and the number of tracks. 

During transmission, the tracks can be called up 
via the file directory. 

Information from up to four USB devices can 
be stored in the vehicle, or a total of about 
16,000 tracks. 

If a fifth USB device is connected or if more than 
16,000 tracks are stored, information on exist¬ 
ing tracks may be deleted. 

Music tracks with integrated Digital 
Rights Management (DRM) cannot be 
played.◄ 


Starting audio playback 

If the audio device has a device name, the name 
is displayed. 

1. "CD/Multimedia" 

2. "External devices" 

3. Select the symbol. 

The name of the audio device may appear. 



Playback begins with the first track. When an 
Apple iPhone is connected via the snap-in 
adapter and an audio device is connected to the 
AUX-IN port at the same time, the audio signal 
of the AUX-IN port is played. 


164 

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 












Information about the track 

If information about a track has been stored, it is 
displayed automatically: 

> Artist 

> Album title 

> Number of tracks 

> Track file name 

Track search 

You can call up the tracks using the playlists 
and information. With USB devices you can also 
call up tracks using the file directory. 

Selection is possible via: 

> Playback lists 

> Information: type of music, artist, album, 
track 

> Additionally for USB devices: file directory, 
composer 

Tracks are displayed if they have been saved in 
the Latin alphabet. 

Starting the track search 

1. "CD/Multimedia" 

2. "External devices" 

3. Select the *^7* symbol. 

The name of the audio device may appear. 

4. Select the desired category, "Genre", 
"Artist". 



BrywM? (JiruiAury 

Genre? (AH genres ) \ \ 

Ail artists 

All composer&_ 

All Albums ! I 

All tracks i 

Stan play / 


5. Select additional categories if desired. 

The tracks found are listed. Not all catego¬ 
ries need to be selected. For example, to 
search for all tracks by a certain artist, call 
up that artist only. All of the tracks by that 
artist are then displayed. 

6. "Start play" 

Restarting a track search 

"New search" 

Playback lists 

To open playback lists. 

1. "CD/Multimedia" 

2. "External devices" 

3. Select thesymbol. 

4. "Playlists" 

Current playback 

List of tracks currently being played. 

1. "CD/Multimedia" 

2. "External devices" 

3. Select the symbol. 

4. "Current playback" 

Random play sequence 

You can play the tracks in the selected list in 
random order, e.g., all tracks of a single artist. 

1. "CD/Multimedia" 

2. "External devices" 

3. Open "Options". 

4. "Random" 

Fast forward/reverse 

Li tJ Press and hold the button for the corre¬ 
sponding direction. 



All entries are displayed in a list. The "A-Z 
search" can be used to find specific entries. 

> Open "A-Z search" and enter the 
desired entry. 

> Select the desired entry from the list. 



165 

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 


Entertainment 






External devices 


Notes 

□ Do not expose the audio device to 

extreme environmental conditions, e.g., 
very high temperatures, refer to the operating 
instructions of the audio device. Otherwise, the 
audio device may become damaged, which 
could compromise safety while driving. ◄ 

Depending on the configuration of the audio 
files, e.g., bit rates greater than 256 Kbit/s, the 
files may not play back correctly in every case. 

Notes on connecting 

> The connected audio device is supplied 
with a maximum current of 500 mA, if the 
device supports this. Therefore, do not con¬ 
nect the device to the power socket in the 
vehicle. 

> Do not forcibly connect the plug to the USB 
interface. 

> Do not connect devices such as fans or 
lamps to the USB audio interface. 

> Do not connect USB hard drives. 

> Do not use the USB audio interface to 
charge external devices. 


166 


Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 


167 

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 


Entertainment 





Communications 

This chapter describes how to use the 


telephone, BMW Assist and TeleService. 



Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 


Telephone 


Telephone* 


The concept 

Your BMW is equipped with a full preparation 
package mobile phone. After pairing a suitable 
mobile phone with the vehicle once, you can 
operate the mobile phone via the iDrive, the 
buttons on the steering wheel or using voice 
commands*. 

Once a mobile phone has been paired with your 
vehicle, it is automatically recognized as soon 
as it is inside the vehicle while the engine is run¬ 
ning or the ignition is switched on. You can 
store the pairing data for up to four mobile 
phones simultaneously. If several mobile 
phones are detected at the same time, the 
mobile phone last paired can be operated via 
the vehicle. 


Using the telephone inside 
the vehicle 

Using the snap-in adapter* 

The so-called snap-in adapter, a holder for 
mobile phones, allows you to charge the mobile 
phone's battery and connect the mobile phone 
to your vehicle's outside antenna. This ensures 
better network reception and consistent repro¬ 
duction quality. Please contact your 
BMW center to find out for which mobile 
phones there are snap-in adapters available. 

For your safety 

A car phone makes life more convenient in 
many ways, and can even save lives in an emer¬ 
gency. While you should consult your mobile 
phone's separate operating instructions for a 
detailed description of safety precautions and 
information, we request that you direct your 
particular attention to the following: 

Only make entries when the traffic situa¬ 
tion allows you to do so. Do not hold the 
mobile phone in your hand while you are driving; 
use the hands-free system instead. If you do 


not observe this precaution, your being dis¬ 
tracted can endanger vehicle occupants and 
other road users.◄ 


Suitable mobile phones 

Please ask your BMW center which mobile 
phones with Bluetooth interface are supported 
by the mobile phone preparation package and 
which mobile phones are compatible with the 
snap-in adapter. By virtue of their particular 
software versions, these mobile phones sup¬ 
port the functions described in this Owner's 
Manual. Malfunctions may occur with other 
mobile phones. 

Operating options 

You can operate the mobile phone using: 

> Buttons on the steering wheel, refer 
to page 10 

> iDrive, refer to page 16 

> Voice commands*, refer to page 178 

> Programmable memory keys, refer 
to page 21 

Avoid operating a mobile phone recognized by 
the vehicle via the mobile phone's keypad; oth¬ 
erwise, malfunctions may result. 

Start-up 

Pairing the mobile phone with the 
vehicle 

The following prerequisites must be met: 

> Compatible mobile phone: The mobile 
phone is supported by the full preparation 
package mobile phone. You can obtain 
information on the Internet at: 
www.bmw.com/bluetooth 



170 

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 


> The mobile phone is ready to operate. 

> Bluetooth is activated in the vehicle, refer to 
page 173, and on the mobile phone. 

> Depending on the mobile phone, certain 
settings may be necessary on the mobile 
phone, e.g., via the following menu items: 

> Bluetooth switched on 

> Connection must be allowed without 
requiring further confirmation 

> Reconnection 

> Depending on the mobile phone type, the 
power-saving mode setting, for example, 
may result in a paired mobile phone not 
being detected by the vehicle. 

> For pairing purposes, define any 4 to 16- 
digit number as a Bluetooth passkey, 

e.g. 25081107. A long and complex number 
offers the best protection against unautho¬ 
rized access. This Bluetooth passkey is no 
longer required after pairing has been suc¬ 
cessful. 


> The ignition is switched on. 

□ Pair the mobile phone with the vehicle 
only when the car is stationary, to avoid 
endangering the car's occupants and other 
road users by being distracted.◄ 


Switch on ignition 

1. Insert remote control all the way into the 
ignition lock. 

2. Switch on ignition without operating the 
brake or clutch or pressing the start/stop 
button. 


Preparation via iDrive 

3. "Telephone" 

4. "Bluetooth" 

5. "Add new phone" 



Preparation via the mobile phone 

6. Further steps must be carried out with the 
mobile phone and vary depending on the 
model. Please refer to your mobile phone's 
operating instructions, e.g., under the top¬ 
ics of Searching for a Bluetooth device, 
Linking or Pairing. 

The Bluetooth name of the vehicle appears 
on the mobile phone display. 

7. Select the Bluetooth name of the vehicle on 
the mobile phone display. 


Logging in 

Depending on your mobile phone, you will see 
messages, first on the mobile phone display or 
on the iDrive, requesting you to enter the 
same Bluetooth passkey previously deter¬ 
mined by you. 

8. Enter the Bluetooth passkey. 

Depending on the mobile phone, you will 
have approx. 30 seconds to enter your 
Bluetooth passkey on the mobile phone 
and the Control Display. 



If the pairing was successful, the mobile phone 
appears at the top of the list of mobile phones. 



171 

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 




i] Communications Entertainment Navigation || 






















Telephone 


Following the initial pairing 

> The mobile phone is detected/connected in 
the vehicle within 2 minutes if the engine is 
running or the ignition is switched on. 

> As soon as a mobile phone is detected by 
the vehicle, the phone book entries stored 
on the SIM card or on your mobile phone are 
transmitted to the vehicle. This transmis¬ 
sion is dependent on your mobile phone, 
refer to the operating instructions of the 
mobile phone if necessary, and can take 
several minutes. 

> Four mobile phones can be paired. 

> Specific settings may be necessary in some 
mobile phones, e.g., authorization or a 
secure connection, refer to the mobile 
phone operating instructions. 

If not all phone book entries are displayed: 

> Transfer all phone book entries from the 
SIM card to the mobile phone, if necessary. 

> Phone book entries with special characters 
may not be displayed. 

Checks to perform if pairing is 
unsuccessful 

> Is the mobile phone supported by the 
mobile phone preparation package? You 
can obtain information on the Internet at: 
www.bmw.com/bluetooth. 

> Do the Bluetooth passkeys on the mobile 
phone and vehicle match? The same Blue¬ 
tooth passkey must be entered on the 
mobile phone's display and via iDrive. 

> Did it take you more than 30 seconds to 
enter the Bluetooth passkey? Then repeat 
the pairing procedure. 

> Are too many Bluetooth devices connected 
to the mobile phone? If so, delete the con¬ 
nections with other devices on the mobile 
phone. 

> Is the mobile phone no longer responding? 
Switch the mobile phone off and on or 
briefly disconnect the power supply. 


> Repeat the pairing procedure. 

> If all items on the list have been checked 
and the mobile phone still cannot be paired, 
please contact Customer Relations. 

Connecting a particular mobile phone 

If more than one mobile phone is detected by 
the vehicle, the mobile phone at the top of the 
list is connected. A different mobile phone can 
be connected by selecting it. 

1. "Telephone" 

2. "Bluetooth" 

3. Select the desired mobile phone. 


Bfue*uulb 

Pleas# use phones 
recommended by BMW 

Acid rtrw phfiric* 
C&nnected: Handy 1 
Pained. Handy 2 
Handy i 


Unpairing the mobile phone from the 
vehicle 

1. "Telephone" 

2. "Bluetooth" 

3. Highlight the mobile phone that is to be 
unpaired. 

4. Open "Options". 

5. "Remove phone from list" 



The unpaired mobile phone is deleted from 
the list. 

The phone book entries and the lists of 
stored phone numbers are deleted as well. 


172 

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 











Activating/deactivating the 
Bluetooth link 

The use of Bluetooth technology is not 
permitted in all countries. Observe all 
applicable local regulations. Temporarily deac¬ 
tivate the Bluetooth link between the vehicle 
and the mobile phone, if necessary. 

If the Bluetooth link is deactivated, you can no 
longer operate the mobile phone via the vehicle, 
and other devices with a Bluetooth interface 
can be used in combination with the mobile 
phone, e.g., a laptop.◄ 

To temporarily deactivate the Bluetooth link 
between the vehicle and your mobile phone: 

1. "Telephone" 

2. Open "Options". 

3. "Bluetooth" 



Adjusting volume 



Turn the knob during a call to select the desired 
volume. 

This volume for the hands-free system is main¬ 
tained, even if the other audio sources are set to 
minimum volume. 

The setting is stored for the remote control cur¬ 
rently in use. 


Operation via iDrive 

You can operate the following functions using 
iDrive: 

> Accepting/rejecting calls 

> Dialing phone numbers 

> Selecting phone numbers from the 
phone book 

t> Selecting stored phone numbers, e.g., from 
the list of received calls 

> Ending calls 

When the ignition is switched off or in radio 
readiness, e.g., after taking the remote control 
out of the ignition switch, you can continue an 
ongoing call via the hands-free system for sev¬ 
eral minutes. 

Voice quality 

If the person you are talking to is having difficul¬ 
ties understanding you, this may be due to 
excessive background noise.The full prepara¬ 
tion package mobile phone can compensate for 
these noises to a certain extent. To optimize 
voice quality during a call, we recommend 
that you: 

> Reduce background noise, e.g., by closing 
the windows, reducing air flow from the 
automatic climate control or pointing the 
open front air vents downward 

> Reduce the volume of the hands-free 
system. 

Requirements 

> The mobile phone's pairing data are stored 
by the vehicle and the mobile phone is oper¬ 
ational. 

> The engine is running or the ignition is 
switched on. 

> The mobile phone is recognized by the 
vehicle. 


173 

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 


Communications 




















Telephone 


Receiving calls 

If you have the phone number of the caller 
stored in the phone book and the phone num¬ 
ber has been transmitted, the name of the entry 
is displayed. 

Accepting a call 

Press the 3 button on the steering wheel 
or 

"Accept” 



Rejecting a call 

"Reject" 

The caller is diverted to your mailbox if the mail¬ 
box was activated. 

Ending calls 

Press the 3 button on the steering wheel 
or 

1. "Telephone" 

2. "Active calls" 

3. Select an active call. 


»\ \ • ? Actruo calls 

stv 

1 \ 


V 08912345678 


00. )0 

3m 

‘‘i S How 

Keypad dialing 

■/ 1 Cflnfen nM ££fl 



Dialing phone numbers 

1. "Telephone" 

2. "Dial number" 

3. Select the digits individually. 

4. ^ Select this symbol to establish the con¬ 
nection 



or 

Press the 3 button on the steering wheel. 

The phone number can also be entered using 
voice commands*, refer to page 178. 

For your phone number to be displayed to the 
person you are talking to, the display of phone 
numbers must be enabled by your provider. 

Calls with multiple parties 

You can switch between calls and connect two 
calls to a single conference call. This function 
must be supported by the mobile phone and 
service provider. 

Accepting a call while speaking to 
another party 

This function may need to be enabled by the 
service provider, and the mobile phone may 
have to be set up accordingly. 

If a second call comes in during an active call, 
you will hear a call waiting signal. 

"Accept" 

The call is accepted and the existing call is put 
on hold. 


174 


Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 























Establishing a second call 

Establish another call during an active call. 

1. "Telephone" 

2. "Active calls" 

3. "Hold" 



The existing call is put on hold. 

4. Dial the new phone number or select it from 
a list. 


Switching between two calls, toggling 

> Active call: indicated by a red handset 

> Call on hold: indicated by a green handset 

To switch to the call on hold, select this 
handset. 


Phone book 

The phone book accesses the contacts* and 
shows all contacts for which a phone number 
has been stored. The entries can be selected to 
make a call. 

1. "Telephone" 

2. "Phonebook" 

All contacts with a phone number are displayed. 
A symbol indicates the storage location of the 
contacts. 



Symbol Storage location 

No symbol In the vehicle; the address 

has not been checked as a 
destination. 


Establishing a conference call 

Two calls can be connected to a single tele¬ 
phone conference call. 

1. Establish two calls. 

2. "Conference call" 


Actrvft cat Is 

V +'198912345678 

00:29 ’ 

+498908765421 
03.16 (wild gehalten...! 

Keypad dialing 
Conference can 


In the vehicle; the address 
has been checked as a 
destination. 

Mobile phone 

Calling a contact 

1. Select the desired contact. 

A connection is established immediately if 
calling contacts with one phone number. 

For contacts with several phone numbers: 

2. Select the desired phone number. 

The connection is established. 


When terminating a conference call, both calls 
are ended. 


175 

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 


Communications 


















Editing a contact 

The entries in the contacts can be changed. 
When a contact from the mobile phone is 
changed, the changes are not stored on the 
mobile phone. A copy of the entry is stored in 
the vehicle. 

1. Highlight the contact. 

2. Open "Options". 

3. "Edit entry" 

The contact can be edited. 

Redialing 

The eight phone numbers dialed last are stored. 

Dialing the number via iDrive 

1. "Telephone" 

2. "Redial" 



3. Select the desired entry. 

The connection is established. 


Deleting entries 

1. Highlight an entry. 

2. Open "Options". 

3. "Delete entry" or "Delete list". 


Received calls 

The 20 calls that were last received are dis¬ 
played. 

1. "Telephone" 

2. "Received calls" 



Dialing a number 

Select an entry. 

The connection is established. 


Deleting entries 

1. Highlight an entry. 

2. Open "Options". 

3. "Delete entry" or "Delete list". 

Saving an entry in the contacts 

1. Highlight an entry. 

2. Open "Options". 

3. "Store as new contact" or "Add to existing 
contact". 

4. Select the type of number: "Home", "Busi¬ 
ness", "Mobile" or "Other". 

5. Complete the entries if necessary. 

6. "Store contact" 


Saving an entry in the contacts 

1. Highlight an entry. 

2. Open "Options". 

3. "Store as new contact" or "Add to existing 
contact". 

4. Select the type of number: "Home", "Busi¬ 
ness", "Mobile" or "Other". 

5. Complete the entries if necessary. 

6. "Store in vehicle" 


Messages 

Different types of messages can be displayed: 

> My Info messages from the BMW Assist 
portal. 

> Messages from BMW Concierge 

Displaying messages 

1. "Telephone" 

2. "Messages" 

3. Select the desired message. 


176 


Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 


















My Info 

Starting destination guidance: 

1. Select the message that contains the 
desired destination. 

2. ^ "Start guidance" or "Add as 
another dest.". 

Dialing the number in the message: 

1. Select the message that contains the 
desired number. 

2. r"Ca\\" 


Messages from the concierge service 

Using the address in destination guidance*: 

1. Select the message. 

2. "Start guidance" or "Add as 
another dest.". 



3. Start destination guidance, if necessary. 
Dialing a phone number: 

1. Select the message. 

2. "Call" 

Saving an address: 

1. Select the message. 

2. Open "Options". 

3. "Store contact in vehicle" 


Deleting messages 

1. Select the message to be deleted. 

2. Open "Options". 

3. "Delete message" 


Switching between mobile 
phone and hands-free system 

From mobile phone to hands-free 
system* 

You can continue ongoing calls outside of the 
vehicle's Bluetooth range via the hands-free 
system as long as the engine is running or the 
ignition is switched on. Depending on your 
mobile phone, the system automatically 
switches to hands-free mode. 

With mobile phones that do not automatically 
switch to hands-free mode: 

Depending on the type of mobile phone you are 
using, it may be possible to continue the con¬ 
versation via the hands-free system. Refer to 
the display on your mobile phone and/or your 
mobile phone's operating instructions. 

From hands-free system to mobile 
phone 

If you are making a call via the hands-free sys¬ 
tem, it may be possible to continue the call via 
the mobile phone, depending on your mobile 
phone model. Refer to the display on your 
mobile phone and/or your mobile phone's oper¬ 
ating instructions. 

Alternatively, you can deactivate the Bluetooth 
link, refer to page 173. 

Depending on the type of mobile phone you are 
using, it may occur that calls are switched from 
the hands-free system to the mobile phone if 
reception of the wireless network is poor. 


177 

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 


Communications 










Telephone 


Operation by voice 
commands* 

The concept 

> You can operate your mobile phone without 
having to take a hand off the steering wheel. 

> Most menu items on the Control Display 
can be voiced as commands. The voice 
activation system supports you by making 
announcements and asking questions. 

> >...< Verbal instructions to use with the voice 
activation system. 

Requirements 

The same prerequisites apply as for operation 

via iDrive, refer to page 173. 

Saying commands 

Activating voice activation system 

1. Briefly press the button on the steering 
wheel. 

A sound signal indicates that you can say 
commands. 

2. Say the command. 


Ending/canceling operation by voice 
commands 

Briefly press the button on the steering 

wheel 

or 

>Cancel<. 

In dialogs not involving voice commands, i.e., 
when you are speaking only text, e.g., a name, 
canceling is possible only via the button on the 
steering wheel. 

Having the possible commands read 
aloud 

The system recognizes specific commands 
that must be pronounced exactly word for word. 
You can have the possible commands for any 
function read aloud to you: 

>Help<. 

Digits from zero to nine are recognized. 

You can say each digit individually or group 
them into a sequence to accelerate the input. 

Using alternative commands 

Often there is more than a single command to 
run a function, e.g.: 

>Dial name< or >Name<. 


Example: dialing phone numbers 

Start the dialog: 

^JPress the button on the steering wheel. 


You say 

Voice command response 

>Dial number< 

>>Please say the number< < 

For instance, >123 456 7890< 

Depending on your equipment version: 

>>123 456 7890. Continue ?< < 

>Dialing< 

>>Dialing number< < 


178 

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 



Adjusting the volume of the 
instructions 

You can adjust the volume for the instructions 
from the system: 



Turn the button during an instruction. 

This volume for the instructions is maintained, 
even if the other audio sources are set to mini¬ 
mum volume. 

The setting is stored for the remote control cur¬ 
rently in use. 

Calling 

Dialing phone numbers 

1. >Dial number<. 

2 Say the phone number. 

For telephone calls abroad, say >Plus< 
and then the country code. 

3. >Dialing<. 

The connection to the desired subscriber is 
established. 

Correcting phone numbers 

After the last spoken sequence of digits has 
been repeated by the system, you can delete 
this sequence of digits. 

>Correct number<. 

The digits are deleted. 

The command >Correct number< can be 
repeated as often as you like. 


Deleting phone numbers 

>Delete<. 

All digits entered up to this point are deleted. 

Redialing 

To redial the phone number dialed last: 

^ >Redial<. 

Voice phone book 

A separate voice phone book is needed for 
operation using voice commands. 

The entries must be entered using voice com¬ 
mands and are separate from the memory in the 
mobile phone. In this case, phone numbers 
stored on the mobile phone cannot be called up 
or saved there using voice commands. Up to 50 
entries can be set up. An entry always consists 
of a name and a phone number. 

Creating and editing a voice 
phone book 

To store an entry: 

An entry always consists of a name and a phone 
number. 

^ 1. >Save name<. 

2 Say the name. 

Saying the name for the voice phone 
book should not take longer than 
approx. 2 seconds. 

3. Say the phone number after being 
prompted to do so by the system. 

4. To save the phone number: 

>Save<. 

To delete an entry: 

You can delete any entry from the voice 
phone book. 

1. >Delete name<. 

The dialog for deleting an entry opens. 
2 Say the name when prompted. 

3. Confirm the query with >Yes<. 


179 

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 


Communications 














Telephone 


To delete all entries: 

>Delete phone book< deletes all entries in the 
phone book. 

1. >Delete phone book<. 

The dialog for deleting the phone book 
opens. 

2. Confirm the query with >Yes<. 

3. Confirm the query again with >Yes<. 

To read and dial entries: 

You can have all entries in your voice phone 
book read aloud in the order in which they were 
entered and select a specific entry to establish a 
connection: 

^ 1. >Read phone book<. 

The dialog for reading the phone book 
opens. 

2. Say >Dial number< when the desired 
entry is read. 

Selecting an entry 

The connection to the phone number of the 
selected entry is established. 

1. >Dialname<. 

The dialog for dialing an entry is 
opened. 

2. Say the name when prompted. 

3. Confirm the query with >Yes<. 

Notes 

Notes on Emergency Requests 

Do not use the voice activation system to ini¬ 
tiate an Emergency Request. In stressful situa¬ 
tions, the voice and vocal pitch can change. 
This can unnecessarily delay the establishment 
of a telephone connection. Use the SOS but¬ 
ton* instead, refer to page 218. 

Important for voice commands 

For voice commands, bear in mind the 
following: 

> Say the commands, numbers and letters 
smoothly and with normal volume, empha¬ 
sis and speed. 


> Always say commands in the language of 
the voice activation system. 

> Keep the doors, windows and retractable 
hardtop closed to prevent interference from 
outside noise. 

> Avoid ambient noise in the vehicle while 
speaking. 


Inserting/removing the snap 
in adapter* 

1. Press button 1 and remove the cover. 



2. Insert the snap-in adapter at the front and 
press it downward until it engages. 



To remove the snap-in adapter: 
Press button 1. 



180 

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 











Inserting mobile phone 

1. If applicable, remove the protective cap 
from the mobile phone's antenna connector 
so that the mobile phone can engage in the 
snap-in adapter. 

2. With its buttons facing upward, slide the 
mobile phone up towards the electrical con¬ 
tact points and press it downward until it 
engages. 



The mobile phone's battery is charged as soon 
as the vehicle is in radio readiness or the steer¬ 
ing is unlocked. 


C> 


To conserve vehicle battery power, you 
should avoid using the mobile phone 


when the ignition is switched off.4 


Removing mobile phone 



Press the button. 


181 

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 


Communications 












Contacts 


Contacts* 


You can create and edit contacts. The contacts 
from the mobile phone* are displayed as well if 
this function is supported by the mobile phone. 
The addresses can be used as destinations for 
navigation and the phone numbers can be 
dialed. 

New contact 


Specifying a contact as the home 
address 

A contact can be stored as a home address. It is 
placed at the top of the "My contacts" list. 

1. Create a new contact. 

2. Open "Options". 

3. "Store as home address" 


1. "Contacts" 

2. "New contact" 



3. If the entry fields are still filled with the pre¬ 
vious entries, select "Delete input fields", if 
necessary. 

4. To fill in the entry fields: 

Select the symbol next to the entry field. 



>p|jbn* 


l\ I 

1 \ 

□ Split screen 

\ 

Switch off tnntrol display 

1 V 


now ran act 

1 


Store aa home address 


Coquet* 


V 

LS Bluetooth 


m 1 

Bluut'JoLh Info j 

/ 


When the home address is deleted, only the 
content of the home address entry is deleted 
and not the entry itself. 


My contacts 

A list of all contacts in the vehicle and on the 
mobile phone*. 



5. Enter the text. 


C> 


If the vehicle is equipped with a navi¬ 
gation system, it is only possible to 
enter addresses that are contained in the 
navigation data in the vehicle. This ensures 
that destination guidance is possible for all 
addresses. ◄ 


Displaying contacts 

"My contacts" 


1,1 CuilldltV 


New contact l 

\ r 

My <_onU<_Ls 

1 m 

i r 

J 

-j 


Mi 

It ■ 

if 1 

1 i- 

/ 19 

i 


All contacts are listed in alphabetical order. 
Depending on the number of contacts, an A-Z 
search is offered. A symbol indicates the stor¬ 
age location of the contacts: 


6. "Store contact in vehicle" 


182 

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 
















Symbol 

Storage location 

No symbol 

In the vehicle; the address 
has not been checked as a 
destination. 


In the vehicle; the address 
has been checked as a desti¬ 
nation. 

© 

Mobile phone* 


Displaying the detailed view* 

Select the desired contact. 

All fields that have been filled in for that contact 
are displayed. 

Selecting a contact as the navigation 
destination 

1. "My contacts" 

2. Select the desired contact. 

3. Select the desired address. 

Contacts from the mobile phone* may contain 
addresses that do not match the navigation 
data contained in the vehicle and thus cannot 
be used for destination guidance. In this case: 
Manually correct the address. 

Checking the address as a destination* 

An address that is to be used for destination 
guidance must match the navigation data con¬ 
tained in the vehicle. An address that is stored 
on the mobile phone can be matched to the 
navigation data. 

1. Select the desired contact and highlight the 
address. 

2. Open "Options". 

3. "Check as destination" 

4. Correct and store the address, if necessary. 

After an address has been corrected, the con¬ 
tact can be stored in the vehicle. The address is 
not changed on the mobile phone. 


Dialing a phone number* 

1. "My contacts" 

2. Select the desired contact. 

3. Select the desired phone number. 
The connection is established. 

Editing a contact 

1. "My contacts" 

2. Select the desired contact. 

3. "Edit contact" 


it 

\ gainful_ 

\ 

t\~ 

! ii_ Edit contact 

\ \ 

! * i 1 - MUSTEftMANN 

1 1 

1 1 

mOnchfn, mi'inchfn (!>Ta! 

, x 

' % HETUtLHING HO 

1 ▼ 

DtiUlStHLAND 

111 

■// 

? 
1 / 


4. Change the entries. 

5. Move the controller to the left. 

6. "Yes" 

If a contact from the mobile phone* is edited, 
the changes are not stored on the mobile 
phone. A copy of the entry is stored in the vehi¬ 
cle, and only this copy is displayed. 

Deleting contacts 

Only contacts that are stored in the vehicle are 
deleted. The contacts on the mobile phone* 
cannot be deleted. 

1. "My contacts" 

2. Highlight the contact. 

3. Open "Options". 

4. "Delete contact" or "Delete all contacts". 


183 

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 


Communications 




BMW Assist 


BMW Assist* 


BMW Assist* 

BMW Assist provides a number of different ser¬ 
vices. For example, the position data of the 
vehicle can be transmitted to the BMW Assist 
Response Center when an Emergency 
Request* is sent. 

Many BMW Assist services depend on the con¬ 
tract individually agreed upon. 

After your contract has expired, the BMW 
Assist system will be deactivated by the BMW 
Assist Response Center without your having to 
visit a BMW center. After the BMW Assist sys¬ 
tem has been deactivated, no BMW Assist ser¬ 
vices will be available. The BMW Assist system 
can be reactivated by a BMW center after a new 
contract has been signed. 

Requirements 

> The installed BMW Assist system is logged 
in to a wireless communications network. 
This network must be capable of transmit¬ 
ting the services. 

> To transmit position data, the vehicle must 
be able to determine the current position. 

> To activate and update BMW Assist, a GPS 
signal must be available. 

> The BMW Assist service contract was 
signed with your BMW center or with the 
BMW Assist Response Center. The service 
must have been fully enabled. 

> BMW Assist is activated. 

Services offered 

> Emergency Request: when you press the 
SOS button, a connection is established to 
the BMW Assist Response Center. The 
BMW Assist Response Center then speaks 
with you and takes further steps to help you. 


> Automatic Collision Notification: under cer¬ 
tain conditions, a connection is established 
to the BMW Assist Response Center after a 
serious accident. If possible, the BMW 
Assist Response Center then speaks with 
you and takes further steps to help you. 

> Enhanced Roadside Assistance: BMW 
Roadside Assistance* can be contacted if 
assistance is needed in the event of a 
breakdown. If possible, the vehicle data 
and position data are transmitted during 
this call. 

> Customer Relations: connection with Cus¬ 
tomer Relations for information on all 
aspects of your vehicle. 

> TeleService: data on your vehicle's service 
status or required inspections are transmit¬ 
ted to your BMW center, either automati¬ 
cally before a service due date or when you 
request a BMW service appointment. 

> Remote Door Unlock: the BMW Assist 
Response Center provides assistance if, for 
example, the remote control is not available 
and the vehicle needs to be opened. 

> Stolen Vehicle Recovery: after you report 
that your vehicle was stolen to the police, 
the BMW Assist Response Center can 
determine its position. 

> In addition to these services, the optional 
Convenience Plan offers concierge service 
and information for route planning, traffic 
and weather. A limited number of calls can 
be made via the BMW Assist Response 
Center with Critical Calling, for example, if 
the mobile phone is not available or dis¬ 
charged. 

Press the SOS button to contact the BMW 
Assist Response Center. 


184 


Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 


TeleService* 

TeleService supports communication with your 

BMW center. 

> Data on the vehicle's service requirements 
can be sent directly to the BMW center. In 
this way, the BMW center can plan its work 
in advance. This shortens the duration of 
the service appointment. 

t> In the event of a breakdown, data on the 
vehicle's condition can be sent directly to 
Roadside Assistance*. 

> The service varies by country. 

> Connection costs may ensue. 

> Services may be restricted abroad. 

Requirements 

> BMW Assist is activated. 

> Wireless reception is available. 

> The engine is running. 


Concierge service* 

When you call the BMW Assist Concierge, you 
can obtain information about, for example, res¬ 
taurants, emergency pharmacy services, gas 
stations or hotels, as well as receive the corre¬ 
sponding telephone numbers and addresses. 

You can then dial a phone number directly or 
use an address for destination guidance*. 


Starting the concierge service 

1. "BMW Assist" 

2. "Concierge" 



3. "Start service" 


A voice connection is established to the BMW 
Concierge. 

You are connected to the BMW Concierge ser¬ 
vice to obtain the required information. You can 
then have the phone number and address sent 
to you and, for example, use it for destination 
guidance in the navigation system. Many hotels 
can be booked directly through the BMW Con¬ 
cierge. When an information message is 
received, a list of the received messages is dis¬ 
played automatically. Open the message via the 
message list, refer to page 176. 


Roadside Assistance 

You can call BMW Roadside Assistance* 
should you require help in the event of a 
breakdown. 

Starting Roadside Assistance 

Vehicle not equipped with BMW Assist 

or TeleService 

1. "BMW Assist" 

2. "Roadside Assistance" 



The Roadside Assistance number is displayed. 

3. Select the number. If a mobile phone* is 
paired, a connection is established to BMW 
Roadside Assistance. 


185 

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 



Communications Entertain 
















BMW Assist 


Vehicle equipped with BMW Assist or 
TeleService 

1. "BMW Assist" 

2. "Roadside Assistance" 

3. "Start service" 



TeleService Diagnosis* 

TeleService Diagnosis enables the wireless 
transmission of detailed vehicle data that are 
important for vehicle diagnosis. TeleService 
Diagnosis can be started after a prompt by 
Roadside Assistance and termination of the 
voice connection. 

TeleService Help* 

TeleService Help enables an in-depth diagno¬ 
sis of the vehicle by Roadside Assistance via 
wireless transmission. TeleService Help can be 
started after a prompt by Roadside Assistance 
and termination of the voice connection. 

Starting TeleService Help 

1. Park the vehicle in a safe place. 

2. Set the parking brake. 

3. The engine is running. 

4. "TeleService Help" 

After completion of TeleService Help, a voice 
connection is established to Roadside Assis¬ 
tance. 


Activating BMW Assist* 

If the services included in a valid BMW Assist 
subscription are not displayed, they may need 
to be activated. 

1. Make sure that the vehicle can determine its 
current position. Reception is usually best 
when you have an unobstructed view to 
the sky. 

2. Switch on the ignition. 

3. "Activate BMW Assist" 

Activation may take several minutes. If another 
menu is opened, activation continues running in 
the background. 

BMW Search* 

BMW Search is an online portal that makes cer¬ 
tain services available for use in your vehicle, 
e.g., information on restaurants along your 
route. 

License conditions: 

This product contains NetFront Browser Soft¬ 
ware of ACCESS Co., Ltd. Copyright © 2007 
ACCESS Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. NetFront 
is a trademark or registered trademark of 
ACCESS CO., LTD., in Japan and other 
countries. 

This software is based in part on the work of the 
Independent JPEG Group. 

Requirements 

> Subscription to the optional Conve¬ 
nience Plan. 

> The vehicle is located within wireless net¬ 
work coverage. 

> The date setting on the Control Display is 
current. 


186 


Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 



Starting BMW Search 

1. "BMW Assist" 

2. "BMW Search" 



3. Select "OK", if necessary. 

The BMW Search start page is displayed. 


Customer Relations 

At a glance 

Contact Customer Relations for information on 
all aspects of your vehicle. 

Calling Customer Relations 

Vehicle equipped with BMW Assist or 

TeleService 

1. "BMW Assist" 

2. "Customer Relations" 

3. "Start service" 

A voice connection is established to Customer 
Relations. 


Using BMW Search 

To select and display content: 

> Turn the controller to highlight an element. 

> Press the controller to display an element. 


Vehicle not equipped with BMW Assist 
or TeleService 

1. "BMW Assist" 

2. "Customer Relations" 


Opening the start page 

1. Open "Options". 

2. "Home" 


The Customer Relations phone number is dis¬ 
played. If the vehicle is equipped with the 
mobile phone preparation package, a voice 
connection is established. 


|t\\\ 0(JllUl!V V 

Swiuh oil Control di 

ryjJiy 

l 

B 1—1 pAgr 



' Home 


(j 

Reload 



Lanml loading 



j 11 8MW Scorch 


r 


i\ \ <5 Cuilwitw (UtUlimn 


Pfease call This number; 

“•'’ill ' ■ 

‘l I 'Hi {36512345678 i 

« r 

1 \ 

& 

Iff 

1 '* 

/ / 


Loading a new page 

1. Open "Options". 

2. "Reload" 

Canceling 

1. Open "Options". 

2. "Cancel loading" 


TeleService Call* 

At a glance 

You can send a request to your BMW center to 
arrange a service appointment. The TeleSer¬ 
vice data is transmitted during a Service 
Request. If possible, your BMW center will 
establish contact with you. 



187 

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 


j Communications Entertainment Navigation i 

















BMW Assist 


Starting a Service Request 

1. "BMW Assist" 

2. "Service Request" 

3. "Start service" 


Ii\ \ v Servlet? R^utvl 

--rV 

n! 1 Stan service 

\ u 

ft | 

1 1 


M 

T 

■ r Service ready 

- 1 

■1 I 

mj I 
■ 1 1 

1 


Automatic TeleService Call* 

The TeleService data necessary for servicing 
the vehicle are automatically sent to your BMW 
center prior to the service deadline. If possible, 
the center will contact you and a service 
appointment can be arranged. 

You can check when the BMW center was 
notified. 

1. "Vehicle Info" 

2. "Vehicle status" 


Data transfer* 

The status of the data transfer is displayed. 

1. "BMW Assist" 

2. Open "Options". 

3. "Data transfer" 

Service status* 

Displaying available services 

Display of all services available in the vehicle. 
This function can be called up via "Options". 

1. "BMW Assist" 

2. Open any menu. 

3. Open "Options". 

4. "Service status" 

5. "Available services" 

Activating BMW Assist 

If the services included in a BMW Assist sub¬ 
scription are not displayed, they may need to be 
activated. 

"Activate BMW Assist" 



3. Open "Options". 

4. "Last Service Request" 


188 


Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 












189 

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 


Communications 




Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 



Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 


Mobility 

This section helps you maintain your car's 
mobility by supplying important information 
on vital topics including fuels and lubricants, 
wheels and tires, service, maintenance and 
breakdown assistance. 


Refueling 


Refueling 


Always switch off the engine before refu¬ 
eling; otherwise, fuel cannot be added to 
the tank and a message will be displayed.◄ 

Take all precautionary measures and 
observe all applicable regulations when 
handling fuel. Do not carry any spare fuel con¬ 
tainers in your vehicle. They can develop a leak 
and cause an explosion or cause a fire in the 
event of an accident. ◄ 


Fuel filler flap 


Opening 



1. Open fuel filler flap. To do so, lightly press 
the rear edge. 

2. Turn the gas cap counterclockwise. 

3. Place the gas cap in the bracket attached to 
the fuel filler flap. 

Closing 

Fit the cap and turn it clockwise until you clearly 
hear a click. 

Do not pinch the band attached to the 
cap; otherwise, the cap cannot be closed 
properly and fuel vapors can escape. A mes¬ 
sage will be displayed if the gas cap is loose or 
missing.◄ 


Manually releasing the fuel filler flap 

In the event of a malfunction, you can release 
the fuel filler flap manually: 



Pull the button in the cargo area with the fuel 
pump symbol down. The fuel filler flap is 
released. 


Observe the following when refueling 

When handling fuels, follow the safety 
instructions provided at filling stations; 
otherwise, there is a risk of personal injury or 
property damage.◄ 

When refueling, insert the filler nozzle com¬ 
pletely into the filler pipe. Avoid lifting the filler 
nozzle while filling the tank, as that would 
lead to: 

> premature pump shutoff 

> reduced efficiency of the fuel-vapor recov¬ 
ery system. 

The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle clicks 
off the first time. 

Fuel tank capacity 

Approx. 15.5 US gallons/55 liters, including the 
reserve capacity of 2.1 US gallons/8 liters. 

Refuel as soon as possible once your 
cruising range falls below 30 miles/ 

50 km; otherwise, engine functions are not 
ensured and damage can occur. ◄ 







192 


Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 













Fuel specifications 

Do not fill the tank with leaded fuel as this 
would cause permanent damage to the 
catalytic converter. 

Do not fill the tank with E85, i.e., fuel containing 
85% ethanol, nor with FlexFuel. Otherwise, 
the engine and fuel supply system will be 
damaged.◄ 

Required fuel 

Super Premium Gasoline/AKI 91 

This gasoline is highly recommended. 

However, you may also use gasoline with less 
AKI. The minimum AKI Rating is: 

> Z4 sDrive30i: 87 

> Z4 sDrive35i: 89 

If you use gasoline with this minimum AKI Rat¬ 
ing, the engine may produce knocking sounds 
when starting at high outside temperatures. 
This has no effect on the engine life. 

Do not use any gasoline below the speci¬ 
fied minimum fuel grade. Otherwise, the 
engine could be damaged.◄ 

Use high-quality brands 

Field experience has indicated significant dif¬ 
ferences in fuel quality: volatility, composition, 
additives, etc., among gasolines offered for sale 
in the United States and Canada. Fuels contain¬ 
ing up to and including 10% ethanol or other 
oxygenates with up to 2.8% oxygen by weight, 
that is, 15% MTBE or 3% methanol plus an 
equivalent amount of co-solvent, will not void 
the applicable warranties with respect to 
defects in materials or workmanship. 


The use of poor-quality fuels may result in 
driveability, starting and stalling problems 
especially under certain environmental condi¬ 
tions such as high ambient temperature and 
high altitude. 

Should you encounter driveability problems 
which you suspect could be related to the fuel 
you are using, we recommend that you respond 
by switching to a recognized high-quality brand 
such as gasoline that is advertised as Top Tier 
Detergent Gasoline. 

Failure to comply with these recommendations 
may also result in unscheduled maintenance.◄ 


BMW recommends BP fuels 0 





193 

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 


Mobility 



Wheels and tires 


Wheels and tires 


Tire inflation pressures 

Information for your safety 

It is not merely the tires' service life, but also 
driving comfort and, to a great extent, driving 
safety that depend on the condition of the tires 
and the maintenance of the specified tire 
pressure. 

□ Check the tire inflation pressure regularly 
and correct it, if necessary: at least twice a 
month and before starting long trips. If you fail 
to observe this precaution you may be driving 
on tires with incorrect tire pressures, a condi¬ 
tion that can not only compromise your vehi¬ 
cle's driving stability, but also lead to tire dam¬ 
age and the risk of an accident. Do not drive 
with deflated, i.e., flat tires, except when using 
run-flat tires. A flat tire will seriously impair your 
vehicle's handling and braking response. 
Attempts to drive on a flat tire can lead to loss of 
control over the vehicle.◄ 


Checking pressure 

Only check tire inflation pressure when the 
tires are cold. This means after a maximum of 
1.25 miles/2 km driving or when the vehicle has 
been parked for at least 2 hours. When tires are 
warm, the tire inflation pressure is higher. 

After correcting the tire inflation pressure, 
reinitialize the Tire Pressure Monitor, 
refer to page 83, or the Flat Tire Monitor, refer 
to page 81 .◄ 

Inflation pressure specifications 

The tables below provide all the correct inflation 
pressures for the specified tire sizes at ambient 
temperature. 

The inflation pressures apply to the tire 
sizes approved and tire brands recom¬ 
mended by BMW; a list of these is available 
from your BMW center.◄ 

For correct identification of the right tire infla¬ 
tion pressures, observe the following: 


> Tire sizes for your vehicle 

> Load conditions 

> Maximum allowable driving speed 

Tire inflation pressures for driving up to 

100 mph or 160 km/h 

For normal driving up to 100 mph or 160 km/h 
and to achieve optimum driving comfort, adjust 
pressures to the respective tire inflation pres¬ 
sures listed on the following pages in the col¬ 
umns for traveling speeds up to a maximum of 
100 mph or 160 km/h. 

These tire inflation pressures can also be found 
on the driver's side door post when the driver's 
door is open. 



The maximum permissible speed for 
these tire pressures is 100 mph or 
160 km/h. Do not exceed this speed; otherwise, 
tire damage and accidents could occur. ◄ 

Tire inflation pressures for driving 
above 100 mph or 160 km/h 

In order to drive at maximum speeds in 
excess of 100 mph or 160 km/h, adjust 
pressures to the respective tire inflation pres¬ 
sures listed on the following pages in the col¬ 
umns for traveling speeds including those 
exceeding 100 mph or 160 km/h. Otherwise, 
tire damage and accidents could occur. ◄ 

Observe all national and local maximum speed 
limits; otherwise, violations of the laws could 
occur. 




194 

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 









Tire inflation pressures Z4 sDriveSOi 

Tire size Pressure specifications in psi/kPa 



Traveling speeds 
up to a max. of 

100mph/160 km/h 

Traveling speeds 
including those exceeding 

100mph/160 km/h 

All pressure specifications in 
the table are indicated in 
psi/kilopascal with cold tires. 

H+cP 

#f+iD 

v j'rr 


Cold = ambient temperature 

* 


* * 


without Sport Package: 

225/45 R 17 91 V 

225/45 R 17 91 H M+S 

225/45 R 17 94 V M+S XL 

36/250 

44/300 

36/250 

44/300 

Front: 225/45 R 17 91 V 

36/250 

- 

36/250 

- 

Rear: 255/40 R 17 94 V 

- 

39/270 

- 

39/270 

Front: 225/40 R 18 88 W 

36/250 

- 

36/250 

- 

Rear: 255/35 R 18 90 W 

- 

42/290 

- 

42/290 

Front: 225/35 R 19 88 Y XL 

36/250 

- 

36/250 

- 

Rear: 255/30 R 19 91 Y XL 

- 

42/290 

- 

42/290 

with Sport Package: 

225/45 R 17 91 W 

225/45 R 17 91 H M+S 

225/45 R 17 94 V M+S XL 

36/250 

44/300 

36/250 

44/300 

Front: 225/45 R 17 91 W 

36/250 

- 

36/250 

- 

Rear: 255/40 R 17 94 W 

- 

39/270 

- 

39/270 

Front: 225/40 R 18 88 W 

36/250 

- 

38/260 

- 

Rear: 255/35 R 18 90 W 

- 

42/290 

- 

45/310 

Front: 225/35 R 19 88 Y XL 

36/250 

- 

36/250 

- 

Rear: 255/30 R 19 91 Y XL 

- 

42/290 

- 

44/300 


More details on the permissible load and weights can be found on page 228. 


195 

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 


Mobility 




Wheels and tires 


Tire inflation pressures Z4 sDrive35i 


Tire size 


Pressure specifications in psi/kPa 



Traveling speeds 
up to a max. of 

100mph/160 km/h 

Traveling speeds 
including those exceeding 

100mph/160 km/h 

All pressure specifications in 
the table are indicated in 
psi/kilopascal with cold tires. 

H+f> 

v'YETl gt . 

fTY 


Cold = ambient temperature 

* 


• 


without Sport Package: 

225/45 R 17 91 H M+S 

225/45 R 17 94 VM+S XL 

36/250 

44/300 

36/250 

44/300 

Front: 225/45 R 17 91 V 

36/250 

- 

36/250 

- 

Rear: 255/40 R 17 94 V 

- 

39/270 

- 

39/270 

Front: 225/40 R 18 88 W 

36/250 

- 

36/250 

- 

Rear: 255/35 R 18 90 W 

- 

42/290 

- 

42/290 

Front: 225/35 R 19 88 Y XL 

36/250 

- 

36/250 

- 

Rear: 255/30 R 19 91 Y XL 

- 

42/290 

- 

42/290 

with Sport Package: 

225/45 R 17 91 H M+S 

225/45 R 17 94 VM+S XL 

36/250 

44/300 

36/250 

44/300 

Front: 225/45 R 17 91W 

36/250 

- 

36/250 

- 

Rear: 255/40 R 17 94 W 

- 

39/270 

- 

39/270 

Front: 225/40 R 18 88 W 

36/250 

- 

38/260 

- 

Rear: 255/35 R 18 90 W 

- 

42/290 

- 

45/310 

Front: 225/35 R 19 88 Y XL 

36/250 

- 

36/250 

- 

Rear: 255/30 R 19 91 Y XL 

- 

42/290 

- 

44/300 

More details on the permissible load and weights can be found on page 228. 


196 


Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 



Tire identification marks 

Knowledge of the labeling on the side of the tire 
makes it easier to identify and choose the right 
tires. 

Tire size 

For example: 225/45 R 17 91 V 

Nominal width in mm —I I I 

Aspect ratio in % -^ 

Radial belt construction I 

Rim diameter in inches -1 

Load rating, _ j 

not on ZR tires 

Speed code letter, in _ 

front of the R on ZR tires 


Speed code letter 

Q = up to 100 mph or 160 km/h 
T = up to 118 mph or 190 km/h 
H = up to 131 mph or 210 km/h 

V = up to 150 mph or 240 km/h 
W = up to 167 mph or 270 km/h 

Y = up to 186 mph or 300 km/h 

Tire Identification Number 

Tires with DOT codes meet the guidelines of 
the US Department of Transportation. 

DOT code: 

For example: DOT xxxxxxx 3709 

Manufacturer's code | 
for tire make 
Tire size and 
tire design 

Tire age - 

Tire age 

The manufacturing date of tires is contained in 
the tire coding: DOT ... 3709 means that the 
tire was manufactured in week 37 of 2009. 

BMW recommends that you replace all tires 
after 6 years at most, even if some tires may last 
for 10 years. 


Uniform Tire Quality Grading 

Quality grades can be found where applicable 
on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and 
maximum section width. For example: 

Tread wear 200 Traction AA 
Temperature A 

DOT Quality Grades 

Tread wear 
Traction AAA B C 
Temperature ABC 

All passenger car tires must conform to 
Federal Safety Requirements in addition 
to these grades.◄ 

Tread wear 

The tread wear grade is a comparative rating 
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested 
under controlled conditions on a specified gov¬ 
ernment test course. For example, a tire graded 
150 would wear one and one-half (1 V 2 ) times as 
well on the government course as a tire graded 
100. The relative performance of tires depends 
upon the actual conditions of their use, how¬ 
ever, and may depart significantly from the 
norm due to variations in driving habits, service 
practices and differences in road characteris¬ 
tics and climate. 

Traction 

The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are 
AA, A, B, and C. 

Those grades represent the tire’s ability to stop 
on wet pavement as measured under controlled 
conditions on specified government test sur¬ 
faces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C 
may have poor traction performance. 

The traction grade assigned to this tire is 
based on straight-ahead braking traction 
tests, and does not include acceleration, cor¬ 
nering, hydroplaning, or peak traction charac¬ 
teristics. ◄ 




197 

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 


Mobility 















Wheels and tires 


Temperature 

The temperature grades are A, the highest, B, 
and C, representing the tire's resistance to the 
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate 
heat when tested under controlled conditions 
on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. 
Sustained high temperature can cause the 
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce 
tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to 
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to 
a level of performance which all passenger car 
tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehi¬ 
cle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A 
represent higher levels of performance on the 
laboratory test wheel than the minimum 
required by law. 

The temperature grade for this tire is 
established for a tire that is properly 
inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, 
underinflation, or excessive loading, either sep¬ 
arately or in combination, can cause heat 
buildup and possible tire failure.◄ 

RSC-run-flat tires 

You will recognize run-flat tires by a circular 
symbol containing the letters RSC on the side 
of the tire, refer to page 199. 

M+S 

Winter and all-season tires. 

These have better winter properties than sum¬ 
mer tires. 

XL 

Designation for specially reinforced tires. 

Tire condition 

Inspect your tires frequently for tread wear, 
signs of damage and for foreign objects lodged 
in the tread. Check the tread depth. 

Minimum tread depth 

The tread depth should not drop below 1/8 in/ 

3 mm, although, for example, European legisla¬ 
tion only specifies a minimum tread depth of 


1/16 in/1.6 mm. At tread depths below 1/8 in/ 

3 mm there is an increased risk of high-speed 
hydroplaning, even when only small amounts of 
water are present on the road surface. 

When winter tires wear down past a tread depth 
of 1/6 in/4 mm, they become perceptibly less 
suitable for winter conditions. In the interest of 
safety, new tires should be installed. 



Wear indicators in the base of the tread groove 
are distributed around the tire's circumference; 
the letters TWI, for Tread Wear Indicator, on the 
tire's sidewalls identify tires that incorporate 
these wear indicators. Once the tire tread has 
worn down to the wear indicators, the tire has 
worn to a depth of 1 /16 in/1.6 mm. 

Wheel/tire damage 

Please note that low-profile tires cause wheels, 
tires and suspension parts to be more sus¬ 
ceptible to road hazard and consequential 
damages. 

Unusual vibrations encountered during normal 
vehicle operation can indicate tire failure or 
some other vehicle defect. This can, for exam¬ 
ple, be caused by driving over curbs. The same 
applies to any other abnormal road behavior, 
such as pulling severely to the right or left. 

In these cases, reduce speed immedi¬ 
ately and have wheels and tires thor¬ 
oughly checked. To do so, drive carefully to the 
nearest BMW center or tire shop that works 
according to BMW repair procedures with cor¬ 
respondingly trained personnel. If necessary, 
have the vehicle towed there. 

Otherwise, tire damage can be extremely dan¬ 
gerous for vehicle occupants and other road 
users.◄ 




198 

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 




Tire age 

For various reasons, such as the development 
of brittleness, BMW recommends tire replace¬ 
ment after no more than 6 years, regardless of 
the actual wear of the tires. 

The manufacturing date of tires is contained in 
the tire coding: 

DOT ... 3709 means that the tire was manufac¬ 
tured in week 37 of 2009. 


Run-flat tires 



The symbol identifying run-flat tires is a circle 
with the letters RSC on the sidewall. 

Run-flat tires comprise a conditionally self-sup¬ 
porting tire and a special rim. The reinforce¬ 
ment in the sidewalls ensures that the tire can 
continue to be used subject to certain restric¬ 
tions, even if depressurized. 

For information on continuing to drive with a flat 
tire, refer to Indication of a flat tire, page 81 . 


New wheels and tires 

□ Have new wheels and tires installed only 
by your BMW center or tire shop that 
works according to BMW repair procedures 
with correspondingly trained personnel. If this 
work is not carried out properly, there is a dan¬ 
ger of subsequent damage and related safety 
hazards. Make sure that the new wheels are 
balanced.◄ 


Retreaded tires 

□ BMW recommends that you do not use 
retreaded tires, since driving safety may 
be impaired. The causes for this include poten¬ 
tially different tire casing structures and often 
wide variations in tire age, which can result in a 
limited service life.^ 


Correct wheels and tires 

When mounting new tires or changing over 
from summer to winter tires and vice versa, 
mount run-flat tires for your own safety. In the 
event of a flat, no spare wheel is available. Your 
BMW center will be glad to advise you. 

□ BMW recommends that you use only 
wheel and tire combinations that BMW 
has tested and approved for your particular 
vehicle. Variations in factors such as manufac¬ 
turing tolerances mean that even wheels and 
tires with identical official size ratings could 
actually have different dimensions, which could 
lead to body contact and thus to severe acci¬ 
dents. If non-approved wheels and tires are 
used, BMW cannot evaluate their suitability, 
and therefore cannot guarantee their driving 
safety. ◄ 

You can inquire about the right wheel/tire com¬ 
bination at your BMW center. 

The correct combination of wheels and tires is 
also necessary to ensure reliable operation of 
various vehicle systems such as ABS, DSC 
or TPM. 

To maintain good handling and vehicle 
response, use only tires of a single brand and 
tread configuration. After a tire has been dam¬ 
aged, mount the previous wheel and tire combi¬ 
nation again as soon as possible. 

Wheels with Tire Pressure Monitor 
TPM electronics 

When mounting new tires or changing over 
from summer to winter tires, or vice versa, only 
use wheels with TPM electronics; otherwise, 
the Tire Pressure Monitor may not be able to 
detect a puncture, refer to page 82. Your BMW 
center will be glad to advise you. 


199 

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 


Mobility 




Wheels and tires 


Recommended tire brands 



Certain makes of tire are recommended by 
BMW for each tire size. They are marked with a 
clearly visible BMW designation on the sidewall 
of the tire. 

When properly used, these tires meet the high¬ 
est standards in terms of safety and handling 
characteristics. 

Special characteristics of winter tires 

BMW recommends winter tires for winter roads 
or at temperatures below +45 °F 1+7 °C. 
Although all-season M+S tires provide better 
winter traction than summer tires, they gener¬ 
ally fail to provide the same levels of cold- 
weather performance as winter tires. 

Pay attention to speed 

□ Always comply with thespeed limitforthe 
winter tires mounted on your car; failure 
to do so could result in tire damage and acci¬ 
dents.◄ 

If the car is capable of speeds higher than that 
permitted for the winter tires, a label stating the 
maximum permitted speed for the mounted 
tires must be displayed in your field of view. 
Specialist tire dealers and your BMW center 
can supply these labels. 

Storage 

Always store wheels and tires in a cool, dry 
place with as little exposure to light as possible. 
Always protect tires against all contact with oil, 
grease and fuels. Do not exceed the maximum 
tire inflation pressure indicated on the sidewall 
of the tire. 


Swapping wheels between axles 

BMW advises against swapping wheels 
between the front and rear axles, even if all tires 
have the same size, as this could impair driving 
characteristics. If the tires are of mixed sizes, 
swapping wheels between the axles is not per¬ 
missible. 


Snow chains* 


Only certain fine-link snow chains have been 
tested by BMW, classified as safe for use and 
recommended. Consult your BMW center for 
more information. 

Snow chains must be mounted in pairs and on 
the rear wheels only. Observe the manufac¬ 
turer's instructions when mounting snow 
chains. Do not exceed a speed of 30 mph or 
50 km/h. 


> 


Do not initialize the Flat Tire Monitor if 
snow chains are mounted; otherwise, the 
instrument might issue an incorrect reading. 
When driving with snow chains, you may find it 
helpful to activate DTC temporarily, refer 
to page 78. ◄ 


200 

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 








Under the hood 


Do not work on the car unless you pos¬ 
sess the necessary technical knowledge. 
If you are unfamiliar with the statutory guide¬ 
lines, have any work on the vehicle performed 
only by a BMW center or by a workshop that 
works according to BMW repair procedures 
with correspondingly trained personnel. If this 
work is not carried out properly, there is a dan¬ 
ger of subsequent damage and related safety 
hazards. ◄ 


Hood 

Releasing 



Closing 



Close the hood from a height of approx. 16 in/ 
40 cm with momentum. It must be clearly heard 
to engage. 

Make sure that the closing path of the 
hood is clear; otherwise, injuries may 
result. 

If you see any signs while driving your vehicle 
that the hood is not completely closed, stop at 
once and close it securely. ◄ 




Pull the lever. 


Opening 



To avoid damage, make sure that the 
wiper arms are against the windshield 
before you open the engine compartment. Do 
not open the engine hood before the engine has 
cooled down; otherwise, injuries may result.4 


Push the release lever to the right and open 
the hood. 


201 

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 


Mobility 











Under the hood 


Important parts of the engine compartment 



1 Expansion tank for coolant, refer 
to page 204 

2 Jump-starting connection, negative termi¬ 
nal, refer to page 219 

3 Vehicle identification number 


4 Washer fluid filler neck for headlamp clean¬ 
ing system and window washer system, 
refer to page 61 

5 Fluid filler neck for engine oil, refer 
to page 204 

6 Jump-starting connection, positive termi¬ 
nal, refer to page 219 


Engine oil 

The engine oil consumption is dependent on 
driving style and driving conditions. 

Checking engine oil level 

Your car is equipped with an electronic oil-level 
monitor. 

For the oil level to be measured and displayed 
correctly, it is necessary that the engine be at 
operating temperature, i.e., after uninterrupted 
driving for at least approx. 6.2 miles/10 km. You 
can have the oil level displayed while you are 
driving, or while the vehicle is at a standstill on a 
level surface and the engine is running. 


Display in the instrument cluster 



1. Push button 1 in the turn indicator lever up 
or down repeatedly until the appropriate 
symbol is shown in the display, accompa¬ 
nied by the word "OIL". 


202 

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 























2. Press button 2 in the turn indicator lever. 
The oil level is checked and the reading dis¬ 
played. 


Possible displays 



1 Oil level OK 

2 Oil level is being checked. 

This can take about 3 minutes if the car is at 
a standstill on a level surface, or about 
5 minutes while the car is on the move. 

3 Oil level down to minimum: 

Add engine oil as soon as possible, but no 
more than 1 US quart/1 liter, refer also to 
Adding engine oil on page 204. 

4 Oil level is too high. 

□ Too much oil will harm the engine. 

Have the vehicle checked without 
delay.^ 

5 The oil level sensor is defective. 

Do not add engine oil. You can continue 
your journey. Note the newly calculated dis¬ 
tance remaining to the next oil service, refer 
to page 69. Have the system checked as 
soon as possible. 


Display via iDrive 

1. "Vehicle Info" 

2. "Vehicle status" 



3. "Engine oil level" 



Possible messages 

> "Engine oil level OK" 

> "Measurement not possible at this time." 

> "Measuring engine oil level...": 

This can take about 3 minutes if the car is at 
a standstill on a level surface and the engine 
is running, and about 5 minutes while the 
car is moving. 

If engine oil was added, it may take up to 
30 minutes to obtain an oil level reading. 

> "Engine oil level below minimum. Add 1 
quart!" 

Add engine oil as soon as possible, but no 
more than 1 US quart/1 liter, refer also to 
Adding engine oil below. 

> "Engine oil level too high! Have this 
checked." 


□ Too much oil will harm the engine. 

Have the vehicle checked without 
delay. ◄ 


203 

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 


Mobility 







































Under the hood 


> "Measurement inactive. Have this 
checked." 

Do not add engine oil. You can continue 
your journey. Note the newly calculated dis¬ 
tance remaining to the next oil service, refer 
to page 69. Have the system checked as 
soon as possible. 


Adding engine oil 



Do not add 1 US quart/1 liter of engine oil until 
a corresponding message is shown on the 
Control Display. 

Add oil within the next 125 miles/200 km; 
otherwise, the engine damage could 
occur.^ 

Keep oils, greases, etc. out of the reach of 
children and comply with the relevant 
warnings on the containers. Otherwise, health 
hazards may result.^ 

Oil change 

Have oil changed only at your BMW center or at 
a workshop that works according to BMW 
repair procedures with correspondingly trained 
personnel. 

Oil types 

Do not use oil additives as these may 
cause engine damage.◄ 

Specified engine oils 

Your service center can advise you on which 
engine oils have been approved by the manu¬ 
facturer of your vehicle. 

The engine oil quality is critical for the life of the 
engine. 


Approved oils can be identified by the following 
specification: 

Preferred: BMW Longlife-01 

BMW Longlife-01 FE 
Alternative: BMW Longlife-98 

Approved oils belong to the following viscosity 
classes: SAE 0W-40, SAE 0W-30, SAE 5W-40 
and SAE 5W-30. 

Alternative oil types 

If the approved engine oils are not available, up 
to 1 US quart/1 liter of another oil with the fol¬ 
lowing specification may be used: 

API SM or higher 

BMW recommends CdStfOl / 

Coolant 

Do not add coolant to the cooling system 
when the engine is hot. Escaping coolant 
can cause burns.◄ 

Coolant consists of half water and half additive. 
Not all commercially available additives are suit¬ 
able for your BMW. Ask your BMW center for 
suitable additives. 

Only use suitable additives; otherwise, 
engine damage may result. Because 
additives are harmful to your health, it is 
important to follow the instructions on the con¬ 
tainers.◄ 

Comply with the appropriate environ¬ 
mental protection regulations when dis¬ 
posing of coolant additives.◄ 

Checking coolant level 

1. Do not open the engine hood before the 
engine has cooled down. 

2. Turn the expansion tank cap counterclock¬ 
wise slightly to allow any accumulated pres¬ 
sure to escape, then continue turning 

to open. 








204 

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 






3. The coolant level is correct if it is between 
the maximum and minimum marks in the 
filler neck, refer also to the diagram next to 
the filler neck. 



4. If the coolant is low, slowly add coolant up to 
the specified level; do not overfill. 

5. Turn the cap until there is an audible click. 

6. Have the reason for the coolant loss elimi¬ 
nated as soon as possible. 


205 

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 


Mobility 





Maintenance 


Maintenance 


BMW Maintenance System 



The BMW Maintenance System supports the 
preservation of the traffic and operating safety 
of your BMW. The objective is to optimize 
efforts with respect to minimal vehicle mainte¬ 
nance costs. 

If and when you come to sell your BMW, a com¬ 
prehensive record of servicing will prove a sig¬ 
nificant benefit. 

Condition Based Service CBS 

Sensors and special algorithms take the differ¬ 
ent driving conditions of your BMW into 
account. Condition Based Service uses this to 
determine the current and future service 
requirements. By letting you define a service 
and maintenance regimen that reflects your 
own individual requirements, the system builds 
the basis for trouble-free driving. 

On the Control Display, you can have the 
remaining times or distances for selected main¬ 
tenance tasks and any legally prescribed dates 
displayed, refer to page 69: 

> Engine oil 

> Brake pads, separately for the front 
and back 

> Brake fluid 

> Vehicle check 

> Legally mandated inspections depending 
on local regulations 


Service data in the remote control 

Your vehicle continuously stores service- 
requirement information in the remote control 
while you are driving. Your BMW Service Advi¬ 
sor can read out this data from the remote con¬ 
trol unit, and propose an optimized mainte¬ 
nance approach. Whenever you take your car in 
for servicing you should therefore hand your 
BMW Service Advisor the remote control unit 
that you last used. 

Make sure that the date is always set cor¬ 
rectly, refer to page 72; otherwise, the 
effectiveness of Condition Based Service CBS 
is not assured.◄ 



Service and Warranty Information 
Booklet for US models and Warranty 
and Service Guide Booklet for 
Canadian models 

Please consult your Service and Warranty Infor¬ 
mation Booklet for US models and Warranty 
and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models 
for additional information on service require¬ 
ments. 


D> 


BMW recommends that you have service 
and repair operations performed at your 
BMW center. 

Take the time to ensure that these service pro¬ 
cedures are confirmed by entries in your vehi¬ 
cle's Service and Warranty Information Booklet 
for US models and Warranty and Service Guide 
Booklet for Canadian models. These entries 
verify that your vehicle has received the speci¬ 
fied regular maintenance.◄ 


206 

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 





Socket for Onboard 
Diagnosis OBD 


Data recorders 

Your vehicle may be equipped with one or sev¬ 
eral measuring or diagnostic modules or a 
device for recording or sending certain vehicle 
data or information. In addition, if you have 
signed a service contract for BMW Assist, cer¬ 
tain vehicle data may be transmitted or 
recorded in order to facilitate the corresponding 
services. 



Primary components that make up exhaust 
emissions can be checked by a device via the 
OBD socket. 

This socket is located under a cover on the left 
on the driver's side. 

Exhaust emission values 

SERVICE The warning lamp lights up: 

ENgJNf The vehicle emissions are raised. The 
500 H 

trip can be continued. Have the car 
checked as soon as possible. 

Canadian models display this warn- 
ing lamp. 

The lamp flashes under certain condi¬ 
tions. This indicates excessive misfiring in the 
engine. If this happens, you should reduce your 
speed and visit your nearest BMW center as 
soon as possible. Severe engine misfiring can 
quickly lead to serious damage of emissions- 
related components, especially the catalytic 
converter. 

The warning lamp comes on if the gas 
cap is not properly tightened and the 
OBD system assumes that fuel vapor 
is escaping. If the gas cap is then tightened, the 
warning lamp should go out within a few days. 



207 

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 


Mobility 






Care 


Care products 


Regular cleaning and care contributes signifi¬ 
cantly to the value retention of your BMW. 

BMW recommends cleaning and caring foryour 
vehicle with products that are approved by 
BMW for this purpose. 


Your BMW center will be happy to advise you on 
the products and services available for cleaning 
and caring for your BMW. 


> 


Original BMW CareProducts have been 
material-tested, laboratory-checked and 
proven in the field, and offer optimal care and 
protection for your vehicle.◄ 


Do not use cleaners that contain alcohol 
or solvents as these may result in 

ge.^ 

Cleaning agents can contain substances 
that are dangerous or hazardous to your 
health. Therefore, follow the warning and safety 
instructions on the packaging. When cleaning 
inside the vehicle, always open the doors or 
windows of the vehicle. In enclosed areas, pro¬ 
vide for sufficient ventilation. Only use products 
designed for cleaning vehicles.◄ 



Automatic car washes 

Preference should be given to cloth carwashes. 

Do not use high-pressure car washes; 
otherwise, water may drip into the vehicle 
around the windows.◄ 

Before driving into a car wash, ensure that it is 
suitable for your BMW. Check the following: 

> Dimensions of your vehicle, refer 
to page 227. 

> If necessary: fold in the exterior mirrors, 
refer to page 45. 

> Maximum permissible tire width. 

Avoid carwashes with guide rail heights 
over 4 in/10 cm; otherwise, there is dan¬ 
ger of damaging chassis parts.◄ 

Preparations before driving into an automatic 
carwash: 

> Unscrew the rod antenna*. 

> Deactivate the rain sensor* to avoid unin¬ 
tentional activation of the wipers. 

> Remove additional attachments, e.g., spoil¬ 
ers or telephone antennas, if there is a pos¬ 
sibility that they could be damaged. 



Exterior care 

Washing the vehicle 

Especially during the winter months, 
ensure that the vehicle is washed more 
frequently. Heavy soiling and road salt can lead 
to vehicle damage.◄ 

After washing the vehicle, apply the 
brakes briefly to dry them; otherwise, 
water can reduce braking efficiency over the 
short term and brake discs can corrode.◄ 


Automatic transmission 

Before driving into an automatic carwash, per¬ 
form the following steps to ensure that the vehi¬ 
cle can roll: 

1. Insert the remote control, even with Com¬ 
fort Access, into the ignition lock. 

2. Move the selector lever to position N. 

3. Release the parking brake. 

4. Switch off the engine. 

5. Leave the remote control in the ignition lock 
so that the vehicle can roll. 




208 


Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 









7-gear sport automatic transmission 
with dual clutch 

Before driving into an automatic carwash, per¬ 
form the following steps to ensure that the vehi¬ 
cle can roll: 

1. Insert the remote control, even with Com¬ 
fort Access, into the ignition lock. 

2. Engage transmission position N. 

3. Release the parking brake. 

4. Switch off the engine. 

5. Leave the remote control in the ignition lock 
so that the vehicle can roll. 

Transmission position P is engaged: 

> Automatically after approx. 30 minutes 

> When you take the remote control out of the 
ignition lock 


Steam jets / high-pressure washers 

Q When using steam jets or high-pressure 
washers, ensure that you maintain suffi¬ 
cient clearance to the vehicle and do not exceed 
a temperature of 140°F/60°C. 

Insufficient clearance or excessive pressure or 
temperature can lead to component damage or 
water penetration. Follow the operating instruc¬ 
tions of the high-pressure washer. ◄ 

When using high-pressure washers, do 
not spray against the seals of the retract¬ 
able hardtop, the sensors and the cameras, e.g., 
of the Park Distance Control or Rear View Cam¬ 
era, for an extended period and maintain a dis¬ 
tance of at least 12 in/30 cm.^ 


Manual carwash 


When washing the vehicle by hand, use large 
quantities of water and car shampoo if neces¬ 
sary. Clean the vehicle with a sponge or wash¬ 
ing brush, applying light pressure only. 

Before cleaning the windshield, deacti¬ 
vate the rain sensor or switch off the igni¬ 
tion to prevent unintentional activation of the 
wipers.◄ 



Observe local regulations pertaining to 
washing vehicles by hand.^ 


Headlamps 

Do not rub them dry and do not use abrasive or 
corrosive cleaning agents. 

Loosen dirt, e.g., insects, with shampoo or 
insect remover and wash away with copious 
quantities of water. 


Thaw ice with a windshield deicer and do not 
use an ice scraper. 

Windows 

Clean the inside and outside surfaces of the 
windows and the mirrors with window cleaner. 



Do not clean the mirrors with cleaners 
containing quartz.◄ 


Retractable hardtop 

Proceed as you would in a normal car wash. 


D> 


When you open a wet hardtop, water 
drops may run into the cargo area. If nec¬ 
essary, remove items from the cargo area 
beforehand to avoid water stains or soiling.◄ 


Paintwork care 

Regular care contributes to value retention and 
protects the paintwork against the long-term 
effects of damaging substances. 


Region-specific environmental influences can 
damage the vehicle paintwork. Therefore, it is 
important to adapt the frequency and scope of 
car care accordingly. 

Immediately remove aggressive materials such 
as spilled fuel, oil, grease, brake fluid, tree sap 
or bird droppings to prevent damage to the 
paintwork. 


Repairing paintwork damage 

Immediately repair scratches or similar 
damage, such as that caused by stones 


D> 


hitting the vehicle, where necessary to prevent 
rusting.◄ 


BMW recommends having paintwork damage 
repaired by a professional paint repair work¬ 
shop according to BMW specifications using 
original BMW paint materials. 


209 

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 


Mobility 





















Care 


Preservation 

A preservation treatment is necessary when 
water no longer beads off the clean paintwork 
surface. Only use products for paintwork pres¬ 
ervation that contain carnauba or synthetic 
waxes. 


Rubber seals 

Treat only with water or rubber care products. 

Q Do not use silicon-containing care prod¬ 
ucts on rubber seals; otherwise, noise 
and damage could occur. ◄ 

Chrome parts 

Carefully clean vehicle parts, such as the radia¬ 
tor grill, door handles or window frames, with 
copious quantities of water and a shampoo 
additive. For additional treatment, use a chrome 
polish. 


Light-alloy wheels 

For technical reasons, dust is generated during 
braking that is deposited on the light-alloy 
wheels. Remove the dust regularly using acid- 
free rim cleaner. 


□ Do not use aggressive, acidic, strongly 
alkaline and abrasive cleaning agents or 
steam jets over 140 °F /60 °C; otherwise, dam¬ 
age may occur.◄ 


Outside sensors / cameras 

~“ Keep the sensors and cameras on the 
outside of the vehicle, e.g., those of Park 
Distance Control, clean and free of ice to ensure 
that they remain fully functional.◄ 


Interior care 

Upholstery fabrics/cloth trims/ 
Alcantara fabrics 

Vacuum regularly with a vacuum cleaner to 
remove superficial dirt. 

To remove severe spots such as stains from 
beverages, use a soft sponge or lint-free 
microfiber cloth and suitable interior cleaners. 
Follow the instructions on the packaging. 


> 


Clean the upholstery down to the seams 
using a sweeping motion. Avoid strong 
rubbing.◄ 

□ Opened Velcro fasteners, etc., on pants 
or other articles of clothing can damage 
the seat covers. Ensure that Velcro fasteners 
are closed.◄ 


Leather/leather trim 

The leather used by BMW is a high quality 
natural product. Slight irregularities in the 


> 


leather are a typical characteristic of natural 
leather.^ 


Dust and road grit in the pores and folds of the 
leather have an abrasive effect, leading to 
increased wear and causing the leather surface 
to become brittle prematurely. Therefore, regu¬ 
larly dust the leather with a cloth, for example. 

Clean light-colored leather more frequently as 
dust and dirt are more noticeable. 


Treat the leather at least once every two 
months using a leather lotion as dirt and grease 
will gradually attack the leather's protective 
layer. 



Rivets, etc., on pants or other articles of 
clothing can damage the seat covers.◄ 


Carpets / cargo area 

You can vacuum the carpets and floor mats or 
clean them with interior cleaner if heavily soiled. 

The floor mats can be removed for cleaning. 
When replacing the mats, ensure that the seat 
rails do not extend over the floor mats, as this 
may damage the mats. 

Lint on the floor mats occurs for technical rea¬ 
sons and can be removed by vacuuming 
repeatedly. 

When cleaning the interior, do not move 
both seats all the way forward while mov¬ 
ing them to their uppermost position and lean¬ 
ing the backrests forward. Otherwise, the seats 
could hit and damage the seal on the wind¬ 
shield, the sun visor or the headliner. ◄ 



210 

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 














Interior plastic parts 

> Imitation leather surfaces 

> Lamp glasses 

> Display pane of instrument cluster 

> Matte parts 

Clean with water and solvent-free plastic 
cleaner if necessary. 

Fine wood parts 

Clean fine wood trim and fine wood parts with a 
damp cloth. Wipe dry with a soft cloth. 

Safety belts 

Dirty belt straps impede the reeling action and 
thus have a negative impact on safety. 

Do not clean with cleaning agents as 
these may destroy the fabric. ◄ 

Use only a mild soapy solution, with the safety 
belts clipped into their buckles. Do notallowthe 
reels to retract the safety belts until they are dry. 

Interior sensors / cameras 

To clean interior sensors and cameras, e.g., of 
the high-beam assistant, use a lint-free cloth 
moistened with glass cleaner. 


CD/DVD drives 

Do not use a cleaning CD, as it may dam¬ 
age parts of the drive.◄ 

Vehicle storage 

If your vehicle is to be decommissioned for 
longer than three months, your BMW center or 
a workshop that operates according to BMW 
specifications will be glad to advise you. 




Displays 

To clean the displays, e.g., of the radio or instru¬ 
ment cluster, use a display cleaning cloth or a 
soft, non-abrasive, lint-free cloth. 


□ Avoid applying excessive pressure when 
cleaning the displays; otherwise, damage 
may occur. ◄ 


□ Do not use chemical or abrasive house¬ 
hold cleaning agents. Keep all types of 
fluid away from the device. Otherwise, surfaces 
or electrical components may be corroded or 
damaged.◄ 


211 

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 


Mobility 




Replacing components 


Replacing components 


Onboard vehicle tool kit 



The onboard vehicle tool kit is stored in a pouch 
under the cargo area floor panel. 


ing your BMW center perform any work that you 
do not feel competent to perform yourself or 
that is not described here. 


> 


Never touch the glass of new bulbs with 
your bare fingers, as even minute 
amounts of contamination will burn into the 
bulb's surface and reduce its service life. Use a 
clean tissue, cloth or something similar, or hold 
the bulb by its base.^ 


You can obtain a selection of replacement bulbs 
at your BMW center. 


□ Only change bulbs while they are cool to 
the touch; otherwise, you could suffer 
burns.◄ 


Wiper blades 



1. Fold up the wiper arm. 

2. Fold the wiper blade upwards. 

3. Press the hook. 

4. Pull the wiper blade downward out of the 
holder and remove it toward the top left, see 
arrow. 


Q To avoid damage, make sure that the 
wiper arms are resting against the 
windshield before you open the engine com¬ 
partment. ◄ 


Lamps and bulbs 

Lamps and bulbs make an essential contribu¬ 
tion to vehicle safety. They should, therefore, 
be handled carefully. BMW recommends hav¬ 


□ When working on electrical systems, 
always begin by switching off the con¬ 
sumer in question; otherwise, short-circuits 
could result. To avoid possible injury or equip¬ 
ment damage when replacing bulbs, observe 
any instructions provided by the bulb manufac- 
turer.4 


For care of the headlamps, please follow the 
instructions in the chapter entitled "Care"'. 

“TT” If the routine for changing a particular 

bulb is not described here, please contact 
your BMW center or a workshop that works 
according to BMW repair procedures with cor¬ 
respondingly trained personnel.◄ 


Light-emitting diodes LED 

Light-emitting diodes installed behind translu¬ 
cent lenses serve as the light source for many of 
the controls and displays in your vehicle. These 
light-emitting diodes, which operate using a 
concept similar to that applied in conventional 
lasers, are officially designated as Class 1 light- 
emitting diodes. 

□ Do not remove the covers or expose the 
eyes directly to the unfiltered light source 
for several hours; otherwise, this could cause 
irritation to the retina.◄ 


212 

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 





















Xenon lamps 

Have any work on the xenon lamp system, 
including bulb replacements, performed 
only by a BMW center or a workshop that works 
according to BMW repair procedures with cor¬ 
respondingly trained personnel. Otherwise, if 
such work is carried out improperly, the high 
voltage in the system presents the danger of 
fatal injuries.◄ 

Parking lamps and roadside parking 
lamps, daytime running lights 

H8 bulb, 35 watts 

1. Switch off the lamps and take the remote 
control out of the ignition lock. 

2. Turn the upper access cover to the left and 
remove it, see arrow. 



3. Turn the lamp by approx. 90°, see arrow 1, 
and pull it out, see arrow 2 . 



4. Disconnect the plug, change the bulb and 
reconnect the plug. 

5. Insert the bulb and turn it until it stops. 

6. Screw on the access cover tightly by turn¬ 
ing it to the right. 

Be careful when attaching the access 
cover; otherwise, it may leak, causing 
damage to the headlamp system.◄ 


Turn signals, front 

P24W bulb, 24 watt 

1. Turn the wheel outwards. 



2. Turn both locks in the wheel house to the 
left and remove the cover. 



3. Turn the bulb holder to the left and 
remove it. 


4. Turn the bulb to the right, see arrow, and 
remove it. 



5. Change the bulb and screw it into the bulb 
holder toward the left. 

6. Insert the bulb holder and turn it to the right. 

7. Reattach the cover. 




213 

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 


Mobility 


















Replacing components 


Tail lamps 

> Brake lamp, backup lamp: 
W16W bulb, 16 watts 



1 Brake lamp 

2 Tail lamp, LED 

3 Brake lamp 

4 Backup lamp 

5 Turn signal/dynamic brake lamp*, LED 

If bulb 2 or 5 malfunctions, please contact your 
BMW center or a workshop that works accord¬ 
ing to BMW repair procedures with correspond¬ 
ingly trained personnel. 

Changing the backup lamp and inner 
brake lamp 

1. Press the locking mechanism in the cargo 
area, see arrow, and remove the cover. 



2. Pull out the bulb holder and replace 
the bulb. 

> Inner brake lamp: 



> Backup lamp: 





3. Attach the bulb holder. 

4. Reattach the cover. 

Changing the outer brake lamp 

1. Remove the cover in the cargo area. 



214 


Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 

















2. Pull out the bulb holder, see arrow, and 
change the bulb. 



3. Attach the bulb holder. 

4. Reattach the cover. 


License plate lamp, rear lamp, center 

brake lamp and turn signal 

These lamps use LED technology for operation. 
In the event of a malfunction, please contact 
your BMW center or a workshop that works 
according to BMW repair procedures with cor¬ 
respondingly trained personnel. 

Changing wheels 

Your BMW is equipped with run-flat tires as 
standard. This removes the need to change a 
wheel immediately in the event of a puncture. 

For information on continuing to drive with a 
damaged tire, refer to Indication of a flat tire 
on page 81. 

The symbol identifying run-flat tires is a circle 
with the letters RSC on the sidewall, refer to 
Run-flat tires, page 199. 

When mounting new tires or changing over 
from summer to winter tires and vice versa, 
mount run-flat tires for your own safety. In the 
event of a flat, no spare wheel is available. Your 
BMW center will be glad to advise you. Refer 
also to New wheels and tires, page 199. 

..... “I The tools for changing wheels are avail¬ 
able as optional accessories from your 
BMW center. ◄ 


Jack mounting points 



The jacking points are at the positions shown in 
the illustration. 


Lug bolt lock* 



2 


1 Lug bolt for adapter 

2 Adapter, in onboard vehicle tool kit 

Removing the wind deflector 

1. Remove the adapter 2 from the onboard 
vehicle tool kit and insert it in the lug bolt. 

2. Unscrew the lug bolt 1. 

Remove the adapter after screwing the lug bolt 
back on. 

The code number is stamped on the front of the 
adapter. Please note down this number and 
keep it in a safe place in case the adapter should 
get lost. 




215 

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 


Mobility 














Replacing components 


Vehicle battery 

Battery care 

The battery is 100% maintenance-free, the 
electrolyte will last for the life of the battery 
when the vehicle is operated in a temperate cli¬ 
mate. Your BMW center will be glad to advise in 
all matters concerning the battery. 

Battery replacement 

Only used approved batteries. 

Only use vehicle batteries that have been 
approved for your vehicle by the manufacturer; 
otherwise, the vehicle could be damaged 
and systems or functions may not be fully 
available.◄ 

After a battery replacement, have the battery 
registered on the vehicle by your service center 
to ensure that all comfort functions are fully 
available. 


Power failure 

After a temporary power loss, the functioning of 
some equipment may be limited and require 
reinitialization. Individual settings may likewise 
have been lost and will have to be programmed: 

> Time and date 

These values must be updated, refer 
to page 71. 

> Radio 

In some cases, stations may have to be 
stored again, refer to page 144. 

> Navigation system 

Operability must be waited for, refer 
to page 120. 

> Seat and mirror memory 

The positions must be stored again, refer 
to page 43. 

> Inside rearview mirror with digital compass 
The system must be calibrated, refer 

to page 103. 



Charging the battery 

Only charge the battery in the vehicle via the 
terminals in the engine compartment with the 
engine off. Connections, refer to Jump-starting 
on page 219. 

Disposal 

Have old batteries disposed of by your 
BMW center or bring them to a recycling 
center. Maintain the battery in an upright posi¬ 
tion for transport and storage. Always secure 
the battery against tipping over during 
transport. ◄ 


Fuses 

Never attempt to repair a blown fuse and 
do not replace a defective fuse with a sub¬ 
stitute of another color or amperage rating; oth¬ 
erwise, this could lead to a circuit overload, ulti¬ 
mately resulting in a fire in the vehicle.◄ 

1. Remove the screws 1 using the screwdriver 
from the onboard vehicle tool kit. 

2. Remove the cover 2 , unwinding the cable to 
the footwell lamp*, if necessary. 





216 


Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 





3. Release the shiny fastener 3. 



4. Fold the current distributor 4 downward 
and pull forward. 

A pair of plastic tweezers is found on the current 
distributor. 

See the inside of the cover for information on 
fuse assignment. 

The cover is reinstalled in reverse order. 


217 

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 


Mobility 





Giving and receiving assistance 


Giving and receiving assistance 


Emergency Request* 

Requirements 

> BMW Assist is activated. Activating 
BMW Assist, refer to page 186. 

> Radio readiness is on. 

> The BMW Assist system is logged on to a 
wireless network. 

> The Emergency Request system is 
operable. 

> Equipment version with full preparation 
package mobile phone. This equipment 
makes it possible to send an Emergency 
Request even if no mobile phone is paired 
with the vehicle. 

Once your service contract for BMW Assist 
expires, the BMW Assist system can be deacti¬ 
vated by a BMW center without you having to 
visit a workshop. Once the BMW Assist system 
has been deactivated, Emergency Requests 
are not possible. The BMW Assist system can 
be reactivated by a BMW center after a new 
contract has been signed. 

Sending an Emergency Request 

1. Briefly press the cover flap to open. 



2. Press the SOS button until the LED in the 
button lights up. 

As soon as the voice connection to the BMW 
Assist Response Center has been established, 
the LED flashes. 


Once the BMW Assist Response Center has 
received your Emergency Request, the 
BMW Assist Response Center contacts you 
and takes further steps to help you. Even if you 
are unable to respond, the BMW Assist 
Response Center will be able to initiate further 
steps to assist you under certain conditions. 

If the circumstances allow this, remain in the 
vehicle until the connection has been estab¬ 
lished. You will then be able to provide a 
detailed description of the situation. 

In a BMW Assist Emergency Request, data for 
determining the necessary rescue measures 
are transmitted to the BMW Assist Response 
Center, e.g., the current position of your vehicle, 
if it can be determined. 

If the LED is flashing but the BMW Assist 
Response Center cannot be heard over the 
hands-free system, it is possible that the 
hands-free system is malfunctioning. You may 
still be heard by the BMW Assist Response 
Center, however. 

Linder certain conditions, an Emergency 
Request is sent automatically immediately after 
a severe accident. This Automatic Collision 
Notification is not affected by the button being 
pressed. 

For technical reasons, the Emergency 
Request service cannot be guaranteed 
for the most unfavorable conditions.◄ 


Roadside Assistance 

BMW Roadside Assistance is there to assist 
you around the clock in the event of a break¬ 
down, including on weekends and public 
holidays. 

The phone numbers of Roadside Assistance in 
your home country can be found in the Contact 
brochure. 



218 


Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 









In vehicles equipped with BMW Assist or 
TeleService, you can establish contact with 
BMW Roadside Assistance for breakdown 
assistance directly via iDrive, refer to page 185. 

First aid pouch* 

Some of the articles contained in the first aid 
pouch have a limited service life. Therefore, 
check the expiration dates of the contents reg¬ 
ularly and replace any items in good time, if nec¬ 
essary. 



The first aid pouch is located on the lateral stor¬ 
age shelf behind the seats. 


Warning triangle* 



The warning triangle is located in a holder in the 
luggage compartment lid. Press the tabs to take 
it out. 


Jump-starting 

If the car's own battery is flat, your BMW's 
engine can be started by connecting two 
jumper cables to another vehicle's battery. You 


can also use the same method to help start 
another vehicle. Only use jumper cables with 
fully-insulated clamp handles. 

Do not touch any electrically live parts 
when the engine is running, or a fatal acci¬ 
dent may occur. Carefully adhere to the follow¬ 
ing sequence, both to prevent damage to one or 
both vehicles, and to guard against possible 
personal injuries.◄ 

Preparation 

1. Check whether the battery of the other 
vehicle has a voltage of 12 volts and 
approximately the same capacitance in Ah. 
This information can be found on the 
battery. 

2. Switch off the engine of the assisting 
vehicle. 

3. Switch off any consumers in both vehicles. 

There must not be any contact between 
the bodies of the two vehicles; otherwise, 
there is a danger of shorting.◄ 

Connecting jumper cables 

Connect the jumper cables in the correct 
order, so that no sparks which could 
cause injury occur. ◄ 

Your BMW has a jump-starting connection in 
the engine compartment which acts as the bat¬ 
tery's positive terminal, refer also to the Engine 
compartment overview on page 202. The cap is 
marked with +. 

1. Pull the cap of the BMW jump-starting con¬ 
nection up to remove. 






219 

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 


Mobility 














Giving and receiving assistance 


2. Attach one terminal clamp of the plus/+ 
jumper cable to the positive terminal of the 
battery or a starting-aid terminal of the vehi¬ 
cle providing assistance. 

3. Attach the second terminal clamp of the 
plus/+jumper cable to the positive terminal 
of the battery or a starting-aid terminal of 
the vehicle to be started. 

4. Attach one terminal clamp of the minus/- 
jumper cable to the negative terminal of the 
battery or to an engine or body ground of 
the assisting vehicle. 

Your BMW has a special nut as body ground 
or negative pole. 



5. Attach the second terminal clamp of the 
minus/-jumper cable to the negative termi¬ 
nal of the battery or to the engine or body 
ground of the vehicle to be started. 

Starting the engine 

1. Start the engine of the donor vehicle and 
allow it to run for a few minutes at slightly 
increased idle speed. 

2. Start the engine on the other vehicle in the 
usual way. 

If the first start attempt is not successful, 
wait a few minutes before another attempt 
in order to allow the discharged battery to 
recharge. 

3. Let the engines run for a few minutes. 

4. Disconnect the jumper cables by reversing 
the above connecting sequence. 

If necessary, have the battery checked and 

recharged. 



Never use spray fluids to start the 
engine.◄ 


Tow-starting, towing away 

Observe the applicable laws and regula¬ 
tions for tow-starting and towing 
vehicles.◄ 

Do not transport any passengers other 
than the driver in a vehicle that is being 
towed. ◄ 

Using a tow fitting 

The screw-in tow fitting must always be carried 
in the car. It can be screwed in at the front or 
rear of the BMW. 

It is stored in the onboard vehicle tool kit under¬ 
neath the floor panel in the cargo area, refer 
to page 212. 

Use only the towing eyelet supplied with 
the vehicle and screw it in firmly until it 
stops. Use the tow fitting for towing on paved 
roads only. Avoid lateral loading of the tow fit¬ 
ting, e.g., do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting. 
Otherwise, the tow fitting and the vehicle could 
be damaged.◄ 

Access to screw thread 


Front 



Release the cover panel in the bumper: 
Press on the recess at the bottom left in the 
cover panel. 





220 

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 











Rear 



Release the cover panel in the bumper: 

Press on the recess at the bottom center in the 
cover panel. 

Being towed 

Make sure that the ignition is switched on, 
refer to page 50; otherwise, the low-beam 
headlamps, tail lamps, turn signal indicators and 
windshield wipers may be unavailable. 

If the electrical system fails, do not tow-start or 
tow the vehicle. The electrical steering wheel 
lock cannot be released and the vehicle cannot 
be steered. Jump-starting, refer to page 219. 

Power steering assistance is not available when 
the engine is not running. Thus, braking and 
steering will require increased effort.^ 

Manual transmission 

Gearshift lever in neutral position. 

Automatic transmission 

Selector lever in position N. 

Changing selector lever positions, refer 
to page 54. 

Do not exceed a towing speed of 31 mph 
or 50 km/h and a towing distance of 
31 miles/50 km; otherwise, the automatic 
transmission may be damaged.◄ 


7-gear sport automatic transmission 
with dual clutch 

Ensure that transmission lock P is not 
engaged as the rear wheels will otherwise 
be blocked. 

When using the car wash function, refer to 
page 209, note that the parking lock P is 
engaged automatically after approx. 30 min¬ 
utes, blocking the rear wheels. 

If an electrical malfunction occurs or if towing 
takes longer than approx. 20 minutes, manually 
release the parking lock, refer to page 58.4 

Do not exceed a towing speed of 31 mph 
or 50 km/h and a towing distance of 
31 miles/50 km; otherwise, the 7-gear sport 
automatic transmission may be damaged.◄ 

Towing methods 

Do not lift the vehicle by a tow fitting or 
body and chassis parts; otherwise, dam¬ 
age may result.^ 

With a tow bar 

The towing vehicle must not be lighter 
than the towed vehicle; otherwise, it may 
be impossible to maintain control.◄ 

The tow fittings used should be on the same 
side on both vehicles. Should it prove impossi¬ 
ble to avoid mounting the tow bar at an angle, 
please observe the following: 

> Clearance and maneuvering capability will 
be sharply limited during cornering. 

> The tow bar will generate lateral forces if it is 
attached offset. 

Attach the tow bar to the tow fittings only, 
as attaching it to other parts of the vehicle 
could result in damage.◄ 










221 

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 


Mobility 



















Giving and receiving assistance 


With a tow rope 

When starting off in the towing vehicle, make 
sure that the tow rope is taut. 

To avoid jerking and the associated 
stresses on vehicle components when 
towing, always use nylon ropes or nylon straps. 
Attach the tow rope to the tow fittings only, as 
attaching it to other parts of the vehicle could 
result in damage.◄ 

With a tow truck 

Manual and automatic transmission: 



7-gear sport automatic transmission with dual 
clutch: 


Tow-starting 

Avoid tow-starting the vehicle whenever possi¬ 
ble; instead, jump-start the engine, refer to 
page 219. Vehicles with a catalytic converter 
should only be tow-started when the engine 
is cold. 

Vehicles with an automatic transmission or 7- 
gear sport automatic transmission with dual 
clutch cannot be tow-started at all. 

1. Switch on hazard warning flashers, comply 
with local regulations. 

2. Switch on the ignition, refer to page 50. 

3. Shift into 3rd gear. 

4. Have the vehicle tow-started with the clutch 
depressed and slowly release the clutch. 
After the engine starts, immediately 
depress the clutch completely again. 

5. Stop at a suitable location, remove the tow 
bar or rope and switch off the hazard warn¬ 
ing flashers. 

6. Have the vehicle checked. 




Have the BMW transported with a tow truck 
with a so-called lift bar or on a flat bed. 


222 


Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 












223 

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 


Mobility 





Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 




Reference 

This chapter contains technical data, short 
commands for the voice activation system and 
an index that will help you find information most 

quickly. 


Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 



Technical data 


Technical data 

Engine data 




Z4 sDrive30i 

Z4 sDrive35i 

Displacement 

cu in/cm 3 

182.8/2,996 

181.8/2,979 

Number of cylinders 


6 

6 

Maximum power output 

hp 

255 

300 

at engine speed 

rpm 

6,600 

5,800 

Maximum torque 

Ibft/Nm 

220/298 

300/407 

at engine speed 

rpm 

2,600 

1,400-5,000 


226 


Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 



Dimensions 



76.8/1,951 




98.3 / 2,496 
166.9/4,239 


All dimensions given in inches/mm. 

Smallest turning circle diam.: 36 ft 1 in/11.0 m. 


227 

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 



















































Technical data 


Weights 




Z4 sDrive30i 

Z4 sDrive35i 

Approved gross weight 




> with manual transmission 

Ibs/kg 

3,924/1,780 

4,134/1,875 

> with automatic transmission 

Ibs/kg 

3,990/1,810 

4,178/1,895 

Load 

Ibs/kg 

562/255 

562/255 

Approved front axle load 

Ibs/kg 

1,808/820 

1,918/870 

Approved rear axle load 

Ibs/kg 

2,227/1,010 

2,271/1,030 

Cargo area capacity 

cu ft/I 6.4 - 

10.9/180-310 

6.4-10.9/180-310 

Capacities 

Notes 

Fuel tank 

US gal/liters 

Approx. 15.5/55 

Fuel grade: page 193 

Including reserve of 

US gal/liters 

Approx. 2.1/8.0 


Window washer system 

Including headlamp washers 

US qt/liters 

Approx. 6.3/6.0 

For more details: page 61 


228 


Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 




Short commands for the voice activation 
system* 

With short commands you can carry out certain item is selected. Here are the important short 
functions directly, regardless of which menu commands for the voice activation system. 


Useful short commands 


Function 

Command 

Opening the music collection 

>Music collection 

Opening the tone control 

>Tone< 

Selecting the settings 

>Settings< 

Opening the computer 

>Onboard info< 

Opening the contacts* 

>Contacts< 

Displaying the phone book* 

>Phonebook< 

Opening BMW Assist* 

>B M W Assist< 

Opening the home address* 

>Home address< 

Opening destination entry* 

>Enter address< 


CD/Multimedia 

CD/DVD drive 


Function 

Command 

Playing back a CD 

>C D on< 

Selecting a CD 

>Select C D< 

Selecting a CD and track 

>C D ... track ...< e.g., CD 3 track 5 

Selecting a track 

>C D track ...< e.g., track 5 

Opening the CD and Multimedia menu 

>C D and multimedia< 

CD and DVD 

>C D and D V D< 

Selecting a DVD 

>D V D ...< e.g., DVD 3 

Displaying entertainment details on the split 
screen 

Entertainment details< 


229 

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 


Reference 





Short commands for the voice activation system 


Music collection 


Function 

Command 

Calling up the current playback 

>Current playback 

Opening the music collection 

>Music collection< 

Playing back a music collection 

>Music collection on< 

Searching for music; opening the menu 

>Music search< 

Playing back the most frequently played tracks 

>Topfifty< 

External devices 

Function 

Command 

Opening external devices 

>External devices< 

Tone control 

Function 

Command 

Opening the tone control 

>Tone< 


Radio 

FM 


Function 

Command 

Calling up the radio 

>Radio< 

Calling up an FM station 

>FM< 

Opening manual search 

>Manual search< 

Calling up a frequency 

frequency ... megahertz< e.g., 93.5 mega¬ 
hertz or frequency 93.5 

Selecting the frequency range 

>Select frequency< 

Calling up a station 

>Select station< 

Calling up a station directly 

>Station ...< e.g., W-PLJ 

AM 

Function 

Command 

Calling up an AM station 

>AM< 

Opening manual search 

>Manual search< 

Calling up a frequency 

frequency... Kilohertz< e.g., frequency 753 or 
753 kilohertz 


230 


Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 







Satellite radio 


Function 

Command 

Calling up the satellite radio 

Satellite radio< 

Switching on the satellite radio 

Satellite radio on< 

Selecting a satellite radio channel 

Satellite radio channel ...< e.g., satellite radio 
channel 2 

Presets 

Function 

Command 

Calling up the stored stations 

> Presets < 

Choosing a stored station 

>Select preset< 

Selecting a stored station 

>Preset ...< e.g., stored station 2 

Telephone 

Function 

Command 

Opening the Telephone menu 

>Telephone< 

Displaying the phone book 

>Phonebook< 

Redialing 

>Redial< 

Displaying accepted calls 

>Received calls< 

Dialing a phone number 

>Dial number< 

List of messages 

>Messages< 

Bluetooth devices 

>Bluetooth< 


Navigation 

General information 


Function 

Command 

Navigation menu 

>Navigation< 

Opening destination entry 

>Enter address< 

Entering an address 

>Enter address< 

Opening destination guidance 

>Guidance< 

Starting destination guidance 

>Start guidance< 

Ending destination guidance 

>Stop guidance< 

Opening the home address 

>Home address< 

Opening the route criteria 

>Route preference< 

Opening the route 

>Route information< 


231 

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 


Reference 







Short commands for the voice activation system 


Function 

Command 

Switching on the voice instructions 

>Switch on voice instructions< 

Repeating a voice instruction 

>Repeat voice instructions< 

Switching off the voice instructions 

>Switch off voice instructions< 

Displaying the address book 

>Address book< 

Displaying the last destinations 

>Last destinations< 

Opening the traffic bulletins 

>Traffic lnfo< 

Special destinations 

>Points of interest 

Map 

Function 

Command 

Displaying the map 

>Map< 

Map facing north 

>Map facing north< 

Map in the direction of travel 

>Map in direction of travel< 

Perspective map 

>Map perspective view< 

Automatic scaling of the map* 

>Map with automatic scaling< 

Scale...feet* 

>Map scale ... feet< e.g., map scale of 100 feet 

Scale...meters* 

>Map scale ... meters< e.g., map scale of 

100 meters 

Scale...kilometers* 

>Map scale ... kilometers< e.g., map scale of 

5 kilometers 

Scale...miles* 

>Map scale ... miles< e.g., map scale of 5 miles 

Scale...yards* 

>Map scale ... yards< e.g., map scale of 

100 yards 

Split screen settings 

Function 

Command 

Split screen 

>Switch on splitscreen< 

Switching off the split screen 

>Turn off split screen< 

Adapting the split screen 

>Split screen contend 

Split screen map facing north 

>Split screen map facing north< 

Split screen current position 

>Split screen current position< 

Split screen direction of travel 

>Split screen map in direction of travel< 

Split screen perspective 

>Split screen perspective< 

Expanded intersection zoom on the split screen 

>Splitscreen Exit ramp view< 

Split screen scale...feet* 

>Split screen scale ... feet< e.g., split screen 
scale of 100 feet 


232 

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 





Function 

Command 

Split screen scale...meters* 

>Split screen scale... meters< e.g., split screen 
scale of 100 meters 

Split screen scale...kilometers* 

>Split screen scale ... kilometers< e.g., split 
screen scale of 5 kilometers 

Split screen scale...miles* 

>Split screen scale ... miles< e.g., split screen 
scale of 5 miles 

Split screen scale...yards* 

>Split screen scale ... yards< e.g., split screen 
scale of 100 yards 

Split screen, highlighting traffic bulletins 

>Split screen, Traffic Info map< 

Split screen, computer 

>Split screen on board info< 

Split screen, trip computer 

>Splitscreen trip computed 

Automatically scaling the split screen 

>Split screen automatic scaling< 

Destination guidance with intermediate destination 

Function 

Command 

Entering a new destination 

>Enter address< 

Trip list 

>Stored trips< 

Contacts 

Function 

Command 

My contacts 

>My contacts< 

Opening the contacts 

>Contacts< 

New contact 

>New contact 

BMW Assist 

Function 

Command 

Opening BMW Assist* 

>B M W Assist< 

Opening BMW Search* 

>BMW Search< 

Vehicle information 

Function 

Command 

Opening the computer 

>Onboard info< 

Opening the trip computer 

>Trip computed 

Opening the vehicle information 

>Vehicle info< 

Opening the vehicle status 

>Vehicle status< 


233 

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 


Reference 








Short commands for the voice activation system 


Settings 

Vehicle 


Function 

Command 

Opening the main menu 

>Main menu< 

Selecting the settings 

>Settings< 

Opening the options 

>Options< 

Settings on the Control Display 

>Control display< 

Opening the time and date settings 

>Time and date< 

Opening the language and unit settings 

>Language and units< 

Opening the speed limit settings 

>Speed< 

Opening the light settings 

>Lighting< 

Selecting the door lock 

>Door locks< 


234 


Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 


235 

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 


Reference 



Everything from A to Z 


Everything from A to Z 


Index 

A 

ABS Antilock Brake 
System 78 

Acceleration assistant, refer to 
Launch Control 58 
Accident, refer to Sending an 
Emergency Request 218 
Activated-charcoal filter for 
automatic climate control 98 
Adaptive light control 89 
Additional connection of the 
music player in the mobile 
phone 163 
Additives 
-coolant 204 
-engine oil 204 
Address for navigation 
-entering 121 

Adjusting temperature inside 
the car, refer to Air 
conditioner 94 

Adjusting temperature inside 
the car, refer to Automatic 
climate control 96 
Adjusting the thigh support 42 
Adjusting the tone during 
audio operation, refer to 
Tone control 140 
Airbags 85 

- indicator/warning lamp 87 
-sitting safely 41 

Air conditioner 93 
Air conditioning mode 
-air conditioner 94 

- automatic climate control 96 
-ventilation 95, 98 


Air distribution 
-automatic 97 

- individual 94 

- manual 94 
Airflow rate 94, 97 
Airing, refer to 

Ventilation 95, 98 
Air outlets, refer to Air 
vents 93 

Air pressure, refer to Tire 
inflation pressure 194 
Air recirculation, refer to 
Recirculated-air 
mode 94, 98 
Air supply 

- air conditioner 94 

- automatic climate control 96 
-ventilation 95, 98 

Air vents 93 
AKI, refer to Fuel 
specifications 193 
Alarm system 33 
-avoiding unintentional 
alarms 34 

- interior motion sensor 34 

- switching off an alarm 34 
-tilt alarm sensor 34 
Albums of music 

collection 160 
All-season tires, refer to 
Winter tires 200 
AM, waveband 143 
Ambient air, refer to 
Recirculated-air 
mode 94, 98 

Antenna for mobile phone 170 
Antifreeze 
-coolant 204 
-washerfluid 61 


Antilock Brake System 
ABS 78 

Anti-theft alarm system, refer 
to Alarm system 33 
Anti-theft system 29 

- for lug bolts, refer to Lug bolt 
lock 215 

Approved axle loads, refer to 
Weights 228 

Approved engine oils, refer to 
Specified engine oils 204 
Approved gross vehicle 
weight, refer to Weights 228 
Armrest, refer to Center 
armrest 104 
Arrival time, refer to 
Computer 66 

Assistance systems, refer to 
Driving stability control 
systems 78 

AUC automatic recirculated- 
air control 98 
Audio 140 
-controls 140 

- switching on/off 140 
-tone control 140 
-volume 140 

Audio device, external 104 
Automatic 

- air distribution 97 

- airflow rate 97 
-cruise control 61 

- headlamp control 88 
Automatic car washes 208 
Automatic climate control 93 

- automatic air distribution 97 
Automatic curb monitor 46 


236 


Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 


Automatic high beams and 
low beams, refer to High- 
beam assistant 90 
Automatic recirculated-air 
control AUC 98 
Automatic Service 
Request 188 

Automatic transmission with 
Steptronic 53 
-interlock 53, 54 

- overriding selector lever 
lock 55 

- shiftlock, refer to Changing 
selector lever position 54 

-sport program 54 
-towing 220 

- tow-starting 220 

AUTO program for automatic 
climate control 97 
AUX-IN port 104,163 
Available services 188 
Average fuel consumption 66 
-setting the units 68 
Average speed 66 
Avoid highways in 
navigation 130 
Avoiding unintentional 
alarms 34 
Axle loads, refer to 
Weights 228 

B 

Backrest contour, refer to 
Lumbar support 43 
Backrests, refer to Seat 
adjustment 42 

Backrest width adjustment 43 
Backup lamps 

- replacing bulb 214 
Backup lamps, refer to Tail 

lamps 214 

Band-aids, refer to First-aid 
pouch 219 
Bar, refer to Towing 
methods 221 


Base plate for telephone or 
mobile phone 

- refer to Snap-in adapter 180 

- refer to Snap-in adapter in 
the center armrest storage 
compartment 104 

Bass, tone setting 140 
Battery 216 
-charging 216 
-disposal 36, 216 
-jump-starting 219 

- remote control 28 

- temporary power failure 216 
Battery for mobile phone 181 
Battery renewal 

- remote control 36 

- remote control for vehicle 36 
Being towed 221 

Belts, refer to Safety belts 44 
Belt tensioner, refer to Safety 
belts 44 

Beverage holders, refer to 
Cupholders 105 
Blower, refer to Air flow 
rate 94, 97 

Bluetooth, activating/ 
deactivating 173 
Bluetooth, refer to separate 
Owner's Manual 
BMW 

-car shampoo 211 
BMW Assist, 
activating 186,188 
BMW Assist 184 
BMW Homepage 4 
BMW Maintenance 
System 206 
BMW Search 186 
BMW webpage 4 
Bottle holders, refer to 
Cupholders 105 
Brake 

- parking brake 52 

Brake Assist, refer to Dynamic 
Brake Control DBC 78 


Brake fluid, refer to Service 
requirements 69 
Brake Force Display 85 
Brake lamps 

- Brake Force Display 85 

- replacing bulb 214 
Brake pads 112 

- breaking in 112 
Brake rotors 114 

- brakes 112 

- breaking in 112 
Brakes 

-ABS 78 

- BMW Maintenance 
System 206 

- breaking in 112 

- service requirements 69 
Brakes, refer to Braking 

safely 114 
Brake system 112 

- BMW Maintenance 
System 206 

- breaking in 112 
-disc brakes 114 
Breakdown services, refer to 

Roadside Assistance 218 
Breaking in the clutch 112 
Breaking in the differential, 
refer to Engine and 
differential 112 
Break-in period 112 
Brightness of Control 
Display 76 

Bulb changing, refer to Lamps 
and bulbs 212 

Button for starting the engine, 
refer to Start/stop button 50 
Buttons on the steering 
wheel 11 

c 

California Proposition 65 
warning 6 


237 

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 


Reference 



Everything from A to Z 


Call 

-accepting 174 

- ending 174 

- rejecting 174 
Calling, refer to Phone 

numbers, dialing 174 
Can holders, refer to 
Cupholders 105 
Capacities 228 

Capacity of the cargo area 228 
Car battery, refer to Vehicle 
battery 216 

Car care, refer to Care 208 
Care 208 

- automatic car washes 208 
-care products 208 
-carpets 210 
-CD/DVD drives 211 
-chrome parts 210 
-displays 211 

- exterior 208 
-fine wood parts 211 

- headlamps 209 

- high-pressure washer 209 

- interior 210 
-leather 210 

- light-alloy wheels 210 

- paintwork 209 
-plastic parts 211 

- retractable hardtop 209 

- rubber seals 210 
-safety belts 211 

- sensors and cameras 211 

- upholstery and cloth 
trim 210 

-washing the car 
manually 209 
-windows 209 
Cargo, securing 116 
Cargo area 

- capacity 228 

- Comfort Access 35 

- lamp, refer to Interior 
lamps 92 

- opening from inside 32 

- opening from outside 33 


Cargo loading 
-securing cargo 116 
-stowing cargo 116 
-vehicle 115 
Carjack 

-jacking points 215 
Car key, refer to Integrated 
key/remote control 28 
Car phone 

- installation location, refer to 
Center armrest 104 

- refer to separate Owner's 
Manual 

Car phone, refer to 
Telephone 170 
Car radio, refer to Radio 1 43 
Car shampoo 211 
Carwash 115 

- with Comfort Access 36 
Car wash, refer to the Caring 

for your vehicle brochure 
Catalytic converter, refer to 
Hot exhaust system 1 13 
CBS Condition Based 
Service 206 
CD, audio playback 152 
CD/DVD changer 

- filling or emptying the 
magazine 156 

CD changer 151,155 
-controls 140 

- fast forward/reverse 153 

- random play sequence 152 
-selecting a track 152 

- switching on/off 140 
-tone control 140 
-volume 140 

CD player 151 

- controls 140 

- fast forward/reverse 153 

- random play sequence 152 

- selecting a track 152 

- switching on/off 140 
-tone control 140 
-volume 140 
Center armrest 104 
Center brake lamp 

- replacing bulb 215 


Center console, refer to 
Around the center 
console 14 
Central locking 
-from inside 32 
-from outside 29 
Central locking system 29 

- Comfort Access 34 

- setting unlocking 
characteristics 29 

Changes, technical, refer to 
For your own safety 5 
Changing bulbs, refer to 
Lamps and bulbs 212 
Changing the measurement 
units on the Control 
Display 68 

Changing wheels 215 
Chassis number, refer to 
Engine compartment 202 
Check Control 73 
Child restraint systems 48 
Child seats, refer to 
Transporting children 
safely 48 
Chrome parts 211 
Chrome polish 211 
Cleaning headlamps 61 
-washerfluid 61 
Cleaning your BMW, refer to 
Care 208 
Clock 64 

- 12h/24h mode 72 

- setting the time and date 72 
-setting time 71 

Closing 

-from inside 32 
-from outside 29 
Cockpit 10 

Cold start, refer to Starting the 
engine 51 

Combined instrument, refer to 
Instrument cluster 12 
Comfort Access 34 

- replacing the battery 36 

- what to observe before 
entering a carwash 36 

Comfort access, refer to 
Comfort Access 34 


238 

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 


Comfort area, refer to Around 
the center console 14 
Compartment for remote 
control, refer to Ignition 
lock 50 
Compass 102 
Computer 65 
-displays on Control 
Display 66 

Computer, refer to iDrive 16 
Concierge service 185 
Condensation, refer to When 
the vehicle is parked 114 
Condition Based Service 
CBS 206 

Configuring settings, refer to 
Personal Profile 28 
Confirmation signals for 
locking/unlocking the 
vehicle 31 
Congestion 

- refer to Route, bypassing 
sections 131 

Connecting vacuum cleaner, 
refer to Connecting 
electrical appliances 106 
Consumption, refer to 
Average consumption 66 
Consumption display 

- average consumption 66 
Contacts 

-creating 182 
Control Center, refer to 
iDrive 16 

Control Display, refer to 
iDrive 16 

- adjusting brightness 76 
Controller, refer to iDrive 16 
controls and displays 10 
Control unit, refer to iDrive 16 
Convenient loading 30 
Convenient operation 31 

- retractable hardtop 30 
-windows 30 
Convertible 

- enlarging cargo area 38,106 
Coolant 204 

-checking level 204 
Coolant temperature 65 


Cooling, maximum 97 
Cooling fluid, refer to 
Coolant 204 
Cooling system, refer to 
Coolant 204 
Copyright 2 

Corner-illuminating lamps, 
refer to Adaptive light 
control 89 

Cornering lamps, refer to 
Adaptive light control 89 
Correct tires 199 
Country codes DVD 153 
Courtesy lamps, refer to 
Interior lamps 92 
Criteria for route 130 
Cross-hairs in navigation 126 
Cruise control 61 

- malfunction 63 
Cruising range 66 
Cupholders 105 
Curb weight, refer to 

Weights 228 
Current playback 

- external devices 165 

- of music collection 160 
Customer Relations 187 

D 

Dashboard, refer to 
Cockpit 10 
Dashboard, refer to 
Instrument cluster 12 
Dashboard lighting, refer to 
Instrument lighting 91 
Data, technical 226 
-dimensions 227 

- engine 226 
-weights 228 
Data recorders 207 
Data transfer 188 
Date 

- date format 73 
-setting 72 

Daytime running lights 89 
DBC Dynamic Brake 
Control 78 


DCC, refer to Cruise 
control 61 

Deactivating passenger 
airbags 86 
Deadlocking, refer to 
Locking 30 
Defect 

-door lock 31 
-fuel filler flap 192 
Defogging windows 95 
Defrosting windows 95 
Defrost position, refer to 
Defrosting windows 95 
Destination, entering by town/ 
city name 121 
Destination address 
-entering 121,127 
Destination entry via BMW 
Assist 125 

Destination for navigation 

- entering by voice 127 

- entering via map 126 
-entry 121 

- home address 124 

- manual entry 121 
Destination guidance 130 

- bypassing a route 
section 131 

- changing specified 
route 130 

- continuing 130 
-starting 130 
-voice instructions 132 
-volume of voice 

instructions 132 
Detour, selecting 136 
Digital clock 64 
Digital compass 102 
Digital radio, refer to HD 
Radio 144 
Dimensions 227 
Directional indicators, refer to 
Turn signals 59 
Direction instructions, refer to 
Voice instructions 132 
Directory for navigation, refer 
to Address book 123 
Displacement, refer to Engine 
data 226 


239 

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 


Reference 



Everything from A to Z 


Display, refer to iDrive 
controls 16 

Display lighting, refer to 
Instrument lighting 91 
Displays 

- on the Control Display 1 6 
Displays, refer to Instrument 

cluster 12 

Displays and controls 10 

Disposal 

-coolant 204 

- remote control battery 36 
-vehicle battery 216 
Distance remaining to service, 

refer to Service 
requirements 69 
Distance warning, refer to 
Park Distance Control 
PDC 77 

Door key, refer to Remote 
control with integrated 
key 28 
Door lock 31 
Doors, emergency 
operation 31 

DOT Quality Grades 197 
Draft-free ventilation 95, 98 
Drinks holders, refer to 
Cupholders 105 
Drive mode 56 
Drive-off assistance, refer to 
Dynamic Stability Control 
DSC 78 

Drive-off assistant 80 
Driving lamps, refer to Parking 
lamps/low beams 88 
Driving notes 112 
Driving off on hills, refer to 
Drive-off assistant 80 
Driving position, engaging, 
refer to Transmission 
positions 56 
Driving stability control 
systems 78, 79 
Driving through water 114 
Driving tips, refer to Driving 
notes 112 

DSC Dynamic Stability 
Control 78 


Dual clutch transmission 55 

- kickdown 56 
DVD 

-country codes 153 
-settings 154 
-video playback 153 
DVD changer 155 

- malfunctions 157 
DVD changer, refer to CD 

changer 151 
DVD menu 154 
DVD player, refer to CD 
player 151 
DVD video 153 
Dynamic Brake Control 
DBC 78 

Dynamic destination 
guidance 131 

Dynamic Driving Control 79 

E 

Eject button, refer to Buttons 
on the CD/DVD player 140 
Electrical malfunction 
-door lock 31 

- driver's door 31 
-fuel filler flap 192 

- M dual clutch transmission 
with Drivelogic 58 

Electric seat adjustment 42 
Electric steering wheel lock 

- with Comfort Access 35 
Electronic brake-force 

distribution EBV 78 
Electronic oil level check 202 
Electronic Stability Program 
ESP, refer to Dynamic 
Stability Control DSC 78 
Emergency actuation, 
automatic transmission, 
refer to Overriding selector 
lever lock 55 
Emergency operation 

- fuel filler flap, manual 
release 192 

Emergency operation, refer to 
Manual operation 
-door lock 31 


Emergency release 

- luggage compartment lid 
from inside 33 

Emergency Request 218 
Emergency services, refer to 
Roadside Assistance 218 
Energy, saving 
-saving fuel 112 
Engine 

- breaking in 112 

- data 226 

- overheated, refer to Coolant 
temperature 65 

-speed 226 
-starting 51 

- starting, Comfort Access 34 

- switching off 52 
Engine compartment 202 
Engine coolant, refer to 

Coolant 204 
Engine oil 

- adding 204 

- additives, refer to Specified 
engine oils 204 

- alternative oil types 204 

- BMW Maintenance 
System 206 

- capacity 228 

- checking level 202 

- intervals between changes, 
refer to Service 
requirements 69 

- specified engine oils 204 
Engine output, refer to Engine 

data 226 

Engine speed, refer to Engine 
data 226 

Engine starting, refer to 
Starting the engine 51 
Entering special destinations 
by name 126 
Entering the 
address 121,127 
Entry lamps, refer to Interior 
lamps 92 

Entry map for destination 126 
Equalizer, tone setting 141 
Error messages, refer to 
Check Control 73 


240 

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 


Exhaust system, refer to Hot 
exhaust system 113 
Exterior mirrors 45 
-adjusting 45 

- automatic dimming 
feature 46 

- automatic heating 46 
-folding in and out 45 
External audio device 104 
Eyes 

- for tow-starting and towing 
away 220 

- for tying down loads 116 

F 

Failure messages, refer to 
Check Control 73 
Failure of an electrical 
consumer 216 
False alarm 

-avoiding unintentional 
alarm 34 

- switching off an alarm 34 
Fastening safety belts, refer to 

Safety belts 44 
Fastest route for 
navigation 130 
Fast forward 
-CD changer 153 
-CD player 153 
Fault 

- parking brake 53 
Filter 

- refer to Microfilter/activated- 
charcoal filter for automatic 
climate control 98 

- refer to Microfilter for air 
conditioner 95 

First aid pouch 219 
Fixture for remote control, 
refer to Ignition lock 50 
Flash when locking/ 
unlocking 31 
Flat tire 

-run-flat tires 199 

- Tire Pressure Monitor 
TPM 82 


Flat Tire Monitor FTM 81 

- indicating a flat tire 81 

- indicator/warning lamp 81 

- initializing the system 81 

- snow chains 81 , 200 
-system limits 81 
Flat tires, refer to Tire 

condition 198 
Fluid reservoir, refer to 
Washer fluid reservoir 61 
FM, waveband 143 
Folding in the mirrors, before 
driving into a carwash 45 
Footbrake, refer to Braking 
safely 114 

Footwell lamps, refer to 
Interior lamps 92 
Forward gear, engaging, refer 
to Transmission 
positions 56 
For your own safety 5 
Free memory capacity, music 
collection 161 
Front airbags 85 
FTM, refer to Flat Tire 
Monitor 81 
Fuel 193 

- average consumption 66 
-gauge 65 

- high-quality brands 193 

- quality 193 
-specifications 193 

- tank contents, refer to 
Capacities 228 

Fuel clock, refer to Fuel 
gauge 65 

Fuel display, refer to Fuel 
gauge 65 
Fuel filler flap 192 

- releasing in the event of 
electrical malfunction 192 

Fuses 216 

G 

Garage door opener, refer to 
Integrated universal remote 
control 100 


Gasoline 

- refer to Average 
consumption 66 

Gasoline, refer to Required 
fuel 193 

Gasoline display, refer to Fuel 
gauge 65 
Gas station 

recommendations 131 
Gear display, refer to Displays 
in the instrument cluster 56 
Gear indicator, automatic 
transmission with 
Steptronic 53 
Gears, changing 57 
Gearshift lever 

- automatic transmission with 
Steptronic 54 

- manual transmission 53 
Gearshifts 

- automatic transmission with 
Steptronic 54 

- manual transmission 53 
General driving notes 113 
Glove compartment 103 
GPS navigation, refer to 

Navigation system 120 
Grills, refer to Air vents 93 
Gross vehicle weight, refer to 
Weights 228 

H 

Handbrake, refer to Parking 
brake 52 

Hands-free system 14 
Hazard warning flashers 14 
HD Radio 144 
Head airbags 85 
Headlamp control, 
automatic 88 
Headlamp flasher 59 

- indicator lamp 11,13 
Heated 

- mirrors 46 

- rear window 95, 98 

- seats 43 


241 

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 


Reference 



Everything from A to Z 


Heating 93 

- mirrors 46 

- rear window 95, 98 

- seats 43 

Heating and ventilation, refer 
to Climate 93 

Heavy loads, refer to Stowing 
cargo 116 
Height, refer to 
Dimensions 227 
Height adjustment 

- seats 42 
-steering wheel 46 
High-beam assistant 90 
High beams 90 

- headlamp flasher 90 

- indicator lamp 13 

High beams and low beams, 
automatic, refer to High- 
beam assistant 90 
High-pressure 
washer 208, 209 
High water, refer to Driving 
through water 114 
Highways, refer to Route 
criteria 130 
Hills 114 

Holders for cups 105 
Homepage BMW 4 
Hood 201 
Horn 10,11 

Hot exhaust system 113 
Hydraulic brake assist, refer to 
Dynamic Brake Control 
DBC 78 

Hydroplaning 113 

i 

IBOC, refer to HD Radio 144 
Ice warning, refer to Outside 
temperature warning 64 
Identification marks 

- run-flat tires 199 
-tire coding 197 


iDrive 16 

- adjusting brightness 76 

- changing language 75 

- changing settings 75 

- changing units of measure 
and display format 68 

-controls 16 

- menu guidance 17 

- operating principle 16 

- overview 16 
-setting the date and 

time 71,72 

- status information 20 
iDrive operating principle 16 
Ignition 50 

- switched off 50 

- switched on 50 

Ignition key, refer to Remote 
control with integrated 
key 28 

Ignition key position 1, refer to 
Radio readiness 50 
Ignition key position 2, refer to 
Ignition on 50 
Ignition lock 50 
Imprint 2 

Indicator and warning 
lamps 13 

-Tire Pressure Monitor 
TPM 83 

Individual air distribution 94 
Inflation pressure, refer to Tire 
inflation pressure 194 
Inflation pressure monitoring, 
refer to Tire Pressure 
Monitor TPM 82 
Initializing 

- after power failure 216 

- compass, refer to 
Calibrating 103 

- Flat Tire Monitor FTM 81 

- radio, refer to Station, 
storing 144 

- refer to Setting the time and 
date 72 


Installation location 
-telephone 104 
Instructions for navigation 
system, refer to Voice 
instructions 132 
Instrument cluster 12 
Instrument lighting 91 
Instrument panel, refer to 
Cockpit 10 
Integrated key 28 
Integrated universal remote 
control 100 
Interactive map 127 
Interior lamps 92 
- remote control 30 
Interior motion sensor 34 
Interior rearview mirror 46 
-automatic dimming 
feature 46 
-compass 102 
Interlock, refer to Disengaging 
the remote control 53 
Intermittent mode of the 
wipers 60 

Intersection, entering, 
navigation 122 
iPod, connecting, refer to 
AUX-IN port 163 
iPod, connecting, refer to USB 
audio interface 163 

j 

Jacking points 215 
Joystick, refer to iDrive 16 
Jumpering, refer to Jump- 
starting 219 
Jump-starting 219 

K 

Key, refer to Integrated key/ 
remote control 28 
Keyless go, refer to Comfort 
Access 34 


242 


Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 


Keyless opening and closing, 
refer to Comfort Access 34 
Key Memory, refer to Personal 
Profile 28 
Kickdown 54 

- automatic transmission with 
Steptronic 54 

Knock control 193 

L 

Lamps 

- automatic headlamp 
control 88 

- parking lamps/low beams 88 
Lamps and bulbs, replacing 

bulbs 212 

Language, changing on 
Control Display 75 
Lap-and-shoulder belt, refer 
to Safety belts 44 
Lashing eyes, refer to 
Securing cargo 116 
Last destinations 124 
Launch Control 58 
Leather care 210 
LED Light-emitting 
diodes 212 
Length, refer to 
Dimensions 227 
License plate lamp, replacing 
bulb 215 
Light 

- high-beam assistant 90 

- refer to High-beam 
assistant 90 

Light-alloy wheels 210 
Light-emitting diodes 
LED 212 
Lighter 

- connecting electrical 
appliances 106 

Lighting 

- instruments 91 

- lamps and bulbs 212 

- vehicle, refer to Lamps 88 


Light switch 88 
Limit, refer to Speed limit 74 
Load securing equipment, 
refer to Securing cargo 116 
Lockable lug bolts, refer to 
Lug bolt lock 215 
Lock buttons, doors, refer to 
Locking 32 
Locking 

- adjusting confirmation 
signal 31 

-from inside 32 
-from outside 30 
-without remote control, refer 
to Comfort Access 34 
Locking and unlocking doors 

- confirmation signals 31 
-from inside 32 
-from outside 29 

Low beam control, refer to 
High-beam assistant 90 
Low-beam headlamps 88 
-automatic 88 
Lower back support, refer to 
Lumbar support 43 
Lug bolt lock 215 
Luggage compartment lid 32 

- Comfort Access 35 

- emergency release 33 

- opening from inside 32 

- opening from outside 33 

- remote control 30 
Lumbar support 43 

M 

M+S tires, refer to Winter 
tires 200 

Maintenance, refer to Service 
Booklet 

Maintenance system 206 
Malfunction 

- automatic transmission with 
Steptronic 55 

-tires 81 


Malfunction warnings, refer to 
Check Control 73 
Managing music 161 
Manual air distribution 94 
Manual carwash 209 
Manual mode, automatic 
transmission with 
Steptronic 54 
Manual operation 
-door lock 31 
-driver's door 31 
-fuel filler flap 192 

- transmission lock 58 
-transmission lock, automatic 

transmission 55 
Manual transmission 53 
Map display 132 
Map for navigation 
-changing scale 133 
-entering destination 126 
Master key, refer to Remote 
control with integrated 
key 28 

Maximum cooling 97 
Maximum speed 

- with winter tires 200 

M dual clutch transmission 
with Drivelogic 

- Launch Control 58 

- manually releasing 
transmission lock 58 

- neutral 56 

- reverse gear 56 
Measurements, refer to 

Dimensions 227 
Memory, refer to Seat and 
mirror memory 43 
MENU button 16 
Menus, refer to iDrive 16 
Messages 176 

Messages from the concierge 
service 177 


243 

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 


Reference 



Everything from A to Z 


Microfilter 

- BMW Maintenance 
System 206 

- for air conditioner 95 

- for automatic climate 
control 98 

Microfilter/activated-charcoal 

filter 

- BMW Maintenance 
System 206 

Mirror dimming feature 46 

Mirrors 45 

- automatic curb monitor 46 

- exterior mirrors 45 

- heating 46 

- interior rearview mirror 46 

- memory, refer to Seat and 
mirror memory 43 

Mobile phone 

- adjusting volume 173 

- connecting, refer to Mobile 
phone, pairing 170 

- installation location, refer to 
Center armrest 104 

- operation via iDrive 173 

- pairing 170 

- refer to separate Owner's 
Manual 

Mobile phone, installation 
location, refer to Center 
armrest 104 

Mobile phone, refer to 
Telephone 170 

Mobile phone, refer to the 
separate Owner's Manual 

Modifications, technical, refer 
to For your own safety 5 

Monitor, refer to iDrive 
controls 16 

Monitoring system for tire 
pressures, refer to Flat Tire 
Monitor 81 

MP3 player, connecting, refer 
to AUX-IN port 163 


MP3 player, connecting, refer 
to USB audio interface 163 
Multi-channel playback 141 
Multifunctional steering 
wheel, refer to Buttons on 
the steering wheel 1 1 
Multifunction switch 

- refer to Turn signals/ 
headlamp flasher 59 

- refer to Wiper system 60 
Multimedia screen, refer to 

iDrive 16 

Music, playing 159 
Music collection 158 

- backup 162 
-deleting 162 

- random sequence 1 61 

- restoring 162 

Music player, connecting, 
refer to AUX-IN port 163 
Music player, connecting, 
refer to USB audio 
interface 163 
Music search 159 
My Info 177 

N 

Navigation 

-starting destination 
guidance after entering a 
destination 123 

- storing current position 123 

- voice activation 127 
Navigation announcements, 

refer to Switching voice 
instructions on/off 1 32 
Navigation data 120 


Navigation system 120 
-address book 123 

- bypassing a route 
section 131 

- continuing destination 
guidance 130 

- destination entry 121 

- dynamic destination 
guidance 131 

- entering a destination by 
voice 127 

- entering a destination 
manually 121 

-frequently asked 
questions 137 

- gas station 
recommendations 131 

- planning a trip 128 

- route list 131 

- selecting destination via 
map 126 

- selecting route criteria 130 

- special destinations 124 
-starting destination 

guidance 130 

- terminating destination 
guidance 130 

-traffic bulletins 133 
-voice instructions 132 
-volume adjustment 132 
Nets, refer to Storage 
compartments 104 
Neutral 56 
New tires 199 

NORMAL program, Dynamic 
Driving Control 79, 80 
North-facing map 132 
Number of cylinders, refer to 
Engine data 226 
Nylon rope, refer to Tow 
rope 222 


244 


Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 


o 

OBD socket, refer to Socket 
for Onboard Diagnosis 207 
Octane ratings, refer to Fuel 
specifications 193 
Odometer 64 
Oil, refer to Engine oil 202 
Oil consumption 202 
Oil level 202 
Old batteries, refer to 
Disposal 216 

Onboard vehicle tool kit 212 
Opening and closing 

- Comfort Access 34 
-from inside 32 
-from outside 29 

- using the door lock 31 
-via the remote control 29 
Options, selecting for 

navigation 130 
Outlets 

- refer to Ventilation 95, 98 
Outlets, refer to Air vents 93 
Output, refer to Engine 

data 226 

Outside-air mode 

- automatic climate control 98 
Outside temperature 

display 64 

- changing units of 
measure 68 

- in computer 68 
Outside temperature 

warning 64 

Overheated engine, refer to 
Coolant temperature 65 
Overriding selector lever 
lock 55 
Overview 

- radio control 140 

p 

Paintwork care 209 


Park assistant, refer to Park 
Distance Control 77 
Park Distance Control PDC 77 
Parking 
-vehicle 52 

Parking aid, refer to Park 
Distance Control PDC 77 
Parking brake 52 
Parking lamps 88 
Parking lamps/low beams 88 
Passenger-side mirror tilt 
function 46 
Pathway lighting 89 
Personal Profile 28 
Phone book 173 
Phone numbers 
-dialing 174 
Pinch protection system 
-windows 37 
Placing a call, refer to 
telephone owner's manual 
Polish 211 
Pollen 

- refer to Microfilter/activated- 
charcoal filter for automatic 
climate control 98 

- refer to Microfilter for air 
conditioner 95 

Postal code, entering for 
navigation 122 
Power failure 216 
Power windows 37 
Power windows, refer to 
Windows 36 
Pressure, tires 194 
Pressure monitoring, tires 81 

- Flat Tire Monitor 81 
Pressure monitoring of tires, 

refer to Tire Pressure 
Monitor TPM 82 
Programmable buttons on the 
steering wheel 11 
Protection function, refer to 
Pinch protection system 
-windows 37 


Providing medical assistance, 
refer to First add pouch 219 
Puncture 

- Flat Tire Monitor 81 

R 

Radio 

- controls 140 
-HD Radio 144 
-satellite radio 146 

- selecting a waveband 143 
-storing stations 144 

- switching on/off 140 
-tone control 140 
-volume 140 

Radio position, refer to Radio 
readiness 50 
Radio readiness 50 

- switched off 50 
-switched on 50 
Radio-remote key, refer to 

Remote control with 
integrated key 28 
Rain sensor 60 
Random sequence 
-CD changer 152 
-CD player 152 

- external devices 1 65 

- music collection 161 
Reading lamps 92 
Rear fog lamps 

- indicator lamp 13 

Rear lamp, refer to Tail lamps 

- replacing bulb 214 
Rear lamps, refer to Tail 

lamps 214 
Rear turn signals 

- replacing bulb 214 
Rearview mirror, refer to 

Mirrors 45 

Rear window defroster 95, 98 
Receiving level of mobile 
phone, refer to Status 
information 20 


245 

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 


Reference 



Everything from A to Z 


Reception 
-quality 144 

- radio station 144 
Recirculated-air mode 94, 98 
Recirculation of air, refer to 

Recirculated-air 
mode 94, 98 
Reclining seat, refer to 
Backrest 42 
Refueling 192 
Releasing 
-hood 201 

Remaining distance, refer to 
Cruising range 66 
Remote control 28 

- battery renewal 36 

- Comfort Access 34 

- garage door opener 100 

- luggage compartment lid 30 

- malfunction 31,36 

- removing from the ignition 
lock 50 

- service data 206 
Replacement remote 

control 28 

Replacing bulbs, refer to 
Lamps and bulbs 212 
Replacing tires 199 
Replacing tires, refer to New 
wheels and tires 199 
Reporting safety defects 6 
Reserve warning, refer to Fuel 
gauge 65 

Reset, refer to Resetting tone 
settings 142 
Restraint systems 
-for children 48 

- refer to Safety belts 44 
Retractable hardtop 

- care, refer to Caring for your 
vehicle brochure 

- convenient operation 30 

- opening and closing 39 

- remote control 30 
retractable hardtop 38 
Reverse 

- CD changer 153 

- CD player 153 


Reverse gear 56 

- automatic transmission with 
Steptronic 54 

- manual transmission 53 
Road map 132 
Roadside 

Assistance 185, 218 
Roadside parking lamps 90 
Roadworthiness test, refer to 
Service requirements 69 
Roof load capacity 228 
Rope, refer to Tow-starting, 
towing away 222 
Rotary/pushbutton, refer to 
Drive 16 
Route 130,131 

- bypassing sections 131 
-changing 130,131 

- changing criteria 130 

- displaying streets or towns/ 
cities 131 

- map display 132 
-selecting 130 

Route instructions, refer to 
Destination guidance 
through voice 
instructions 132 
Route map, refer to Map 
display 132 

Route section, changing 131 
Route selection 130 
RSC Runflat System 
Component, refer to Run- 
flat tires 199 

Runflat System Component 
RSC, refer to Run-flat 
tires 199 
Run-flat tires 199 

- continuing driving with a 
damaged tire 82 

-flat tire 81 

- Flat Tire Monitor 81 

- new tires 199 

- replacing 199 

- tire inflation pressure 194 
-wintertires 200 


s 

Safety-belt height 
adjustment 45 
Safety belts 44 
-damage 45 

- indicator/warning lamp 45 

- reminder 45 
-sitting safely 41 
Safety systems 
-airbags 85 

- Antilock Brake System 
ABS 78 

- brake system 78 

- driving stability control 
systems 78 

- Dynamic Stability Control 
DSC 78 

- safety belts 44 

Safety tires, refer to Run-flat 
tires 199 

Satellite radio 146 

- enabling or unsubscribing 
from a channel 146 

- favorites 148 
-selecting channel 147 
-storing channel 147 

- timeshift 148 
-Traffic Jump 149 
Saving fuel 112 
Screen, refer to Drive 

controls 16 
Screw thread for tow 
fitting 220 

SDARS, refer to Satellite 
radio 146 
Seat adjustment 

- electric 42 

- mechanical 42 

Seat and mirror memory 43 
Seat belt reminder, refer to 
"Fasten safety belts" 
reminder 45 
Seat heating 43 


246 

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 


Seats 41 

- adjusting electrically 42 

- adjusting the seats 42 

- heating 43 

- memory, refer to Seat and 
mirror memory 43 

- saving a setting, refer to Seat 
and mirror memory 43 

-sitting safely 41 
Securing cargo 107 
Securing the vehicle 
-from inside 32 
-from outside 29 
Selecting new scale for 
navigation 133 
Selector lever 56 

- automatic transmission with 
Steptronic 54 

Selector lever lock, refer to 
Changing selector lever 
positions, shiftlock 54 
Selector lever positions 

- automatic transmission with 
Steptronic 54 

Service, refer to Roadside 
Assistance 218 
Service car, refer to Roadside 
Assistance 218 
Service data in the remote 
control 206 

Service Interval Display, refer 
to Condition Based Service 
CBS 206 

Service Request 187 
Service requirement display, 
refer to Condition Based 
Service CBS 206 
Service requirements 69 
Services status 188 
Servotronic 85 
Settings 

- changing on Control 
Display 75 

- clock, 12h/24h mode 72 

- DVD 1 54 

- language 75 

Settings and information 68 


Settings for the map 
display 133 
Shifting 57 

Shifting, sport automatic 
transmission 57 
Shifting gears 

- automatic transmission with 
Steptronic 54 

- manual transmission 53 
Shiftlock 

- automatic transmission, 
refer to Changing selector 
lever positions 54 

Shift paddles on steering 
wheel 57 

Short commands for the voice 
activation system 229 
Short route in navigation, refer 
to Selecting route 130 
Side airbags 85 
Side windows, refer to 
Windows 36 
Signal horn, refer to 
Horn 10,11 
Sitting safely 41 
-with airbags 41 
-with safety belts 41 
Ski bag for convertible, refer to 
Through-loading opening 
with integrated transport 
bag 106 

Slot for remote control 50 
Snap-in adapter 
-inserting/removing 180 
-use 170 

Snap-in adapter, refer to 
Center armrest storage 
compartment 104 
Socket, Onboard Diagnosis 
OBD 207 

Socket, refer to Connecting 
electrical appliances 106 
SOS, refer to Sending an 
Emergency Request 218 
Sound output for 
entertainment on/off 140 
Spare fuses, 216 
Spare fuses, refer to 
Fuses 216 


Special destinations 124 
Special destinations, 
displaying 126 

Special oils, refer to Specified 
engine oils 204 
Specified engine oils 204 
Speed 

- run-flat tires 82 

- with winter tires 200 
Speed limit 74 

Speed limit warning, refer to 
Speed limit 74 
Speedometer 12 
Speed Volume 142 
SPORT+ program, Dynamic 
Driving Control 79, 80 
SPORT program, Dynamic 
Driving Control 79, 80 
Sport program with sport 
automatic transmission 57 
Spray nozzles, refer to 
Cleaning windshield and 
headlamps 61 
Stability control, refer to 
Driving stability control 
systems 78, 79 
Start/stop button 50 

- starting the engine 51 

- switching off the engine 52 
Starting, refer to Starting the 

engine 51 

Starting assistance, refer to 
Jump-starting 219 
Starting difficulties 
-jump-starting 219 
Starting the engine 

- start/stop button 50 
State/province, for 

navigation 121 
Station, refer to Radio 143 
Station, selecting 

- radio 143 

Status of this Owner's Manual 
at time of printing 5 
Steam jet 208, 209 


247 

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 


Reference 



Everything from A to Z 


Steering wheel 46 
-adjustment 46 

- buttons on steering 
wheel 11 

- lock 50 

- locking with Comfort 
Access 35 

-shift paddles 57 
Steering wheel buttons, refer 
to Shift paddles 57 
Steptronic, refer to Automatic 
transmission with 
Steptronic 53 
Storage 211 

Storage compartments 104 
Storage nets 106 
Stored trip, calling up 129 
Storing a destination in the 
address book 123 
Storing music 158 
Storing seat positions, refer to 
Seat and mirror memory 43 
Storing tires 200 
Stowage, refer to Storage 
compartments 104 
Stowing cargo 116 
Street, entering, 
navigation 122 

Summer tires, refer to Wheels 
and tires 194 

Surface ice, refer to Outside 
temperature warning 64 
Surround 141 
SVCD 153 
SW, waveband 143 
Switches, refer to Cockpit 10 
Switching off 
-engine 52 

Switching off the engine 

- start/stop button 50 
Switching on 
-audio 140 

-CD changer 140 
-CD player 140 

- radio 140 
Symbols 4 

- status information 20 


T 

Tachometer 64 
Tailgate 

- opening from inside 32 
Tailgate, refer to Luggage 

compartment lid 32 
Tail lamps 214 

- replacing bulb 214 
Tank contents, refer to 

Capacities 228 
Technical data 226 

- capacities 228 
-dimensions 227 
Technical modifications, refer 

to For your own safety 5 
Telephone 170 

- installation location, refer to 
Center armrest 104 

- refer to separate Owner's 
Manual 

- voice commands 178 
TeleService 185 
TeleService Diagnosis 186 
TeleService Help 186 
Temperature 

- air conditioner 95 

- automatic climate control 96 

- changing unit of measure 68 

- coolant, refer to Coolant 
temperature 65 

Temperature display 

- outside temperature 64 

- outside temperature 
warning 64 

-setting the units 68 
Tempomat, refer to Cruise 
control 61 

Tensioning straps, refer to 
Securing cargo 116 
The individual vehicle 5 
Third brake lamp, refer to 
Center brake lamp 215 
Through-loading opening with 
integrated transport 
bag 106 

Tilt alarm sensor 34 
Tilt function, passenger-side 
mirror 46 


Tire inflation pressure 194 

- loss 81 , 83 

Tire pressure monitoring, 
refer to Flat Tire Monitor 81 
Tire Pressure Monitor 
TPM 82 

- resetting the system 83 

- system limitations 82 
-warning lamp 83 

Tire puncture, refer to Flat Tire 
Monitor 81 

Tire Quality Grading 197 
Tires 

-age 197,199 
-air loss 83 

- breaking in 112 

- changing, refer to Changing 
wheels 215 

-condition 198 
-damage 198 

- inflation pressure 194 
-labels 197 

- minimum tread depth 198 

- new wheels and tires 199 

- pressure monitoring, refer to 
Flat Tire Monitor 81 

- pressure monitoring, refer to 
Tire Pressure Monitor 
TPM 82 

- puncture 81 

- replacing 199 

- run-flat 199 
-size 197 

- storage 200 
-tread depth 198 

- wear indicators, refer to 
Minimum tread depth 198 

-wheel/tire combination, refer 
to Correct wheels and 
tires 199 
-winter tires 200 
TMC station, refer to Traffic 
bulletins 133 
Tone 

- control 140 

- middle setting 142 
Tools, refer to Onboard 

vehicle tool kit 212 


248 

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 


Top, refer to Retractable 
hardtop 38 
Top 50 of music 
collection 160 
Torque, refer to Engine 
data 226 
Tow bar 221 
Tow fitting 220 
-screwthread 220 
Tow fittings for tow-starting 
and towing away 220 
Towing 220 

- car with automatic 
transmission 220 

- methods 221 

Towing and tow-starting 220 
Town/city, for navigation 121 
Tow rope 222 
Tow-starting 220, 222 
TPM, refer to Tire Pressure 
Monitor 82 
Track 

- selecting on CD 152 
Traction control, refer to 

Dynamic Stability Control 
DSC 78 

TRACTION program, 
Dynamic Driving Control 79 
Traffic bulletins 

- categories 135 

Traffic bulletins, filtering 1 35 
Traffic bulletins for 
navigation 133 

- during destination 
guidance 135 

- in map view 135 
Traffic jam 

- displaying traffic 
bulletins 133 


Transmission 

- automatic transmission with 
Steptronic 53 

- dual clutch transmission 55 

- Launch Control 58 

- manual transmission 53 

- neutral 56 

- overriding selector lever lock 
for automatic transmission 
with Steptronic 55 

- reverse gear 56 
-transmission lock, releasing 

manually 58 
Transmission interlock 

- refer to Changing selector 
lever position 54 

- refer to P Park 54 
Transmission lock, releasing 

manually 58 

Transmission positions 56 
Transporting children 
safely 48 

Transport securing devices, 
refer to Securing cargo 116 
Travel instructions, refer to 
Voice instructions 132 
Tread depth, referto Minimum 
tire tread 198 
Trip, deleting 129 
Trip, storing 128 
Trip-distance counter, refer to 
Trip odometer 64 
Triple turn signal activation 60 
Trip odometer 64 
Trips, changing 129 
Turning circle, refer to 
Dimensions 227 
Turn signal indicators 

- indicator/warning lamp 12 
-triple turn signal 60 
Turn signals 59 

Tying down loads, referto 
Cargo loading 116 

u 

Uniform Tire Quality Grading/ 
UTQR197 


Units 

- average consumption 68 
-temperature 68 
Universal garage door opener, 

referto Integrated universal 
remote control 100 
Universal mobile phone 
preparation package, refer 
to separate Owner's Manual 
Universal remote control 100 
Unlatching, refer to 
Unlocking 34 
Unlocking 
-from inside 32 
-from outside 29 

- luggage compartment lid 35 
-setting unlocking 

characteristics 29 
-without remote control, refer 
to Comfort Access 34 
Updating the navigation 
data 1 20 

USB audio interface 1 63 
USB interface 103 

v 

VCD 153 
Vehicle 
-battery 216 

- breaking in 112 
-cargo loading 115 

- Identification Number, refer 
to Engine compartment 202 

- measurements, refer to 
Dimensions 227 

- parking 52 
-weight 228 
Vehicle jack 215 
Vehicle storage 211 
Ventilation 98 

- air conditioner 95 
-draft-free 95, 98 
Ventilation, refer to Climate 93 
Vents, refer to Air vents 93 
Vents, refer to 

Ventilation 95, 98 
Video menu 154 
Video playback 153 


249 

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 


Reference 



Everything from A to Z 


Voice, refer to Destination 
guidance through voice 
instructions 132 
Voice commands 

- short commands 229 
-telephone 178 
Voice instructions from 

navigation system 132 

- repeating 132 

- switching on/off 132 
-volume 132 

Voice phone book* 179 
Volume 140 
-audio sources 140 
-fuel tank, refer to 
Capacities 228 

- mobile phone 173 
-voice instructions 132 
Volume balance, tone 

setting 142 

w 

Warning and indicator 
lamps 13 


Warning messages, refer to 
Check Control 73 
Warning triangle 219 
Washer fluid 61 

- content of the reservoir 61 
Washer fluid reservoir 61 
Water on roads, refer to 

Driving through water 114 
Water penetration 208, 209 
Waveband on the radio 143 
Wear indicators in tires, refer 
to Minimum tread depth 1 98 
Weights 228 
Welcome lamps 88 
Wheel/tire combination, refer 
to Correct wheels and 
tires 1 99 

Wheelbase, refer to 
Dimensions 227 
Wheels, new 199 
Wheels and tires 194 
Width, refer to 
Dimensions 227 
Wind deflector 39 
Windows 36 

- convenient operation 30 
-opening, closing 37 

- pinch protection system 37 
Windows, defrosting, refer to 

Defrosting windows 95 
Windows, defrosting and 
defogging 

- air conditioner 95 
Windows, indicator on Control 

Display 16 
Windshield 
-cleaning 61 

- defrosting and defogging 95 
Windshield, defrosting, refer 

to Defrosting windows 95 
Windshield wash 60 
-filling capacity, reservoir 228 

- nozzles 61 

- reservoir for washer fluid 61 
-washerfluid 61 
Windshield wiper blades, 

changing 212 
Windshield wipers, refer to 
Wiper system 60 


Winter tires 200 

- storage 200 

Wiper blade replacement 212 

Wiper system 60 

Word-matching principle for 
navigation 129 

Work in the engine 
compartment 201 

Wrench/screwdriver, refer to 
Onboard vehicle tool kit 212 

x 

Xenon lamps 

- replacing bulbs 213 

Y 

Your individual vehicle 

- settings, refer to Personal 
Profile 28 


250 

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 


Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 



More about BMW 


bmwusa.com 


Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 883 - © 08/09 BMW AG 



The Ultimate 
Driving Machine 


01 41 2 602 883 Ue iDrive